HP Hewlett Packard Vacuum Cleaner 22A User Manual

HP 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers

(Including Options 001, 003, 004, 006,

and 008)

User’s Handbook

SERIAL NUMBERS

This manual applies directly to any synthesized sweeper with serial

number prefix combinations. You may have to modify this manual

so that it applies directly to your instrument version. Refer to the

“Instrument History” chapter.

HP Part No.

Microfiche Part No.

Printed in USA

November 1995

Edition 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The information contained in this document is subject to change

without notice.

Notice

Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this

material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of

merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard

shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental

or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing,

performance, or use of this material.

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject

to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the

Rights of Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS

252.227-7013 for DOD agencies, and subparagraphs (c) (1) and

Restricted Rights

Legend

Computer Software Restricted Rights

clause at FAR 52.227-19 for other agencies.

without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed

under the copyright laws.

1400 Fountaingrove Parkway, Santa Rosa, CA 95403-1799, USA

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance

agreements are available for Hewlett-Packard products. For any

assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service

Assistance

The following safety notes are used throughout this manual.

Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and its meaning before

operating this instrument.

Safety Notes

Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if

not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss

of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated

conditions are fully understood and met.

WARNING

Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if

not correctly performed or adhered to, would result in damage to or

destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign

until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.

CAUTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Safety

Considerations

No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified

personnel. To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.

WARNING

For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only

with same type and rating (F

material is prohibited.

The use of other fuses or

This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing

ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only

be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth

contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor, inside or

outside the instrument, is likely to make the instrument dangerous.

Intentional interruption is prohibited.

This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing

ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only

be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth

contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor, inside or

outside the instrument, is likely to make the instrument dangerous.

Intentional interruption is prohibited.

If this instrument is used in a manner not specified by

Hewlett-Packard Co., the protection provided by the instrument may

be impaired. This product must be used in a normal condition (in

which all means for protection are intact) only.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before switching on this instrument, make sure that the line

voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and

the correct fuse is installed.

CAUTION

Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this

instrument. Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not

using this cord may cause instrument damage.

Before switching on this product, make sure that the line voltage

selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and

the correct fuse is installed. Assure the supply voltage is in the

specified range.

Ventilation Requirements: When installing the instrument in a

cabinet, the convection into and out of the instrument must not be

restricted. The ambient temperature (outside the cabinet) must be

less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument

by 4

for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet. If the total

power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then

forced convection must be used.

This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and

Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664, respectively.

The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device.

It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other

parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby

switch and is not a LINE switch.

Note

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This manual provides user information for the HP 8360 Series

Synthesized Sweepers.

PREFACE

This manual applies to instruments having a serial number prefix

listed on the title page (behind the “Documentation Map” tab).

Some changes may have to be made to this manual so that it

applies directly to each instrument; refer to Chapter 5, “Instrument

History”, to see what changes may apply to your instrument.

Instruments Covered

By This Manual

A serial number label (Figure O-l) is attached to the instrument’s

rear panel. A prefix (four digits followed by a letter), and a suffix

(five digits unique to each instrument), comprise the instrument

serial number.

SERIAL NUMBER

PREFIX

SUFFIX

1 2 3 4 5

SER

INSTALLED

OPTIONS

Figure O-l. Typical Serial Number Label

An instrument’s prefix that is not listed on the title page may

indicate that the instrument is different from those documented

in this manual. For serial number prefixes before those listed

on the title page, refer to the HP 8360 Series Synthesized

Sweepers Instrument History (to order, see “Replaceable Parts” in

Assembly-Level Repair).

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tabs divide the major chapters of this manual. The contents of each

chapter is listed in the “Table of Contents.”

User’s Handbook

Organization

Documentation M ap

HP 8360 Series

Documentation

For a pictorial representation of the HP 8360 series documentation,

see the “Documentation Map” at the front of this manual.

Ordering Manual

A manual part number is listed on the title page of this manual. You

may use it to order extra copies of this manual. See “Replaceable

Parts” in Assembly-Level Repair for a complete list of HP 8360

documentation and ordering numbers.

The following conventions are used in the HP 8360 series

documentation:

Typeface

Conventions

Italics Italic type is used for emphasis, and for titles of manuals and

other publications.

Computer Computer type is used for information displayed on the

instrument. For example: In this sequence, POWER LEVEL is displayed.

Instrument keys are represented in “key cap.” You are

instructed to press a

are located just below the display, and their

functions depend on the current display. These keys are represented

in “softkey.” You are instructed to select a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC

Publication 1010, Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring

Apparatus, and has been supplied in a safe condition. The

instruction documentation contains information and warnings

which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to

maintain the instrument in a safe condition.

Regulatory

Information

Manufacturer’s

Declaration

This is to certify that this product meets the radio frequency

Note

interference requirements of Directive FTZ

The German

Bundespost has been notified that this equipment was put into

circulation and has been granted the right to check the product type

for compliance with these requirements.

Note: If test and measurement equipment is operated with

unshielded cables and/or used for measurements on open set-ups, the

user must insure that under these operating conditions, the radio

frequency interference limits are met at the border of his premises.

Model HP 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers

Hiermit wird bescheinigt, dass dieses

mit den Bestimmungen von

Note

ist .

Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses

angezeight und die Berechtigung

der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen

Zustzinformation

Mess-und Testgerate:

Werden Mess- und Testgerate mit ungeschirmten Kabeln

in offenen Messaufbauten verwendet, so ist vom Betreiber

sicherzustellen, dass die Funk-Entstorbestimmungen unter

Betriebsbedingungen an seiner Grundstiicksgrenze eingehalten

werden.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notice for Germany:

Noise Declaration

< 70

am Arbeitsplatz (operator position)

normaler Betrieb (normal position)

DIN 45635 T. 19 (per

7779)

Declaration of

Conformity

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

22 and EN 45014

Manufacturer’s Address:

Your local Hewlett-Packard

and Service

or Hewlett-Packard

Department HQ-TRE,

European Contact:

Herrenberger

130,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The instruction documentation symbol. The product is

marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the

user to refer to the instructions in the documentation.

Instrument Markings

The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European

Community.

The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the

Canadian Standards Association.

This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical

Group 1 Class A product.

This is an ON symbol. The symbol ON is used to mark

the position of the instrument power line switch.

This is an ON symbol. The symbol ON is used to mark

the position of the instrument power line switch.

This is a STANDBY symbol. The STANDBY symbol is

used to mark the position of the instrument power line

switch.

This is an OFF symbol. The OFF symbol is used to

mark the position of the instrument power line switch.

This is an AC symbol. The AC symbol is used to

indicate the required nature of the line module input

power.

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices

H e a d q u a r t e r s

C a li fo r n i a , N o r t h e r n

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Co.

301 E . E velyn

C a li fo r n i a , S o u t h e r n

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Co.

1421 Sou t h Ma n h a t t a n Ave.

F u ller t on , CA 92631

(714) 999-6700

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Co.

19320 P r u n er id ge Aven u e

Cu p er t in o, CA 95014

(800) 752-0900

Mou n t a in View , CA 94041

(415) 694-2000

C o lo r a d o

G e o r g i a

I llin o is

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Co.

24 In ver n ess P la ce, E a st

E n glew ood , CO 80112

(303) 649-5512

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Co.

2000 Sou t h P a r k P la ce

At la n t a , GA 30339

(404) 955-1500

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Co.

5201

Dr ive

R ollin g Mea d ow s, IL 60008

(708) 255-9800

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Co.

150 Gr een P on d R d .

R ock a w a y, NJ 07866

(201) 586-5400

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Co.

930 E . Ca m p b ell R d .

R ich a r d son , TX 75081

H e a d q u a r t e r s

Hew lett-P a ck a r d S.A.

150, R ou t e d u

1217 Meyr in

Sw itzer la n d

Hew lett-P a ck a r d F r a n ce

1 Aven u e Du Ca n a d a

Hew lett-P a ck a r d

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Str a sse

61352 Ba d H om b u r g

Ger m a n y

Zon e

De Cou r t a b oeu f

Les Ulis Ced ex

(41

F r a n ce

(33

(49 6172)

82 60 60

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Ltd .

E sk d a le R oa d , Win n er sh Tr ia n gle

Ber k sh ir e

En gla n d

(44 734) 696622

Hew lett-P a ck a r d (Ca n a d a ) Ltd .

17500 Sou t h Ser vice R oa d

Tr a m -Ca n a d a H igh w a y

Kir k la n d , Qu ebec

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Com p a n y

3495 Deer Cr eek R oa d

P a lo Alto, Ca lifor n ia , USA

94304-1316

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Au str a lia Ltd .

J osep h St r eet

Bla ck b u r n , Vict or ia 3130

(61 3) 895-2895

Ca n a d a

(415) 857-5027

(514) 697-4232

Hew lett-P a ck a r d Sin ga p or e (P te.) Ltd .

150 Bea ch R oa d

Ch in a H ew let t -P a ck a r d Com p a n y

J a p a n , Ltd .

1-27-15

229, J a p a n

(81

Sa n H u a n Xl R oa d

Yu Sh u

Ga t ew a y West

Sin ga p or e 0718

Dia n Distr ict

(65) 291-9088

Beijin g, Ch in a

(86 1) 2566888

H e w le t t -P a ck a r d Ta iw a n

F loor , H -P Bu ild in g

337 F u H sin g Nor t h R oa d

Ta ip ei, Ta iw a n

2) 712-0404

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. GETTI NG STAR TED

What Is In This Chapter

How To Use This Chapter

Equipment Used In Examples

. . . . . . . . . . . .

l-l

. . . . . . . . .

Introducing the HP 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Area

Entry Area

CW Operation and Start/Stop Frequency Sweep . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CW Operation

. . . . . . . . . .

Start/Stop Frequency Sweep

Center Frequency/Span Operation

Power Level and Sweep Time Operation

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Level Operation

Sweep Time Operation

1-12

1-14

1-16

1-18

1-19

1-21

Continuous, Single, and Manual Sweep Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Marker Operation

. . . . .

Saving and Recalling an Instrument State

Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Sweep Operation

Power Slope Operation

Getting Started Advanced

Externally Leveling the Synthesizer

. . . . . . . .

Leveling with Detectors/Couplers /Splitters . . .

External Leveling Used With the Optional Step

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attenuator

. . . . . . . . . .

Leveling with Power Meters

. . . . .

Leveling with MM-wave Source Modules

Working with Mixers/Reverse Power Effects

. . . .

Working with Spectrum Analyzers/Reverse Power

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Effects

. . . . . . .

Optimizing Synthesizer Performance

Creating and

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

the User Flatness Correction

Array

Example 1

Creating a User Flatness Array, Example 2 . .

Swept mm-wave Measurement with Arbitrary

Correction Frequencies, Example 3

Scalar Analysis Measurement with User Flatness

. . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

Corrections, Example 4

Using Detector Calibration

Using the Tracking Feature

Contents-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Peaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tracking

ALC Bandwidth Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Step Sweep

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-51

Creating and Using a Frequency List . . . . . . .

Using the Security Features . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Preset Parameters . . . . . . . . .

Getting Started Programming . . . . . . . . . .

HP-IB General Information . . . . . . . . . . .

Interconnecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP-IB Instrument Nomenclature . . . . . . . .

Listener

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Talker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programming the Synthesizer . . . . . . . . .

HP-IB Command Statements . . . . . . . . .

Abort

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Local Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Getting Started with SCPI . . . . . . . . . . .

Definitions of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-58

1-61

Command Mnemonics

. . . . . . . . . . .

Angle Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Use Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Command Examples . . . . . . . . . . . .

Response Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Essentials for Beginners . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program and Response Messages

. . . . . . .

Forgiving Listening and Precise Talking . . . .

Types of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .

Subsystem Command Trees . . . . . . . . . .

The Command Tree Structure . . . . . . . .

Paths Through the Command Tree . . . . . .

Subsystem Command Tables . . . . . . . . . .

Reading the Command Table . . . . . . . .

More About Commands . . . . . . . . . . .

Query and Event Commands . . . . . . . .

Implied Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .

Program Message Examples . . . . . . . . .

Parameter Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Numeric Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .

Extended Numeric Parameters . . . . . . .

Discrete Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .

Boolean Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .

1-71

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reading Instrument Errors . . . . . . . . . .

Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program Comments . . . . . . . . . . .

Details of Commands and Responses . . . . . . .

In This Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program Message Syntax . . . . . . . . . . .

Subsystem Command Syntax . . . . . . . .

Common Command Syntax . . . . . . . . .

Response Message Syntax . . . . . . . . . . .

SCPI Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameter Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Numeric Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .

Extended Numeric Parameters . . . . . . .

Discrete Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .

Boolean Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .

Response Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . .

Real Response Data . . . . . . . . . . .

Integer Response Data . . . . . . . . . .

Discrete Response Data . . . . . . . . . .

String Response Data . . . . . . . . . . .

Programming Typical Measurements . . . . . . .

In This Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Example Programs . . . . . . . . .

Use of the Command Tables . . . . . . . . .

HP-IB Check, Example Program 1 . . . . . . .

Program Comments . . . . . . . . . . . .

Local Lockout Demonstration, Example Program 2

Program Comments . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up A Typical Sweep, Example Program 3

Program Comments . . . . . . . . . . . .

Queries, Example Program 4 . . . . . . . . . .

Program Comments . . . . . . . . . . . .

Saving and Recalling States, Example Program 5 .

Program Comments . . . . . . . . . . . .

Looping and Synchronization, Example Program 6

Program Comments . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-81

1-91

Using the

Command, Example Program 7 .

Program Comments . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the User Flatness Correction Commands,

Example Program 8 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programming the Status System . . . . . . . . .

In This Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Status Register Model . . . . . . . . .

Condition Register . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transition Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Event Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

An Example Sequence

. . . . . . . . . . .

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming the Trigger System . . . . . . . . .

In This Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generalized Trigger Model . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Details of Trigger States . . . . . . . . . . .

Inside the Idle State . . . . . . . . . . .

Inside the Initiate State . . . . . . . . . .

Inside Event Detection States . . . . . . .

Inside the Sequence Operation State . . . .

Common Trigger Configurations . . . . . . . .

The

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .

The TRIG Configuration . . . . . . . . . .

Description of Triggering in the HP 8360 Series

Synthesizers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advanced Trigger Configurations . . . . . . .

Trigger Keyword Definitions . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-112

1-113

1-114

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The International Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers. . . . . . . . . . . .

t-Packard Company . . . . . . . . . . .

1-114

OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING REFERENCE

How To Use This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . .

Address . . . . . . . . . .

Adrs Menu ........

A-l

Select

Bandwidth Select High

Bandwidth Low

AI.

Menu .......

Regs ......

BW Cal Always

. . . .

AM BW Cal Once . . . . . .

Cal Menu . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

On/Off

. . . .

AM On/Off

AM On/Off Ext . . . . . .

On/Off Int . . . . . .

Markers . . . . . . .

AM Type IO

. . . . .

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Type

ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER

................

........

..................

Auto Fill

Auto Fill Start

Auto Fill Stop .

Auto Track . . .

Blank Disp . .

B-l

C-l

[CENTER). . . .

Clear Fault .

Clear Memory

Clear Point .

CONNECTORS

Copy List ..................

Disable ...............

Coupling Factor ...............

.....................

Coupled ................

D-l

Dblr Amp

................

...................

Delay Menu ..................

Delete Menu .................

Delete All ..................

Delete Current ................

Delete Undef .................

Delta

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Delta Mkr Ref ................

Disp Status .................

Doubler Amp

Doubler Amp Mode Off

Doubler Amp

Dwell Coupled ................

AUTO ............

............

On .............

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8360

..................

E-l

Enter

Enter List Dwell

Enter List Freq

Enter List Offset

..............

...............

..............

ENTRY KEYS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.................

..................

.................

Fault Menu

F-l

Fault Info 1

Fault Info 2

Fault Info 3

Fltness Menu

FM Coupling

FM Coupling DC . .

FM Menu . . . . .

FM On/Off AC . . .

FM On/Off DC . . .

Ext . .

FM On/Off Int . .

Freq Cal Menu . .

Freq Follow . . .

FREQUENCY

Freq Mult . . . .

Freq Offset . . .

Cal . . .

.................

G-l

Global Dwell

Global Offset

................

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP-IB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP-IB Menu ..................

H-l

Internal AM Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-l

Internal AM Rate

..............

Internal AM Waveform Noise .........

Internal AM Waveform Ramp ..........

Internal AM Waveform Sine ..........

Internal AM

Square .........

Internal AM Waveform Triangle ........

FM Deviation ............

Internal FM Rate

..............

Internal FM Waveform Noise .........

Internal FM Waveform Ramp ..........

Internal FM Waveform Sine ..........

Internal FM Waveform Square .........

Internal FM Waveform Triangle ........

Internal Menu ................

Internal Pulse Generator Period .......

Internal Pulse Generator Rate ........

Internal Pulse Generator Width .......

Internal Pulse Mode Auto ..........

Internal Pulse Mode Gate

..........

Internal Pulse Mode Trigger .........

Invert Input .................

Leveling

.............

............

L-l

LINE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..................

List Mode Pt

............

List Mode Pt

(LOCAL)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sweep

..........

......

M-l

Manual Sweep

(MARKER)

.................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..................

Marker

..................

Marker

..................

Markers All Off

Measure All

...............

..............

Measure Corr Current

Measure Corr Undef

............

.............

Meter

..................

Me t e r On/Off AM

...............

Meter On/Off FM

...............

.....................

On/OffAPI

..............

On/Off FM

..............

Modulation

Amplitude Modulation

..................

.............

................

.................

Pulse Modulation

Module Menu

Module Select AUTO

Module Select Front

Module Select None

Module Select Rear

.............

Monitor Menu

.................

................

morenfm..

Mtr

................

eak RF Always

.................

P-l

L E V E L )

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.................

Offset

Power Slope

Power Sweep

(PRESET)

. . . .^.. .^..^..^..^..^..^..^{. .}.^..^..^..^..^..^..^..^..^..^.

Preset Mode Factory .

Preset Mode Factory

..............

Preset Mode User . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Adxs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(PRIOR) . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programming Language

Programming Language SCPI . .

t Trig Menu . . . . . . . . .

Pulse Delay . . . . .

. .

Pulse Delay Txig'd . . . . .

Pulse Menu . . . . . . . . . .

Pulse

. . . . .

Pulse Period . . . . . . . . .

Pulse Rate . . . . . . . . . .

Pulse Rise

. . . . .

Pulse Width . . . . . . . . .

Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R-l

Ref Osc Menu .................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ROTARY KNOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

S-l

..................

Save User Preset

..............

SCPI Conformance Information .........

SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY

SCPI STATUS REGISTER

: : : :

Security Me nu ................

(Full) ...............

..................

(SINGLE)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.................

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T-l

............

...........

............

10 MHz Freq Std Auto

10 MHz Freq Std

10 MHz Freq Std None

................

Tracking Menu

Delay

U-l

................

.................

................

Unlock Info

Up/Down Power

Size CW

..............

Size Swept

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USER DEFINED

.................

Clear

................

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Contents-l 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

..................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wavef

Zoom

Nenu

ER R O R M ESSAGES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction

Front Panel Error Messages in Alphabetical Order

SCPI Error Messages in Numerical Order . . . . .

Synthesizer Specific SCPI Error Messages

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

Universal SCPI Error Messages

Error Messages From -499 To -400 . . . . .

Error Messages From -399 To -300 . . . . .

Error Messages From -299 To -200 . . . . .

Error Messages From -199 to -100 . . . . . .

M e n u M a p s

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frequency Menu

Marker Menu

Modulation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Menu

Service Menu

Sweep Menu

System Menu

User Cal Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frequency

Range

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Resolution

Frequency Bands (for CW signals) . . . . . . .

Frequency Modes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CW and Manual Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . .

Synthesized Step Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . .

Synthesized List Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ramp Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal 10 MHz Time Base . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Output

Output Power

Accuracy (

Flatness

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Power Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Source Match

Spectral Purity

Spurious Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single-Sideband Phase Noise (dBc/Hz) . . . . .

Offset from Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Residual FM (RMS, 50 Hz to 15

bandwidth) .

Contents-l 1

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modulation

Pulse

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AM and Scan

FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

Simultaneous Modulations

Internal Modulation Generator Option

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pulse

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modulation Meter.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General

Environmental

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warm-Up Time

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dimensions

Power Requirements

Weight

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adapters Supplied

Inputs

Outputs

Auxiliary Output

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Output

. . . . . . . . . . . .

External ALC Input

Pulse Input/Output

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AM Input

FM Input

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trigger Input

Trigger Output

10 MHz Reference Input

10 MHz Reference Output

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sweep Output

. . . . . . . . . .

Stop Sweep Input/Output

Z-Axis Blanking/Markers Output . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Output

. . . . . . . . . . .

Source Module Interface

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary Interface

Pulse Video Output (Option 002 only) . . . .

Pulse Sync Out (Option 002 only) . . . . . .

AM/FM Output (Option 002 only) . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Models

Options

Option 001 Add Step Attenuator . . . . . . .

Option 002 Add Internal Modulation Generator

Option 003 Delete Keyboard/Display . . . . .

Option 004 Rear Panel RF Output . . . . . .

Option 006 Fast Pulse Modulation . . . . . .

Option 008 1 Hz Frequency Resolution . . . .

Option 700 MATE System Compatibility . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

Service Manuals

Option 806 Rack Slide Kit

Option 908 Rack Flange Kit

Option 910 Extra Operating

Option 013 Rack Flange Kit

. . . . . . . . .

Option

Two Years Additional Return-To-HP

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Contents-l 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. INSTALLATION

Initial Inspection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Supplied

Options Available

Preparation for Use

Power Requirements

Line Voltage and Fuse Selection

3-2

3-3

3-4

3-6

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Cable

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Language Selection

How to View or Change a Language Selection from

the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Select a Language on a Synthesizer without

a Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6

3-7

. . . . . . . . . . .

HP-IB Address Selection

How to View or Change an HP-IB address from

the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Prevent a Front Panel Change to an HP-IB

Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Set the HP-IB Address on a Synthesizer

without a Front Panel . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mating Connectors

10 MHz Frequency Reference Selection and Warmup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

3-9

Time

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Environment

3-10

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chassis Kits

. . . . . . .

Rack Mount Slide Kit (Option 806)

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation Procedure

Rack Flange Kit for Synthesizers with Handles

3-13

3-14

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Removed (Option 908)

Installation Procedure

Rack Flange Kit for Synthesizers with Handles

3-15

3-16

3-17

3-18

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attached (Option 913)

Installation Procedure

Storage and Shipment

Environment

. . . . . .

Package the Synthesizer for Shipment

Converting HP

Systems

Systems to HP 8360 Series

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-19

3-20

3-21

3-22

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Operation

Compatibility

Front Panel Operation

Instrument Preset Conditions . . . . . . .

System Connections

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. .

Scalar Network Analyzer

The HP 8510 Network Analyzer

The HP

The HP 83550 Series Millimeter-wave Source

3-22

3-23

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

Noise Figure Meter

The HP

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote Operation

Language Compatibility

Network Analyzer Language

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-23

Test and Measurement System Language . . .

Control Interface Intermediate Language . . .

Converting from Network Analyzer Language to

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-23

3-24

Numeric Suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Status Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. O P ER ATO R ’S CH ECK and R O UTI NE M AI NTENANCE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator’s Checks

Service Information

Local Operator’s Check

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-5

4-6

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminary Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Routine Maintenance

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

How to Replace the Line Fuse

How to Clean the Fan Filter

. . . . . . . . . . .

How to Clean the Cabinet

. . . . . . . .

How to Clean the Display Filter

5. I nstr ument H istor y

How to Use Instrument History

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3

5-5

5-6

5-7

Change B

Modulation

Pulse

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AM and Scan

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Change A

Index

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

vii

O-l. Typical Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . .

l-l. The HP Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . .

1-2. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Entry Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CW Operation and Start/Stop Frequency Sweep .

Center Frequency and Span Operation . . . . .

Power Level and Sweep Time Operation . . . . .

Continuous, Single, and Manual Sweep Operation

1-8. Marker Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Saving and Recalling an Instrument State . . . .

Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation . . . .

ALC Circuit Externally Leveled . . . . . . . .

1-13

1-15

1-17

Typical Diode Detector Response at

. . . .

1-13. Leveling with a Power Meter . . . . . . . . . .

1-14. MM-wave Source Module Leveling . . . . . . .

1-15. MM-wave Source Module Leveling Using a Microwave

Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-16. Reverse Power Effects, Coupled Operation with

Output . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-31

1-17. Reverse Power Effects, Uncoupled Operation

Output . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .

1-18. Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically

1-19. Creating a User Flatness Array . . . . . . .

Creating Arbitrarily Spaced Frequency-Correctic

. .

Pairs in a Swept mm-wave Environment

1-21. Scalar System Configuration . . . . . . . .

Automatically Characterizing and Compensating for

a Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Decision Tree for ALC Bandwidth Selection . . .

SCPI Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . .

A Simplified Command Tree . . . . . . . . . .

Proper Use of the Colon and Semicolon . . . . .

1-71

Simplified

Command Tree . . . . . . .

Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test . . . . . . .

Simplified Program Message Syntax . . . . . . .

Simplified Subsystem Command Syntax . . . . .

1-31. Simplified Common Command Syntax . . . . .

Simplified Response Message Syntax . . . . . .

Generalized Status Register Model . . . . . . .

Typical Status Register Bit Changes . . . . . .

Generalized Trigger Model . . . . . . . . . . .

1-36. Inside the Idle State . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-81

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Inside the Initiate State . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inside an Event Detection State . . . . . . . .

Inside the Sequence Operation State . . . . . .

The

Trigger Configuration . . . . . . . .

1-41. The TRIG Trigger Configuration . . . . . . . .

HP 8360 Simplified Trigger Model . . . . . . .

A-l. ALC System Simplified Block Diagram . . . . .

Typical External Leveling Hookup . . . . . . .

C-l. Auxiliary Interface Connector . . . . . . . . .

HP-IB Connector and Cable . . . . . . . . . .

Interface Signals of the Source Module Connector .

F-l. Basic User Flatness Configuration Using an HP

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User Flatness Correction Table as Displayed by the

Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Sources of ALC Calibration Correction Data .

Array Configuration when the Correction Data

Frequency Span is a Subset of the Synthesizer

Frequency Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M-l. ALC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Accuracy Over the AM Dynamic Range . .

FM Deviation and Rate Limits . . . . . . . . .

ALC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pulse Modulation System . . . . . . . . . . .

Video Feedthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-l. How (PRIOR) Works

S-l. Connections Required for a Two-Tone Scalar

Network Analyzer Measurement System . . .

AC Power Cables Available . . . . . . . . . .

3-2. Rear Panel HP-IB Switch . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3. Removing the Side Straps and Feet . . . . . . .

3-4. Chassis Slide Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5. Rack Mount Flanges for Synthesizers with Handles

Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5

3-7

3-11

3-12

3-14

3-6. Rack Mount Flanges for Synthesizers with Handles

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2. Removing the Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . .

3-16

4-4

4-5

Attached

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

l-l. Keys Under Discussion in This Section . . . . .

Command Table . . . . . . . . . . .

1-21

1-71

SCPI Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sample Synthesizer Commands . . . . . . . . .

C-l. Pin Description of the Auxiliary Interface . . . .

D-l. Mnemonics used to Indicate Status . . . . . . .

S-l. HP 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY . . . .

Language HP-IB Addresses . . . . . . . . . .

3-2. Factory-Set HP-IB Addresses . . . . . . . . .

3-3. Rack Mount Slide Kit Contents . . . . . . . .

3-4. Rack Flange Kit for Synthesizers with Handles

Removed Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5. Rack Flange Kit for Synthesizers with Handles

Attached Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6. Instrument Preset Conditions for the HP

3-6

3-7

3-10

3-13

3-15

3-20

3-24

3-25

4-4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-7. Numeric Suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8. Programming Language Comparison . . . . . .

Fuse Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This chapter contains information on how to use the HP 8360 Series

Synthesized Sweeper. The information is separated into three

sections.

What Is In This

Chapter

Basic

For the novice user unfamiliar with the HP 8360

Series Synthesized Sweepers. This section describes

the basic features of the synthesizer.

For the user familiar with synthesizers, but not

necessarily familiar with how to use the special

features of the HP 8360 series.

Advanced

P rogramming For the user wishing to program an HP 8360

Series Synthesized Sweeper. This section

contains an introduction to Standard Commands

for Programmable Instruments language

(SCPI), Hewlett-Packard’s implementation of

and an introduction to the

Analyzer programming language.

If you are unpacking a new synthesizer, refer to the installation

suggestions provided in the “INSTALLATION” chapter of this

manual.

Getting Started Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To use this chapter effectively, refer to the tabbed section “Menu

Maps”. Menu maps can be folded out to be viewed at the same time

as the Getting Started information, as illustrated.

How To Use This

Chapter

The following table lists the equipment used in the operation

examples shown in this chapter. You can substitute equipment, but

be aware that you may get different results than those shown.

Equipment Used In

Examples

Equipment Used In Examples

Equipment

Recommended

Model Numbers

Power Meter

Power Sensor

Power Splitter

Oscilloscope

mm-Wave Source Module HP

Power Amplifier

Coupler

Detector

Getting Started Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started Basic

The HP 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers are high performance,

broadband frequency synthesizers.

Introducing the

HP 8360 Series

Synthesized

Sweepers

PAC KARD

PRESET

Figure l-l. The HP

Synthesized Sweeper

initializes the front panel settings and runs the synthesizer

through a brief self-test. In the following examples, unless stated

otherwise, begin by pressing

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display Area

ACTIVE ENTRY AND

DATA DISPLAY AREA

- ME S S A G E L I N E

LABEL AREA

Figure

Display

Active Entry and Data Display Area: This area typically displays

the frequency and power information of the current instrument

state. When data entry is expected, the synthesizer uses all or part

of this area to record the entries. The active entry arrow

indicates the active entry function and its current value.

Message Line: This line is used to display:

ALC level status.

Unlock information.

status.

RF output status.

Label Area: This area displays the name of the

directly below it.

These keys activate the functions indicated by the labels

directly above them.

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

All function values are changed via the rotary knob and/or keys of

the entry area.

Entry Area

ENTRY

ENTRY ON

LED

ARROW KEY’S

ENTRY

ROTARY KNOB

TERMINATOR

NUMERIC

ENTRY KEYS

BACKSPACE

Figure

Entry Area

The following are active only when the synthesizer expects an input.

ON/OFF): This key lets you turn off or on the active entry

(ENTRY

area. Turning off the entry area after a value is entered prevents

accidental changes.

ENTRY ON LED: This LED lights when the entry area is active.

Arrow Keys: The up/down arrow keys let you increase or decrease

a numeric value. The left/right arrow keys choose a significant

digit indicated by an underline.

Rotary Knob: The rotary knob increases or decreases a numeric

value. The rotary knob can be used in combination with the

left/right arrow keys to change the increment size.

Terminator Keys: After the numeric entry keys are used to enter a

value, these keys define the units.

Negative Sign/Backspace Key: If a data entry is in progress, this

key backspaces over the last digit entered, otherwise a negative

sign is entered.

Numeric Entry Keys: These keys enter specific numbers in the

active entry area and must be followed by one of the terminator

keys before the function value changes.

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CW Operation and

Start/Stop

Frequency Sweep

CW operation is one of the major functions of the synthesizer, and is

easy to do using front panel keys. In CW operation, the synthesizer

produces a single, low-noise, synthesized frequency. Try this example:

CW Operation

Check the active entry area. It indicates:

cw: 12345.678000 MH z

The data display area indicates CW operation and the frequency

that you entered. The ENTRY ON LED is lit and the green SWEEP

LED is off.

Try other frequencies. Experiment with the rotary knob and the

arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry.

The synthesizer can sweep a frequency span as wide as the frequency

range of the instrument, or as narrow as 0 Hz (swept CW).

In start/stop sweep operation, the synthesizer produces a sweep from

the selected start frequency to the selected stop frequency.

For example:

Start/Stop Frequency

Sweep

Press [START)

Press

The data display area indicates the start frequency and the stop

frequency. The green SWEEP LED is on (periodically off when

sweep is retracing). Because this is the active function, the active

entry area indicates:

STO P FREQ UEN CY: 7890.000000 MH z

Any subsequent entries change the stop frequency. To change the

start frequency, press (START), which remains the active function until

you press a different function key.

1-6 Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE

STATE

STOP

START

SWEEP LED

Figure 1-4. CW Operation and Start/Stop Frequency Sweep

s t a r t /s t o p

CW Operation

Frequency Sweep

1. Press

2. Enter

Press

Enter value.

value.

3. Press terminator key.

4. Press

Press terminator key.

Enter value.

6. Press terminator key.

Getting Started Basic 1-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Center frequency/span is another way of establishing swept

operation. This is just a different way of defining sweep limits. As an

example of center frequency/span operation:

Center

Frequency/Span

Operation

Press

The synthesizer is now sweeping from 3.5 to 4.5

figures, press either or then

(to view these

The data display

area indicates the center frequency, as well as, the span. Notice that

the green SWEEP LED is on.

While span is the active function, try the rotary knob and arrow

keys. This symmetrical increase or decrease of the frequency span

about the center frequency is one reason that center frequency/span

swept operation is used instead of start/stop frequency sweep.

Another example illustrates the subtleties of center frequency/span.

Press

Notice that the center frequency changed. This is because the center

frequency could not accommodate a span of 8

without exceeding

the lower frequency limit of the synthesizer’s specified frequency

range. If the low or high frequency range limits are exceeded, the

inactive (center or span) function is reset. Experiment with the

rotary knob and the arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry.

1-6 Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPAN

CENTER

SWEEP LED

Figure 1-5. Center Frequency and Span Operation

Span Operation

Center

1. Press

2. Enter value.

3. Press terminator key.

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power Level and

Sweep Time

Operation

The synthesizer can produce leveled power for CW, swept frequency,

or power sweep operation. The selected power level can range from

Power Level Operation

-20

(-110

for option 001 synthesizers) to

For practice: Press (POWER LEVEL) I-]

The active entry

area shows:

POWER LEVEL: -20.00

If the selected power level is beyond the range of the synthesizer, the

closest possible power is shown in both the data display area and the

active entry area. If the selected power level exceeds the maximum

leveled power the synthesizer is able to produce, the unleveled

message UNLVLED appears on the message line. Experiment with the

rotary knob and the arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry.

In typical applications the sweep time can vary tremendously, from

milliseconds in a network analyzer system, to more than a minute in

thermistor-based power meter systems. For this example, refer to the

“MENU MAP” section.

Sweep Time Operation

Press

Watch the green SWEEP LED, it blinks every 2.5 seconds. The LED

blinks at each retrace.

For the fastest sweep speed for which all specifications are

guaranteed, the synthesizer must be in automatic sweep time

selection.

Refer to menu map 8.

Press SWEEP

Select more

0 .

Select

Aut

Notice that the active entry area indicates:

100.0

AUTO

SWEEP TIME:

When the synthesizer is in automatic sweep time selection, the

active entry area displays AUTO along with the current sweep time.

Faster sweep speeds than this are possible, turn the rotary knob

counter-clockwise until the display no longer changes. Notice that

AUTO is no longer displayed

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 1-6. Power Level and Sweep Time Operation

Sweep Time

Operation

Power Level

Operation

1. Press

2. Enter value.

3. Press terminator key.

2. Enter value.

3. Press

l-l 1

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Continuous sweep is the operation mode set when the synthesizer is

preset. It simply means that when the synthesizer is performing a

swept operation, the sweeps will continuously

retrace until a different sweep mode is selected. To choose this sweep

mode, press

Continuous, Single,

Sweep

and Manual

Operation

To change from continuous sweep to single sweep operation, press

This causes the synthesizer to abort the sweep in progress

and switch to the single sweep mode. This initial keystroke cause’s

the synthesizer to switch sweep modes, but it does not initiate a

single sweep. A second keystroke (press

initiates a single

sweep. When the synthesizer is in single sweep operation, the

amber LED above the key lights. When the synthesizer is actually

performing a sweep in single sweep mode, the green SWEEP LED

lights.

The manual sweep mode lets you use the rotary knob to either sweep

from the start frequency to the stop frequency or to sweep power.

Refer to menu map 8, SYSTEM.

Press

(PRESET).

Press SWEEP

Select Manu al

The active entry area displays:

SWEPT MANUAL: XXXXXXXXX MHz

Use the rotary knob to sweep from the start to the stop frequency.

The green SWEEP LED is off in manual sweep mode because the

sweeps are synthesized.

1-12 Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 1-7. Continuous, Single, and Manual Sweep Operation

Manual Sweep

Continuous Sweep

Single Sweep

1. Press

1. Press SWEEP (MENU).

1. Press (SINGLE).

2. Press Manu al Sw eep

3. Use the rotary knob to adjust frequency.

Getting Started Basic 1-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The synthesizer has five frequency markers that can be used as fixed

frequency “landmarks,” or as variable frequency pointers on a CRT

display. To view the marker features of the synthesizer on a CRT,

connect the synthesizer as shown in Figure 1-8.

Marker Operation

Refer to menu map 2, FREQUENCY.

Press [PRESET).

Press (START)

Press (STOP)

Press [MARKER).

Select Marker Ml and enter

The synthesizer is sweeping from 3 to 7

speed. A frequency marker is set at 4

with a 100 ms sweep

which causes an

intensified dot to appear on the CRT. To obtain an amplitude spike

at that frequency, select Markers . Notice that you can set the

amplitude of the spike with the rotary knob or entry keys. To return

to the intensified dot representation, select

off).

Markers (asterisk

Amplitude markers increase the output power at the marker

frequency. Provide protection to devices that could be damaged.

Caution

For a second marker, select Marker

and enter

This process can be continued for all five markers. Note that the

marker displayed in the active entry area is “active” and can be

controlled by the rotary knob, arrow keys, and numeric entry keys.

Once the Ml and

function,

markers are established, the marker sweep

Sweep, temporarily changes the original

start/stop frequencies to those of markers Ml and

Select

Notice that the synthesizer now is sweeping from

Sweep.

Use this function to focus in on a selected portion

of the frequency sweep. Select Sweep again. This turns

4 to 5.5

the function off and returns the synthesizer to its original sweep

parameters. To change the start/stop frequencies for the synthesizer,

not just temporarily, use the

As an example of the delta marker function:

Select Marker

and enter

Select Delta Marker.

The frequency difference between marker 3 and marker 1 is displayed,

and the CRT trace is intensified between the two markers. The active

entry area displays:

D ELTA M KR

: 2700.000000 M H z

1-14 Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Marker 1 was chosen because it is selected as the delta marker

reference. To change reference markers, select Delta

Ref .

Select

as the reference. Watch the display change to indicate:

D ELTA M KR (3-2) : 1200.000000 M H z

You can choose any of the five markers as a reference, but when delta

marker is on, if the reference marker has a frequency value higher

than the last active marker, the difference between the frequencies

is negative and is displayed as such by the synthesizer. The CRT

display continues to intensify the difference between the two markers.

When delta marker is showing in the active entry area, the ENTRY

area is active. Rotate the rotary knob and watch the frequency

difference change. The last active marker (in this case, marker 3)

changes frequency value, not the reference marker.

Figure 1-6. Marker Operation

Delta Marker

Operation

Marker Operation

1. Press

2. Select a marker key (

3. Enter value.

4. Press terminator key.

. .

2. Select a marker key (

3. Enter value.

. .

4. Press terminator key.

5. Select a different marker key

6. Enter value.

. . .

Press terminator key.

8. Select Delta

9. Select one of the previously chosen markers.

10. Press

11. Select D elta Mar ker

Getting Started Basic 1-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The save/recall registers store and access a previously set instrument

state. For example, set the synthesizer to sweep from 3 to 15 at

a -10 power level, with markers 1 and 2 set at 4.5 and 11.2

Saving and

Recalling an

Instrument State

Press [START)

Press (STOP)

P r e s s

( P O W E R

I - ]

Press (MARKER).

Select Marker Ml

Select Marker

To save this instrument state in register 1, press (SAVE)

that the synthesizer has saved this state:

To verify

Press

(PRESET).

Press (RECALL)

Press

[MARKER).

The active entry area displays:

RECALL REGISTER:

RECALLED

Notice the sweep end points, power level, and the asterisks next to

the marker 1 and 2 key labels.

You can save instrument states in registers 1 through 8. Register

0 saves the last instrument state before power is turned off. When

power is turned on, register 0 is automatically recalled.

1-16 Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECALL

Figure 1-9. Saving and Recalling an Instrument State

Save

Recall

1. Setup synthesizer as desired.

1. Press

2. Press

[SAVE.

a number

0 through

3. Press

a number

through

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power Sweep and

Power Slope

Operation

The power sweep function allows the power output to be swept

(positive or negative) when the synthesizer is in the CW frequency

mode. The power output of the synthesizer determines the maximum

leveled power sweep that can be accomplished. For this example refer

to the “Menu Map” section.

Power Sweep Operation

Zero and calibrate the power meter.

Connect the instruments as shown in Figure

Press

Press (PO WER

Press (SWEEP

[SINGLE).

Set the power meter to dB[REF] mode.

The synthesizer is ready to produce a 4

CW signal at 0

power out, with a 2 second sweep rate whenever a single sweep is

executed. The power meter is ready to measure the power level

relative to a starting point of 0

Press POWER

Select Power Sweep and enter

Press

(asterisk on).

Watch the relative power indication on the power meter. At the end

of the sweep the power meter indicates

on the synthesizer indicates:

The active entry area

7.00 d B/ SWP

POWER SWEEP:

Now enter

function).

(power sweep is still the active entry

This time the power meter indicates less than the power sweep

requested. Note that the synthesizer is unleveled, UNLVD. This

happens because the synthesizer’s output power at the start of the

sweep is 0

and the requested power sweep takes the synthesizer

beyond the range where it is able to produce leveled power. The

range of the power sweep is dependent on the ALC range and can be

offset if a step attenuator (Option 001) is present.

Select Power Sweep to turn this function off (no asterisk).

Press

On the power meter, press dB[REF] to reset the reference level.

1-18 Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Power Sweep (asterisk on).

Press

(SINGLE].

The synthesizer performs a power sweep beginning at -20

ending at The power meter indicates

and

This function allows for compensation of high frequency system or

cable losses by linearly increasing the power output as the frequency

increases. For this example refer to the “Menu Map” section.

Power Slope Operation

Press Power Slope , the active entry area displays:

X. XX

where X is a numeric value.

RF SLOPE:

Power slope is now active, notice that an asterisk is next to the key

label.

Use the entry keys, rotary knob, or arrow keys to enter a value for

the linear slope.

Press Power Slope again to turn this feature off.

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POUER

SYNTHESIZER

‘UT

Figure

Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation

Power Slope

Power Sweep

1. Press POWER

2. Se le ct

Slo p e

2. Select

3. Enter a value.

4. Press terminator key.

3. Enter a value.

4. Press terminator key.

Getting Started Basic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced

This section of Chapter 1 describes the use of many of the unique

features of the HP 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers. The format

used is similar to the one used on the previous pages. When referred

to a menu map number, go to the Menu Map tab and unfold the

menu map so that you can view it together with the text.

Getting Started

Advanced

Some menus have more than one page of softkeys. Select the

more m/n

to view the next page of softkeys. more m/n is

not included in the keystrokes given in these procedures.

Table l-l. Keys

Discussion in This Section

Keys

Paragraph Heading

Leveling Point

Coupling Factor

P O W ER LEVEL

Set

Externally Leveling the Synthesizer

Leveling Point

Pwr Mtr Range

Leveling Point Module

Mdl Lev Menu

Working with Mixers/Reverse Power Effects

Leveling Mode Normal

Leveling Mode

Working with Spectrum Analyzers/

Reverse Power Effects

Leveling Mode Search

Fltness Menu

Delete Menu

Synthesizer Performance

Auto Fill Start

Auto Fill Stop

Auto Fill

Mtr

FLTN ESS ON / OFF

Enter Freq

Enter Corr

Freq Follow

List Menu

Copy List

Sweep Mode List

Ext Det Cal

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced

Table l-l.

Keys Under Discussion in This Section (continued)

Keys

Paragraph Heading

Auto Track

Peak RF Always

Peak RF Once

Optimizing Synthesizer Performance

continued

Sap Span Cal Once

Sap Span Cal Always

AM BW Cal Always

AM BW Cal Once

Cal

AM On/Off

AM On/Off IOdB/V

Deep AM

USER DEFIN ED MEN U

ASSIGN

Step Sap Menu

Using Step Sweep

List Menu

Creating and Using a Frequency List

Enter List Freq

Enter List Offset

Enter List Dwell

Pt Trig Menu

Zero Freq

Using the Security Features

Save Lock

Clear Memory

Blank Display

Save Usr Preset

Preset Mode User

P R E SE T

Changing the Preset Parameters

For more information,each of these keys has a separate entry in the

“OPERATING and PROGRAMMING REFERENCE” chapter of

this handbook.

1-22 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In externally leveled operations, the output power from the

synthesizer is detected by an external sensor. The output of this

detector is returned to the leveling circuitry, and the output power

is automatically adjusted to keep power constant at the point of

detection.

Externally Leveling

the Synthesizer

Figure

illustrates a typical setup for external leveling. When

Leveling with

Detectors/Couplers

/Splitters

externally leveled, the power level feedback is taken from the external

negative detector input rather than the internal detector. This

feedback voltage controls the ALC system to set the desired RF

output. Refer to Figure A-l in Chapter 2, for a block diagram of the

synthesizer’s ALC circuitry.

LEVELED OUTPUT

Figure

1. ALC Circuit Externally Leveled

Getting Started Advanced 1-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To level externally:

1. Setup the equipment as shown. For this example, the

detector/coupler setup is used.

2. Refer to menu map 1.

3. Press

Select Leveling Point

Set the coupling factor. Select Coupling Factor

Power splitters have a coupling factor of 0

Note

Hint

Figure 1-12 shows the input power versus output voltage

characteristics for typical HP diode detectors. From the chart,

the leveled power at the diode detector input resulting from any

external level voltage setting may be determined. The range of power

adjustment is approximately -30

Automatically characterize and compensate for the detector used by

performing a detector calibration. Refer to “Optimizing Synthesizer

Performance, Using Detector Calibration,” later in this section.

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

- 10

-20

100

SQUARE LAW ASYMPTOTE

- 30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-60

DETECTOR INPUT POWER,

Figure 1-12. Typical Diode Detector Response at

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

External Leveling Used With the Optional Step Attenuator

Some external leveling applications require low output power

from the synthesizer. The synthesizer automatically uncouples the

attenuator from the ALC system for

external leveling points.

Press (POWER LEVEL). Note the display. It shows:

POWER LEVEL: 0.00

For example, leveling the output of a 30 gain amplifier to a level

of -10

-40

requires the output of the synthesizer to be around

when leveled. At some frequencies this level is beyond the

range of the ALC modulator alone. If so, the LOW UNLVLED warning

message is displayed. Inserting 40 of attenuation results in an

ALC level of 0

level of -10

which is well within the range of the ALC. At

attenuation is a better choice as it results in an ALC

This gives a margin for AM or other functions

that vary the power level.

For optimum display accuracy and minimum noise, the ALC

level should be greater than -10

attenuation equal to the tens digit of output power. Example:

desired output power = -43 use:

This is achieved by using

40 , ALC -3

1. Press POWER

Select Set

To obtain flatness corrected power refer to “Optimizing Synthesizer

Performance, Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction

Array,” later in this section.

Hint

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Leveling with a power meter is similar to leveling with a diode

detector. Figure 1-13 shows the setup for power meter leveling.

Leveling with Power

Meters

Figure 1-13. Leveling with a Power Meter

1. Set up the equipment as shown. Be sure to set the power meter to

manual range mode and note the range.

2. Refer to menu map 1.

3. Press

Select

Point

Enter the range value set for the power

Select

Range.

meter as noted in step 1.

6. Select Coupling Factor , press

Unlike detector leveling, power meter leveling provides calibrated

power out of the leveled RF port.

To obtain flatness corrected power refer to “Optimizing Synthesizer

Performance, Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction

Array,” later in this section.

Hint

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Millimeter-wave source module leveling is similar to power meter

leveling. The following figures illustrate the setups for leveling with a

mm-wave source module.

Leveling with MM-wave

Source Modules

SYNTHESIZER

Figure 1-14. MM-wave Source Module Leveling

High power model synthesizers can externally, level mm-wave source

modules to maximum specified power without a microwave amplifier.

1-28 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RF OUT

(IF REQUIRED)

AWPLIFIER

RF OUT

SOURCE

NODULE

Figure 1-15. MM-wave Source Module Leveling Using a Microwave Amplifier

1. Set up the equipment as shown.

2. Refer to menu map 1.

3. Select Leveling Point Module.

Select Mdl Lev Menu.

Select Module Leveling Pt Auto or Front or Rear, depending

on where the interface connection is made.

All of the ALC data necessary to communicate properly with the

synthesizer is exchanged via the SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE.

To obtain flatness corrected power refer to “Optimizing Synthesizer

Performance, Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction

Array,” later in this section.

Hint

Getting Started Advanced 1-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Working with

Mixers/Reverse

Power Effects

Uncoupled operation applies to Option 001 synthesizers only.

Note

Uncoupled operation is useful when working with mixers. Figure 1-16

shows a hypothetical setup where the synthesizer is providing

a small signal to a mixer. The synthesizer output is -8

which in Leveling Node

ALC Level = -8

and has LO to RF isolation of 15

of -5

results in

The mixer is driven with an LO of

The resulting LO feedthrough

enters the synthesizer’s OUTPUT port, goes through

the attenuator with no loss, and arrives at the internal detector.

Depending on frequency, it is possible for most of this energy to enter

the detector. Since the detector responds to its total input power

regardless of frequency, this excess energy causes the leveling circuit

to reduce its output. In this example the reverse power is actually

larger than the ALC level, which may result in the synthesizer output

being shut off.

Figure 1-17 shows the same setup, with uncoupled operation used to

produce the same -8

ALC Level =

attenuator reduces the LO feedthrough by 10

output. In this case,

The ALC level is 10

= -10

higher, and the

Thus the detector

sees a

desired signal versus a possible -15

undesired

signal. This 17

difference results in a maximum 0.1 shift in the

synthesizer output level. To set the synthesizer to the attenuator

uncoupled mode as discussed in this example, do the following:

1. Press POWER

2. Select Set

and press

This step does two

things, it uncouples the attenuator from the rest of the ALC

system, and it lets you set an attenuator value, in this case, 10

3. Press

This sets the ALC level to

For more information on the ALC or setting power level, refer to

in Chapter 2.

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RF OUTPUT

DETECTOR

MEASURES -8

LEVEL

- 5

Figure

Reverse Power Effects, Coupled Operation with

Output

001

MC LEVEL

ATTENUATOR

1 0

R F L E VE L

CONTROL

DETECTOR

MEASURES

MEASURES -15

REVERSE POWER

Figure 1-17. Reverse Power Effects, Uncoupled Operation with

Output

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reverse power is a problem with spectrum analyzers that do not

have preselection capability. Some analyzers have as much as

LO feedthrough coming out of their RF input, at some

Working with

Spectrum

Analyzers/Reverse

frequencies. The effects of reverse power are less in the heterodyne

Power Effects

ere the power amplifier provides some

band (0.01 to 2.3

broadband matching. Similarly, at frequencies above 2.3

reverse

power that is within 10 MHz of the synthesizer’s frequency may be

partially absorbed by the YIG filter. If the frequency difference is

small enough to be within the leveling system bandwidth (typically

CW, 200

sweep or AM), the effect of reverse power is

amplitude modulation of the synthesizer’s output. The AM rate

equals the difference in RF frequencies. Reverse power problems may

be treated by using the unleveled mode. There are two unleveled

modes, ALC off and search.

To set the synthesizer to the ALC off mode:

1. Refer to menu map 1.

2. Press

Select Leveling Mode

In this mode, the synthesizer provides RF power with no ALC

correction and therefore requires a power meter to set a particular

power.

To set the synthesizer to the search mode:

1. Press

Select Leveling Mode Search.

In this mode, the synthesizer is in the normal ALC mode until the

desired power level is reached, then the ALC is disconnected.

1-32 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optimizing

Synthesizer

Performance

The following examples demonstrate the user flatness correction

feature:

Creating and Applying

the User Flatness

Correction Array

1. Using an HP

power meter to automatically enter correction

measurement.

data for a swept 4 to 10

2. Manually entering correction data for a stepped (List Mode)

measurement.

3. Making swept mm-wave measurements, automatically entering

correction data for an arbitrary list of correction frequencies.

4. Making scalar analysis measurements with automatically-entered

correction data that compensates for power variations at the

output of a directional bridge.

Each example illustrates how to set up correction tables for a

different measurement requirement. Modify the instrument setups

shown to suit your particular needs. Completed correction tables

may be easily edited if more correction data is required for your

measurement. Additional correction frequencies may be added

by using the auto fill feature or by entering correction frequencies

individually. The auto fill feature adds but does not delete correction

frequencies.

There are two basic front-panel methods of creating a flatness

correction array. The first and quickest method is to use an HP

power meter. Refer to Figure 1-18 for the setup. The second method

is just as accurate, but requires a little more interaction between the

operator and the instruments. Figure 1-19 shows the setup for the

second method.

Getting Started Advanced 1-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically, Example 1

In this example, a flatness array containing correction frequencies

from 4 to 10

at 1

intervals is created. An HP

power

meter controlled by the synthesizer through the interface bus is used

to enter the correction data into the flatness array.

For this example, refer to menu map 5, POWER.

1. The equipment setup shown in Figure 1-18 assumes that if the

setup has an external leveling configuration, the steps necessary

to correctly level have been followed. If you have questions about

external leveling refer to earlier paragraphs titled, “Externally

Leveling the Synthesizer.”

Setup Power Meter

2. Zero and calibrate the power meter/sensor.

3. Enter the appropriate power sensor calibration factors into the

power meter.

4. Enable the power meter/sensor cal factor array. For operating

information on the HP

service manual.

power refer to its operating and

5. Connect the power sensor to the point where corrected power is

desired.

POYER NE

TER

PORT

SENSOR

Figure 1-16. Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically

1-34 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup Synthesizer Parameters

On the synthesizer, press (PRESET).

FREQUENCY

Access User Flatness Correction Menu

Press POWER

Select

Menu.

10.

Select Delete Menu Delete All . This step insures that the

flatness array is empty.

11. Press

Leave the delete menu and return to the previous

soft key menu.

12 Enter the frequency points at which the correction information

will be taken. Choose either the point-by-point entry method

Enter Freq or the automatic frequency point generation

Auto Fill Start. For this example,select Auto Fill Start

Select Auto Fill Stop

Auto Fill

Notice that a frequency list starting at 4 and ending at 10

with an increment value of 1

is created.

Enter Correction Data into Array

14.

Select

Menu Measure

All. The power meter

is now under synthesizer control and is performing the sequence

of steps necessary to generate the correction information at each

frequency point.

If an HP-IB error message is displayed verify that the interface

connections are correct. Check the HP-IB address of the power

meter and ensure that it is the same address the synthesizer is

using (address 13 is assumed). Refer to the menu map 8, System,

for the key sequence necessary to reach

Meter Adrs .

Enable User Flatness Correction

When the operation is complete, (a message is displayed) the

flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup.

Disconnect the power meter/sensor and press

15.

(amber LED on). The power produced at the point where the

power meter/sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the

frequencies and power level specified above.

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a User Flatness Array, Example 2

This example shows how to use the synthesizer and a power meter

in manual entry mode. This example also introduces two features of

the synthesizer. The

Freq Follow simplifies the data entry

process and the

frequencies.

List Mode sets up a list of arbitrary test

The frequency follow feature automatically sets the source to a CW

test frequency equivalent to the active correction frequency in the

user flatness correction table. The front panel arrow keys are used

to move around the correction table and enter frequency-correction

pairs. Simultaneously, the synthesizer test frequency is updated to

the selected correction frequency without exiting the correction table.

To further simplify the data entry process, the synthesizer allows

you to enter correction data into the user flatness correction table

by adjusting the front panel knob until the desired power level is

displayed on the power meter. The user flatness correction algorithm

automatically calculates the appropriate correction and enters it into

the table. If you already have a table of correction data prepared, it

can be entered directly into the correction table using the front-panel

keypad of the synthesizer.

With the list mode feature, you may enter the test frequencies into a

table in any order and specify an offset (power) and/or a dwell time

for each frequency. When list mode is enabled, the synthesizer steps

through the list of frequencies in the order entered.

The user flatness correction feature has the capability of copying and

entering the frequency list into the correction table. Since the offset

in the list mode table is not active during the user flatness correction

data entry process, the value of the correction data is determined as

if no offset is entered. When user flatness correction and list mode

(with offsets) are enabled, the synthesizer adjusts the output power

by an amount equivalent to the sum of the correction data and offset

for each test frequency. You must make sure that the resulting power

level is still within the ALC range of the synthesizer.

1-36 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 1-19. Creating a User Flatness Array

For this example, refer to menu map 5, POWER.

1. The equipment setup shown in Figure 1-19 assumes that if your

setup has an external leveling configuration, the steps necessary

to correctly level have been followed. If you have questions about

external leveling refer to earlier paragraphs titled, “Externally

Leveling the Synthesizer

Setup Power Meter

2. Zero and calibrate the power meter/sensor.

Connect the power sensor to the point where flatness corrected

power is desired.

Setup Synthesizer Parameters

4. On the synthesizer, press (PRESET).

This sets the test port power to

(POWER LEVEL)

Create A Frequency List

6. On the synthesizer, press FREQUENCY

Select List Menu Enter

This enters 5

as the first frequency in the list array. Entering a frequency

automatically sets the offset to 0

Enter 18, 13, 11, and 20

and the dwell to 10 ms.

to complete this example array.

Getting Started Advanced 1-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Access User Flatness Correction Menu

9. Press POWER Select

Menu.

Select Delete Menu Delete All. This step insures that the

flatness array is empty.

11. Press

soft key menu.

Leave the delete menu and return to the previous

12. Select Copy List This step copies the frequency list into the

correction table in sequential order.

13. Select Freq Follow. This sets the synthesizer to CW frequency

mode to facilitate taking correction information. As you scroll

through the correction cells, the synthesizer produces the

corresponding CW frequency at 0

14. Select Enter Corr . This allows correction value entry.

15. Press

16. For 5

This step enables user flatness correction.

set the appropriate power sensor cal factor on the

power meter.

17. Use the synthesizer rotary knob to adjust for a measurement of

0.00

on the power meter. Notice that a correction value is

entered at 5

18. Use the up arrow key to increment to the next correction cell.

19. For 11 set the appropriate power sensor cal factor on the

power meter.

20. Use the synthesizer rotary knob to adjust for a measurement of

0.00 on the power meter.

21. Repeat this sequence of steps until all the frequency points have

a correction value entered.

Activate List Mode

22. Press SWEEP

Select Sweep Mode List .

23. The flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup.

Disconnect the power meter/sensor. The power produced at the

point where the power meter/sensor was disconnected is now

calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above.

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Swept mm-wave Measurement with Arbitrary Correction Frequencies,

Example 3

The focus of this example is to use user flatness correction to

obtain flat power at the output of the HP 83550 series mm-wave

source modules. In this case we will use non-sequential correction

frequencies in a swept 26.5 to 40

HP 83554 source module.

measurement with an

The time it takes for a large quantity of power meter measurements

can be long, therefore, we selected non-sequential correction

frequencies to target specific points or sections of the measurement

range that we assume are more sensitive to power variations. This

greatly expedites setting up the user flatness correction table. The

amount of interpolated correction points between non- sequential

correction frequencies varies. This example uses

automatically enter correction data into the array.

Turn off the synthesizer before connecting to the source module

cable, or damage may result.

Note

interface (SMI)

Getting Started Advanced 1-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SYNTHESIZER

Figure

Arbitrarily Spaced Frequency-Correction Pairs in a Swept mm-wave

Environment

Creating

For this example, refer to menu map 5, POWER.

1. The equipment setup shown in Figure

assumes that

you have followed the steps necessary to correctly level the

configuration. If you have questions about external leveling

refer to earlier paragraphs titled, “Externally Leveling the

Synthesizer.”

Setup Power Meter

2. Zero and calibrate the power meter/sensor.

3. Connect the power sensor to test port.

4. Enter and store in the power meter, the power sensor’s cal factors

for correction frequencies to be used.

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

U, V, and W-band power sensors are not available from

Hewlett-Packard. For these frequencies use the Anritsu

Note

Power Meter with the

(50 to 75 or the

the Anritsu model

(40 to 60

(75 to 110

Power Meter is not capable of internally

the

power sensors. Since

storing power sensor cal factors, you must manually correct the

data entry. Refer to example 2 for information on manual entry of

correction data.

Setup Synthesizer Parameters

Turn on the synthesizer and press

The following occurs:

The source module’s frequency span is displayed on the

synthesizer.

The synthesizer’s leveling mode is automatically changed

internal to “module leveling”.

The source module’s maximum specified power is set and

displayed.

from

6. Press FREQUENCY (START)

The frequency sweep is set from 26.5 to 40

7. Press

The source module power is set to

for maximum power to the device under test.

Access User Flatness Correction Menu

Press POWER

Select Fltness Menu.

Select Delete Menu Delete All. This step insures that the

flatness array is empty.

Press

Leave the delete menu and return to the previous

10.

11.

menu.

Select Enter Freq

the first correction frequency. Enter 31, 32.5, and 40

to enter 26.5

complete the list. Notice that the frequencies are arbitrarily

spaced.

Enter Correction Data into Array

12.

Select Mtr

Menu Measure

All. The power meter

is now under synthesizer control and is performing the sequence

of steps necessary to generate the correction information at each

frequency point.

If an HP-IB error message is displayed verify that the interface

connections are correct. Check the HP-IB address of the power

meter and ensure that it is the same address the synthesizer is

Getting Started Advanced 1-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

using (address 13 is assumed). Refer to the menu map 8, System,

for the key sequence necessary to reach

Meter Adrs .

Enable User Flatness Correction

13. When the operation is complete, (a message is displayed) the

flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup.

14. To save the synthesizer parameters including the correction table

in an internal register, press

(n = number 1 through 8).

15. Disconnect the power meter/sensor and press

[amber LED on). The power produced at the point where the

power meter/sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the

frequencies and power level specified above.

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scalar Analysis Measurement with User Flatness Corrections,

Example 4

The following example demonstrates how to setup a scalar analysis

measurement (using an HP 8757 Scalar Network Analyzer) of a 2 to

test device such as, an amplifier. User flatness correction

is used to compensate for power variations at the test port of a

directional bridge. Follow the instructions to set up the synthesizer,

then configure the system as shown in Figure 1-21.

The synthesizer’s rear panel language and address switches must be

set to 7 and 31 (all l’s), to change the language or address of the

synthesizer from the front panel. The programming language must be

set to Analyzer. Refer to menu map 8, System, to find the location

Note

P rogramming Language Analyzer (asterisk on = active

language).

SYNTHESIZER

DETECTOR

OIRECTIONRL

DETECTOR

Figure

1. Scalar System Configuration

Example Overview

In this example you use an HP

power meter to automatically

enter correction data into the array. It is necessary to turn off

the HP 8757 System Interface (controlled from the front-panel of

the analyzer) so that the synthesizer can temporarily control the

power meter over HP-IB . When the correction data entry process

is complete, enable user flatness correction and set the desired test

port power level. Then store the correction table and synthesizer

configuration in the same register that contains the analyzer

configuration. Re-activate the HP 8757 System Interface and recall

Getting Started Advanced 1-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the stored register. Make sure that user flatness correction is still

enabled before making the measurement.

When an HP

power meter is used to automatically enter the

correction data, the correction calibration routine automatically turns

off any active modulation, then re-activates the modulation upon

the completion of the data entry process. Therefore, the scalar pulse

modulation that is automatically enabled in a scalar measurement

system is disabled during an HP

correction calibration.

The user flatness correction array cannot be stored to a disk. You

must make sure that the array is stored in one of the eight internal

registers. Recalling a file from an HP 8757 disk will not erase the

current array; therefore you may recall an array from an internal

Note

For this example, refer to menu map 5, POWER.

1. The equipment setup shown in Figure 1-21 assumes that

you have followed the steps necessary to correctly level the

configuration. If you have questions about external leveling

refer to earlier paragraphs titled, “Externally Leveling the

Synthesizer

2. On the analyzer, press [PRESET). Reset the analyzer and

synthesizer to a known state.

Setup System Parameters

3. On the synthesizer, press FREQUENCY

et t e

yth

esizer for a frequency sweep of

2 to 20

4. Press

power.

Where n = maximum available

5. On the analyzer, set up the appropriate measurement

(i.e. gain for an amplifier). Calibrate the measurement (thru and

short/open calibration). Press

to store the analyzer’s

configuration and synthesizer parameters in storage register 1.

6. Turn off the HP 8757 System Interface. Use the analyzer

ON OFF

found under the SYSTEM menu to

deactivate the system interface.

Access User Flatness Correction Menu

7. On the synthesizer, press POWER

Select

Me n u .

Select Delete Menu Delete All . This step insures that the

flatness array is empty.

1-44 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Press (PRIOR). Leave the delete menu and return to the previous

soft key menu.

10. Select Auto Fill Start

Set the first frequency in

correction table to 2

11. Auto Fill Stop

Set the last frequency in

correction table to 20

12. Auto Fill

Set the frequency increment to

every 100 MHz from 2 to 20

Setup Power Meter

13. Zero and calibrate the power meter/sensor.

14. Connect the power sensor to test port.

15. Enter and store in the power meter, the power sensor’s cal factors

for correction frequencies to be used.

Enter Correction Data into Array

16. Select

Menu Measure

All . The power meter

is now under synthesizer control and is performing the sequence

of steps necessary to generate the correction information at each

frequency point.

If an HP-IB error message is displayed verify that the interface

connections are correct. Check the HP-IB address of the power

meter and ensure that it is the same address the synthesizer is

using (address 13 is assumed). Refer to the menu map 8, System,

for the key sequence necessary to reach

Meter Adrs .

Enable User Flatness Correction

When the operation is complete, (a message is displayed) the

flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup.

18. Disconnect the power meter/sensor.

19. On the synthesizer, press

Where

for maximum leveled power at the test

l o s s

port.

20. To save the synthesizer parameters including the correction table

in an internal register, press

(n = number 1 through 8).

Reactivate the HP 8757 System Interface

21. Set the analyzer to SYSINTF ON, the analyzer and synthesizer

preset.

22. Press (RECALL)

Recall the synthesizer parameters from storage

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

23. On the synthesizer, press

(amber LED on). The

power produced at the point where the power meter/sensor was

disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level

specified above.

1-46 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Detector calibration is useful for characterizing and compensating for

negative diode detectors used in external leveling. Detectors may be

characterized by three operating regions as shown in Figure 1-12:

the square law, the linear, and the transition region. The following

Using Detector

Calibration

steps use an HP

to automatically characterize the operating

regions and use this information to automatically compensate for

the detector being used. The equipment setup shown in Figure

assumes that

steps necessary to correctly externally level have

been followed.

Refer to menu map 9, USER CAL.

Figure

Automatically Characterizing and Compensating for a Detector

1. Connect the power meter as shown.

2. Zero and calibrate the power meter/sensor.

3. Enter the appropriate power sensor calibration factors into the

power meter.

4. Enable the power meter/sensor cal factor array. For operating

information on the

power meter refer to its operating and service manual.

5. Connect the power sensor to the output of the coupler

(or splitter).

6. On the synthesizer, set the power level and start/stop frequency

information as desired.

7. Press

Select Ext Det Gal . The power meter is now under synthesizer

control and is performing the sequence of steps necessary to

generate the compensation information.

Getting Started Advanced 1-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If an HP-IB error message is displayed verify that the interface

connections are correct. Check the HP-IB address of the power

meter and ensure that it is the same address the synthesizer is

using (address 13 is assumed). Refer to the menu map 8, System,

for the key sequence necessary to reach

Meter

9. When the operation is complete, (a message is displayed)

disconnect the power meter/sensor. The synthesizer has stored

the compensation information in its memory and is using it to

calibrate the detector’s output voltage relative to power.

1-48 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Tracking

Feature

Peaking

Peaking is the function that aligns the output filter (YTM) so that

its

is centered on the RF output, in CW or manual-sweep

mode. Use peaking to obtain the maximum available power and

spectral purity, and best pulse envelopes, at any given frequency

above 2.35

(or 2

when 2

is the minimum frequency

specified). The YTM is inactive for the low band frequencies

(10 MHz to 2.35

To peak at the present CW frequency:

Press ( U S E R ) .

Select Tracking Menu Peak RF Once.

This causes an instantaneous execution of the peaking function. This

is a one-time implementation of the peaking, where the function is

turned on and then turned off.

To peak at the present CW frequency, and continue to peak at new

frequencies as they are entered:

Press ( U S E R ) .

Select Tracking Menu Peak RF Always.

If “peak always” is on (denoted by an asterisk next to the key

label) for an extended period of time, the peaking function will

automatically repeak every seven minutes.

Tracking

Auto track is a more extensive version of peaking. It causes all of

the YTM tracking calibration constants to be aligned and requires

approximately 40 to 90 seconds to complete. Tracking is performed

from 2.35

range.

(or 2.0

to the end of the specified frequency

If the synthesizer does not have a step attenuator, terminate the

RF OUTPUT with a good impedance match such as a 10

Note

attenuator or a power sensor to prevent mistracking.

To enhance the power output and spectral purity of swept

modes, and to improve tracking performance (especially in harsh

environments having wide temperature variations):

Press

Select Tracking Menu Auto Track

Getting Started Advanced 1-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The ALC bandwidth defaults at factory preset to the auto selection

ALC Bandwidth Select Auto which selects the appropriate

ALC Bandwidth

Selection

or low) for each application. To make the

bandwidth (high

bandwidth selection, the synthesizer determines which functions are

activated and uses the decision tree shown in Figure

on?

- o r -

Figure

Decision Tree for ALC Bandwidth Selection

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Refer to menu map 2.

2. Press FREQUENCY

Using Step Sweep

Select Step Swp Menu.

Enter the desired increment value.

Select Step Size.

Enter the number of points desired.

Select Step Points.

Determine the dwell time desired, select Step Dwell and enter

a value, or choose the dwell time determined by the ramp mode

sweep time, select

Coupled .

Determine the triggering scheme, select Step Swp Pt Trig Auto ,

Bus, or Ext

8. Press SWEEP (MENU).

Select Sweep Mode Step, to activate the step frequency mode.

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Refer to menu map 2.

2. Press FREQUENCY

Creating and Using

a Frequency List

Select List Menu.

To use the frequency points of a frequency list to create the

frequency portion of the user flatness correction array:

1. Refer to menu map 5.

2. Press POWER

Select

Menu.

Select Copy List .

1-52 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To access the security menu:

Using the Security

Features

1. Refer to menu map 8.

2. Press SYSTEM

Select Security Menu.

Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Setup the synthesizer in the desired operation state to be used as

Changing the Preset

Parameters

the preset state.

2. Refer to menu map 8.

3. Press SYSTEM

Select Save User Preset.

Select Preset Mode User.

Whenever the

key is pressed, the synthesizer will return to

the operation state setup and saved in steps 1 and 4. The synthesizer

displays:

*** USER DEFINED PRESET RECALLED ***

and also gives you the option of selecting the factory preset state by

creating a factory preset

1-54 Getting Started Advanced

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming

HP-IB, the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus, is the

Getting Started

Programming

instrument communication system between the synthesizer and up to

14 other instruments. Any instrument having HP-IB capability can

be interfaced to the synthesizer, including non-HP instruments that

have “GPIB,”

(these are common generic terms for HP-IB; all are electrically

equivalent although uses a unique connector). This portion

ANSI

capability

of the manual specifically describes interfacing the synthesizer to one

type of instrument: a computer.

The first part of this section provides general HP-IB information.

Later, the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments

is introduced, and example programs are given.

language (SCPI)

For information on programming in the Control Interface

Intermediate Language (CIIL), refer to a separate option 700 manual

supplement.

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP-IB General

Information

Figure

shows the synthesizer rear-panel HP-IB connector and

Interconnecting Cables

suitable cables, and describes the procedures and limitations for

interconnecting instruments. Cable length restrictions, also described

in Figure

must be observed to prevent transmission.

Each instrument in an HP-IB network must have a unique address,

ranging in value from 00-30 (d

Instrument Addresses

The default address for the

synthesizer is 19, but this can be changed using the My

or rear panel switch as described in the reference chapter (Chapter

2) under the “8360

entry (the examples in this section use 19

as the address for the synthesizer). Other instruments use a variety

of procedures for setting the address, as described in their operating

manuals, but typically either a rear panel switch or a front panel

code is used.

An HP-IB instrument is categorized as a “listener,” “talker,” or

“controller,” depending on its current function in the network.

HP-IB Instrument

Nomenclature

Listener

A listener is a device capable of receiving data or commands from

other instruments. Any number of instruments in the HP-IB network

can be listeners simultaneously.

Talker

A talker is a device capable of transmitting data or commands to

other instruments. To avoid confusion, an HP-IB system allows only

one device at a time to be an active talker.

Controller

A controller is an instrument, typically a computer, capable of

managing the various HP-IB activities. Only one device at a time

can be an active controller.

The synthesizer can be controlled entirely by a computer

(although the line POWER switch must be operated manually).

Several functions are possible only by computer (remote) control.

Computer programming procedures for the synthesizer involve

selecting an HP-IB command statement, then adding the specific

synthesizer (SCPI, Analyzer, or CIIL) programming codes to

that statement to achieve the desired operating conditions. The

programming codes can be categorized into two groups: Those that

mimic front panel keystrokes; and those that are unique, and have no

front panel equivalent.

Programming the

Synthesizer

1-56 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In the programming explanations that follow, specific examples are

included that are written in a generic dialect of the BASIC language.

BASIC was selected because the majority of HP-IB computers have

BASIC language capability. However, other languages can also be

used.

Command statements form the nucleus of HP-IB programming;

they are understood by all instruments in the network and, when

combined with the programming language codes, they provide all

management and data communication instructions for the system.

HP-IB Command

Statements

An explanation of the fundamental command statements follows.

However, some computers use a slightly different terminology,

or support an extended or enhanced version of these commands.

Consider the following explanations as a starting point, but

for detailed information consult the BASIC language reference

manual, the I/O programming guide, and the HP-IB manual for the

particular computer used.

Syntax drawings accompany each statement: All items enclosed by

a circle or oval are computer specific terms that must be entered

exactly as described; items enclosed in a rectangular box are names

of parameters used in the statement; and the arrows indicate a path

that generates a valid combination of statement elements.

The eight fundamental command statements are as follows:

Abort

Abort abruptly terminates all listener/talker activity on the interface

bus, and prepares all instruments to receive a new command from the

controller. Typically, this is an initialization command used to place

the bus in a known starting condition. The syntax is:

interface

where the interface select code is the computer’s HP-IB I/O port,

which is typically port 7. Some BASIC examples:

100

Related statements used by some computers:

(used by series computers)

THEN ABORT 7

HALT

RESET

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote

Remote causes an instrument to change from local control to

remote control. In remote control, the front panel keys are disabled

(except for the

key and the POWER switch), and the amber

REMOTE annunciator is lighted. The syntax is:

where the device selector is the address of the instrument appended

to the HP-IB port number. Typically, the HP-IB port number is

7, and the default address for the synthesizer is 19, so the device

selector is 719. Some BASIC examples:

REMOTE 7

which prepares all HP-IB instruments for remote operation (although

nothing appears to happen to the instruments until they are

addressed to talk), or

REMOTE 719

which affects the HP-IB instrument located at address 19, or

721, 726, 715

which effects four instruments that have addresses 19, 21, 26, and 15.

Related statements used by some computers:

RESUME

Local Lockout

Local Lockout can be used in conjunction with REMOTE to disable

the front panel [LOCAL) key. With the

key disabled, only the

controller (or a hard reset by the POWER switch) can restore local

control. The syntax is:

interface

A BASIC example:

REMOTE 719

LOCAL LOCKOUT 7

1-56 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Local

Local is the complement to REMOTE, causing an instrument to

return to local control with a fully enabled front panel. The syntax

is:

Some BASIC examples:

LOCAL 7

which effects all instruments in the network, or

LOCAL 719

for an addressed instrument (address 19).

Related statements used by some computers:

RESUME

Clear

Clear causes all HP-IB instruments, or addressed instruments, to

assume a “cleared” condition, with the definition of “cleared” being

unique for each device. For the synthesizer:

1. All pending output-parameter operations are halted.

2. The parser (the software that interprets the programming codes)

is reset, and now expects to receive the first character of a

programming code.

The syntax is:

Some BASIC examples:

to clear all HP-IB instruments, or

CLEAR 719

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to clear an addressed instrument.

Related statements used by some computers:

RESET

CONTROL

SEND

The preceding statements are primarily management commands

that do not incorporate programming codes. The following two

statements do incorporate programming codes, and are used for data

communication.

output

Output is used to send function commands and data commands from

the controller to the addressed instrument. The syntax is:

where USING is a secondary command that formats the output in a

particular way, such as a binary or ASCII representation of numbers.

The USING command is followed by “image items” that precisely

define the format of the output; these image items can be a string of

code characters, or a reference to a statement line in the computer

program. Image items are explained in the programming codes where

they are needed. Notice that this syntax is virtually identical to the

syntax for the ENTER statement that follows.

A BASIC example:

100 OUTPUT 719; “programming codes”

The many programming codes for the synthesizer are listed in the

“SCPI Command Summary” in Chapter 2.

Related statements used by some computers:

CONTROL

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONVERT

IMAGE

IOBUFFER

TRANSFER

Enter

Enter is the complement of OUTPUT, and is used to transfer data

from the addressed instrument to the controller. The syntax is:

ENTER is always used in conjunction with OUTPUT, such as:

100

110

OUTPUT 719; . . . programming codes . . .

ENTER 719; . . . response data.. .

ENTER statements are commonly formatted, which requires the

secondary command USING and the appropriate image items. The

most-used image items involve end-of-line (EOI) suppression, binary

inputs, and literal inputs. For example:

100

A, B, C

and indicates that variables A, B,

suppresses the EOI sequence

and C are to be filled with binary (B) data. As another example,

100 USING A$

suppresses EOI, and indicates that string variable A$ is to be filled

with 123 bytes of literal data

Be careful when using byte-counting image specifiers. If the

requested number of bytes does not match the actual number

available, data might be lost, or the program might enter an endless

wait state.

Note

The suppression of the EOI sequence is frequently necessary to

prevent a premature termination of the data input. When not

specified, the typical EOI termination occurs when an ASCII LF

Getting Started Programming 1-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(line feed) is received. However, the LF bit pattern could

coincidentally occur randomly in a long string of binary data, where

it might cause a false termination. Also, the bit patterns for the

ASCII CR (carriage return), comma, or semicolon might cause a false

termination. Suppression of the EOI causes the computer to accept

all bit patterns as data, not commands, and relies on the HP-IB EOI

(end or identify) line for correct end-of-data termination.

Related statements used by some computers:

CONVERT

IMAGE

IOBUFFER

ON TIMEOUT

SET TIMEOUT

TRANSFER

This completes the HP-IB Command Statements subsection. The

following material explains the SCPI programming codes, and shows

how they are used with the OUTPUT and ENTER HP-IB command

statements.

1-62 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This section of Chapter 1 describes the use of the Standard

Commands for Programmable Instruments language (SCPI).

This section explains how to use SCPI commands in general. The

instrument command summary (at the end of this chapter) lists

the specific commands available in your instrument. This section

presents only the basics of SCPI. If you want to explore the topic in

greater depth, see the paragraph titled, “Related Documents.”

Getting Started with

This section defines most terms when they are first used, you need a

general understanding of the terms listed below before you continue.

Definitions of Terms

controller

A controller is any computer used to communicate

with a SCPI instrument. A controller can be a

personal computer, a minicomputer, or a plug-in card

in a card cage. Some intelligent instruments can also

function as controllers.

instrument

An instrument is any device that implements SCPI.

Most instruments are electronic measurement or

stimulus devices, but this is not a requirement.

Similarly, most instruments use an HP-IB interface

for communication. The same concepts apply

regardless of the instrument function or the type of

interface used.

program

message

A program message is a combination of one

or more properly formatted SCPI commands.

Program messages always go from a controller to an

instrument. Program messages tell the instrument

how to make measurements and output signals.

response

message

A response message is a collection of data in specific

SCPI formats. Response messages always go from an

instrument to a controller or listening instrument.

Response messages tell the controller about the

internal state of the instrument and about measured

values.

A command is an instruction in SCPI. You

command

combine commands to form messages that control

instruments. In general, a command consists of

mnemonics (keywords), parameters, and punctuation.

A query is a special type of command. Queries

instruct the instrument to make response data

available to the controller. Query mnemonics always

end with a question mark.

Getting Started Programming 1-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This section uses several forms of notation that have specific

meaning.

Standard Notation

Command Mnemonics

Many commands have both a long and a short form, and you must

use either one or the other (SCPI does not accept a combination

of the two). Consider the FREQuency command, for example. The

short form is FREQ and the long form is FREQUENCY (this notation

style is a shorthand to document both the long and short form of

commands). SCPI is not case sensitive, so

is just as valid

as FREQUENCY, but FREQ and FREQUENCY are the only valid forms of

the FREQuency command.

Angle Brackets

Angle brackets indicate that the word or words enclosed represent

something other than themselves. For example, <new line>

represents the ASCII character with the decimal value 10. Similarly,

that EOI is asserted on the HP-IB interface. Words

in angle brackets have much more rigidly defined meaning than

words used in ordinary text. For example, this section uses the word

“message” to talk about messages generally. But the bracketed words

message> indicate a precisely defined element of SCPI.

If you need them, you can find the exact definitions of words such as

<program message> in a syntax diagram.

It is important to understand that programming with SCPI

actually requires knowledge of two languages. You must know

the programming language of your controller (BASIC, C, Pascal)

as well as the language of your instrument (SCPI). The semantic

requirements of your controller’s language determine how the SCPI

commands and responses are handled in your application.

How to Use Examples

Command Examples

Command examples look like this:

:FREQuency:CW?

This example tells you to put the string

:CW? in the

output statement appropriate to your application programming

language. If you encounter problems, study the details of how the

output statement handles message terminators such as

If you are using simple OUTPUT statements in HP BASIC, this is

taken care of for you. In HP BASIC, you type:

line>.

OUTPUT Source; : FREQuency : CW?”

Command examples do not show message terminators because

they are used at the end of every program message. “Details of

1-64 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands and Responses,”

detail.

discusses message terminators in more

Response Examples

Response examples look like this:

1.23

These are the characters you would read from an instrument

after sending a query command. To actually pull them from the

instrument into the controller, use the input statement appropriate

to your application programming language. If you have problems,

study the details of how the input statement operates. In particular,

investigate how the input statement handles punctuation characters

such as comma and semicolon, and how it handles

line> and

EOI. To enter the previous response in HP BASIC, you type:

ENTER

Response examples do not show response message terminators

because they are always <new line> C-END>. These terminators

are typically automatically handled by the input statement. The

paragraph titled “Details of Commands and Responses” discusses

message terminators in more detail.

Getting Started Programming 1-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This subsection discusses elementary concepts critical to first-time

users of SCPI. Read and understand this subsection before going on

to another. This subsection includes the following topics:

Essentials for

Beginners

Program and Response

Messages

These paragraphs introduce the

basic types of messages sent between

instruments and controllers.

Subsystem Command Trees

These paragraphs describe the

tree structure used in subsystem

commands.

Subsystem Command Tables These paragraphs present the

condensed tabular format used for

documenting subsystem commands.

Reading Instrument Errors

Example Programs

These paragraphs explain how to read

and print an instrument’s internal

error messages.

These paragraphs contain two simple

measurement programs that illustrate

basic SCPI programming principles.

To understand how your instrument and controller communicate

using SCPI, you must understand the concepts of program and

response messages. Program messages are the formatted data sent

from the controller to the instrument. Conversely, response messages

are the formatted data sent from the instrument to the controller.

Program messages contain one or more commands, and response

messages contain one or more responses.

Program and Response

Messages

The controller may send commands at any time, but the instrument

sends responses only when specifically instructed to do so. The

special type of command used to instruct the instrument to send

a response message is the query. All query mnemonics end with a

question mark. Queries return either measured values or internal

instrument settings. Any internal setting that can be programmed

with SCPI can also be queried.

Forgiving Listening and Precise Talking

SCPI uses the concept of forgiving listening and precise talking

outlined in IEEE 488.2. Forgiving listening means that instruments

are very flexible in accepting various command and parameter

formats. For example, the synthesizer accepts either : POWer : STATe

ON or :POWer:STATe 1 to turn RF output on. Precise

means

that the response format for a particular query is always the same.

For example, if you query the power state when it is on

(using : POWer : STATe?), the response is always 1, regardless of

whether you previously sent : POWer : STATe 1 or : POWer : STATe ON.

1-66 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

root

level 1

level

Figure

A Simplified Command Tree

In the command tree shown in Figure

the command closest to

the top is the root command, or simply the root. Notice that you

must follow a particular path to reach lower level subcommands. For

example, if you wish to access the GG command, you must follow the

path AA to BB to GG.

Paths Through the Command Tree

To access commands in different paths in the command tree, you

must understand how an instrument interprets commands. A special

part of the instrument firmware, a purser, decodes each message sent

to the instrument. The parser breaks up the message into component

commands using a set of rules to determine the command tree path

used. The parser keeps track of the current path, the level in the

command tree where it expects to find the next command you send.

This is important because the same keyword may appear in different

paths. The particular path you use determines how the keyword is

interpreted. The following rules are used by the parser:

Power On and Reset

After power is cycled or after

root.

the current path is set to the

Message Terminators

A message terminator, such as a <new line> character, sets the

current path to the root. Many programming languages have

output statements that send message terminators automatically.

“Details of Commands and Responses,”

The paragraph titled,

discusses message terminators in more detail.

Colon

When it is between two command mnemonics, a colon moves the

current path down one level in the command tree. For example,

the colon in MEAS:VOLT specifies that VOLT is one level below

When the colon is the first character of a command, it specifies

that the next command mnemonic is a root level command. For

specifies that

is a root level

example, the colon in

command.

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Semicolon

A semicolon separates two commands in the same message without

changing the current path.

Whitespace

White space characters, such as <tab> and <space>, are generally

ignored. There are two important exceptions. White space inside a

keyword, such as

space to separate parameters from commands. For example, the

<space> between and 6.2 in the command

is not allowed. You must use white

6.2 is mandatory. White space does not affect the current path.

Comma s

If a command requires more than one parameter, you must

separate adjacent parameters using a comma. Commas do not

affect the current path.

Common Comma nds

Common commands, such as

are not part of any subsystem.

An instrument interprets them in the same way, regardless of the

current path setting.

Figure

shows examples of how to use the colon and semicolon to

navigate efficiently through the command tree.

Getting Started Programming 1-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c c

R Sets current path

to ROOT

NO change to

current path

D Set current path

DOWN one level

:AA:BB:EE; :AA:DD:JJ

Figure

Proper Use of the Colon and Semicolon

In Figure

typing.

notice how proper use of the semicolon can save

Sending this message:

:AA:BB:EE; FF; GG

Is the same as sending these three messages:

:AA:BB:EE

:AA:BB:FF

:AA:BB:GG

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

These paragraphs introduce a more complete, compact way of

documenting subsystems using a tabular format. The command table

contains more information than just the command hierarchy shown in

a graphical tree. In particular, these tables list command parameters

for each command and response data formats for queries. To begin

this exploration of command tables, consider a simplified SWEep

subsystem for the synthesizer in both the graphical and tabular

formats.

Subsystem Command

Tables

SWEep

AUTO

Figure

Simplified SWEep Command Tree

Table 1-2. SWEep Command Table

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter

Com m a n d

SWEep

Reading the Command Table

Note the three columns in the command table labeled Command,

Parameters, and Parameter Type. Commands closest to the root

level are at the top of the table. Commands in square brackets

are implied commands, which are discussed in later paragraphs.

If a command requires one or more parameters in addition to the

keyword, the parameter names are listed adjacent to the command.

Parameters in square brackets are optional parameters, which are

discussed in later paragraphs. If the parameter is not in square

brackets, it is required and you must send a valid setting for it with

Getting Started Programming 1-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the matching command. The parameter type is listed adjacent to

each named parameter.

More About Commands

Query and Event Commands. Because you can query any value that

you can set, the query form of each command is not shown explicitly

in the command tables. For example, the presence of the synthesizer

: SWEep :

command implies that a : SWEep :

also exists.

If you see a table containing a command ending with a question

mark, it is a query only command. Some commands are

and cannot be queried. An event has no corresponding setting if it

causes something to happen inside the instrument at a particular

instant. For example, :

causes a certain trigger

sequence to initiate. Because it is an event, there is no query form of

Implied Commands. Implied commands appear in square brackets

in the command table. If you send a subcommand immediately

preceding an implied command, but do not send the implied

command, the instrument assumes you intend to use the implied

command, and behaves just as if you had sent it. Note that this

means the instrument expects you to include any parameters

required by the implied command. The following example illustrates

equivalent ways to program the synthesizer using explicit and implied

commands.

Example synthesizer commands with and without an implied

commands:

: SWEep :

:SWEep:MANual 6

ive 6

using explicit commands

using implied commands

Optional Parameters. Optional parameter names are enclosed in

square brackets in the command table. If you do not send a value

for an optional parameter, the instrument chooses a default value.

The instrument’s command dictionary documents the values used for

optional parameters.

Program Message Examples

The following parts of the synthesizer SCPI command set will be

used to demonstrate how to create complete SCPI program messages:

: STATE

: POWER

: LEVEL]

: CW 5 GHZ;

2”

Example 1:

1-72 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The command is correct and will not cause errors. It is equivalent to

sending:

: CW 5 GHZ ;

Example 2:

5 GHZ;

This command results in a command error. The command makes

use of the default [:CW] node. When using a default node, there is

no change to the current path position. Since there is no command

at the root, an error results. A correct way to send this is:

5 GHZ

Example 3:

: CW 5

: MULT or as in example 1.

2; MULTiplier:STATE ON;

This command results in a command error. The FREQ:CW portion

of the command is missing a leading colon. The path level is dropped

at each colon until it is in the FREQ:MULT subsystem. So when the

FREQ:CW command is sent, it causes confusion because no such

node occurs in the FREQ:MULT subsystem. By adding a leading

colon, the current path is reset to the root. The corrected command

is:

2; MULTiplier:STATE ON;

5 GHZ; POWER 4

Notice that in this example the keyword short form is used. The

command is correct. It utilizes the default nodes of and

Example 4:

Since default nodes do not affect the current path, it is

not necessary to use a leading colon before POWER.

Parameter Types

As you saw in the example command table for

there are

several types of parameters. The parameter type indicates what

kind of values are valid instrument settings. The most commonly

used parameter types are numeric, extended numeric, discrete, and

Boolean. These common types are discussed briefly in the following

paragraphs. The paragraph titled “Details of Commands and

Responses” explains all parameter types in greater depth.

Numeric Parameters. Numeric parameters are used in both

subsystem commands and common commands. Numeric parameters

accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers

including optional signs, decimal points, and scientific notation. If an

instrument accepts only specific numeric values, such as integers, it

automatically rounds numeric parameters to fit its needs.

Examples of numeric parameters:

no decimal point required

fractional digits optional

leading signs allowed

100

100.

-1.23

space allowed after e in exponents

Getting Started Programming 1-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

use either E or e in exponentials

leading allowed

digits left of decimal point optional

Examples of numeric parameters in commands:

100 OUTPUT

1 IO OUTPUT @Source

Extended Numeric Parameters. Most measurement related

subsystems use extended numeric parameters to specify physical

quantities. Extended numeric parameters accept all numeric

parameter values and other special values as well. All extended

numeric parameters accept

and

as values. Other

special values, such as UP and DOWN may be available as documented

in the instrument’s command summary. Some instruments also

let you to send engineering units as suffixes to extended numeric

parameters. The SCPI Command Summary lists the suffixes

available, if any. Note that extended numeric parameters are not

used for common commands or STATUS subsystem commands.

Examples of extended numeric parameters:

100.

-1.23

any simple numeric values

largest valid setting

MAX

MIN

valid setting nearest negative infinity

Examples of extended numeric parameters in commands:

100 OUTPUT

MAX”

110 OUTPUT @Source

Discrete Parameters. Use discrete parameters to program settings

that have a finite number of values. Discrete parameters use

mnemonics to represent each valid setting. They have a long and a

short form, like command mnemonics. You can use mixed upper and

lower case letters for discrete parameters.

Examples of discrete parameters:

level int erna lly

level using an external diode

level using an external power meter

Level using a mm-wave source module

Examples of discrete parameters in commands:

:POWer:ALC:SOURce

100 OUTPUT @Source;

110 OUTPUT @Source

1-74 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Although discrete parameters values look like command keywords,

do not confuse the two. In particular, be sure to use colons and

spaces properly. Use a colon to separate command mnemonics from

each other. Use a space to separate parameters from command

mnemonics.

Boolean Parameters. Boolean parameters represent a single binary

condition that is either true or false. There are only four possible

values for a Boolean parameter.

Examples of Boolean parameters:

O N

OFF

Boolean TRUE, upper/lower case allowed

Boolean FALSE, upper/lower case allowed

Boolea n TRUE

Boolea n FALSE

Examples of Boolean parameters in commands:

100 OUTPUT

110 OUTPUT

When debugging a program, you may want to know if an instrument

error has occurred. Some instruments can display error messages on

their front panels. If your instrument cannot do this, you can put the

following code segment in your program to read and display error

messages.

Reading Instrument

Errors

10 !

20 !

The rest of your

3 0 ! variable declarations

50 DI M

60 INTEGER Err-num

70 !

80 ! Part of your program

90 ! that generates errors

100 !

110 !

200 REPEAT

210

220

230

240

250

260

OUTPUT

! query instrument error

ENTER

! Read error

! Print error message

message

270 UNTIL Err-num = 0

280 ! Repeat until no errors

290 !

300 ! The rest of your program

310 !

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following is an example program using

instruments. The example is written in HP BASIC.

compatible

Example Programs

This example is a stimulus and response application. It uses a source

and counter to test a voltage controlled oscillator.

Example Program

Description. This example demonstrates how several SCPI

instruments work together to perform a stimulus/response

measurement. This program measures the linearity of a voltage

controlled oscillator (VCO). A VCO is a device that outputs a

frequency proportional to an input signal level. Figure

how the hardware is configured.

shows

Unit Under Test

vco

Response

Counter

Stimulus

Source

Figure

Program Listing.

Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test

INTEGER First,Last,Testpoint,Dummy

DIM

ASSIGN @Stimulus TO 717

ASSIGN @Response TO 718

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

CLEAR @Stimulus

CLEAR @Response

OUTPUT

PRINT "Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test"

190

200

PRINT "Source Used . . .

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OUTPUT

ENTER

210

220

230

240

PRINT Id$

250 !

260

PRINT "Counter Used . . .

270

280

OUTPUT

ENTER

290

300

PRINT Id$

310 !

320

OUTPUT

ON"

330 !

340

350

360

PRINT "INPUT

____________

370

380 !

390

FOR Testpoint=First TO Last

400

OUTPUT

410

ENTER

420

OUTPUT

430

ENTER

440

450

PRINT Testpoint,Reading/lOOO

NEXT Testpoint

460 !

470

OUTPUT

OFF"

480

END

Program Comments. Lines 20 to 70: Declare variables and I/O paths

for instruments. I/O paths let you use a name for an instrument in

OUTPUT and ENTER

of a numeric address.

80 to 100: Assign values to the input test limits in

110 to 130: Clear the instrument HP-IB interfaces.

140 to 160: Reset each instrument to a known measurement state.

170 to 190: Print the test report title.

200 to 310: Query measurement instruments’ identifications for test

traceability.

320 to 330: Connect the source output signal to the output

terminals.

340 to 380: Print results table header.

390 to 460: This is the main measurement loop. Line 400 contains

:SOURce:VOLT sets the output level of the source.

two commands.

is used to signal that the preceding command has finished

executing. To make an accurate source output

must be allowed to settle. When the output has settled, *OPC? places

Getting Started Programming 1-77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a 1 in the source Output Queue. The program waits at line 410 until

the 1 returned by is entered.

Note that following each OUTPUT containing a query is an ENTER to

retrieve the queried value. If you do not use paired OUTPUTS and

ENTERS, you can overwrite data in the instrument Output Queue and

generate instrument errors.

470 to 480: Disconnect output terminals of the instruments from the

unit under test, and end the program. All HP BASIC programs must

have END as the last statement of the main program.

Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Details of

Commands and

Responses

This subsection describes the syntax of SCPI commands and

responses. It provides many examples of the data types used for

command parameters and response data. The following topics are

explained:

In This Subsection

Program Message

Syntax

These paragraphs explain how to properly

construct the messages you send from the

computer to instruments.

Response Message These paragraphs discuss the format of

Syntax

messages sent from instruments to the

computer.

SCPI Data Types

These paragraphs explain the types of data

contained in program and response messages.

These paragraphs examine the construction of SCPI program

messages in more detail. Recall that program messages are the

messages you send from the computer to an instrument. These

program messages contain commands combined with appropriate

punctuation and program message terminators. Figure

Program Message

Syntax

illustrates the simplified syntax of a program message.

subsystem command

NOTES:

line> = ASCII character decimal 10

“END =

EOI asserted concurrent with last byte

Figure

Simplified Program Message Syntax

As Figure

shows, you can send common commands and

subsystem commands in the same message. If you send more than

one command in the same message, you must separate them with

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a semicolon. You must always end a program message with one of

the three program message terminators shown in Figure Use

as the program message

means that EOI is asserted on the

<new line>,

or <new line>

terminator. The word

HP-IB interface at the same time the preceding data byte is sent.

Most programming languages send these terminators automatically.

For example, if you use the HP BASIC OUTPUT statement,

line> is automatically sent after your last data byte. If you are

using a PC, you can usually configure the system to send whatever

terminator you specify.

Subsystem Command Syntax

Figure

describes the basic syntax of SCPI subsystem commands.

white space,

ASCII characters

and 11,

Figure

Simplified Subsystem Command Syntax

As Figure shows, there must be a <space> between the

last command mnemonic and the first parameter in a subsystem

command. This is one of the few places in SCPI where <space>

is required. Note that if you send more than one parameter with

a single command, you must separate adjacent parameters with a

comma. Parameter types are explained later in this subsection.

Common Command Syntax

Figure 1-31 describes the syntax of common commands.

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE:

white space,

characters 0

and 11

Figure 1-31. Simplified Common Command Syntax

As with subsystem commands, use a <space> to separate a

command mnemonic from subsequent parameters. Separate adjacent

parameters with a comma. Parameter types are explained later in

this subsection.

Figure

shows a simplified view of response message syntax.

Response Message

Syntax

response data

Figure

Simplified Response

Syntax

Response messages can contain both commas and semicolons as

separators. When a single query command returns multiple values,

a comma separates each data item. When multiple queries are sent

in the same message, the groups of data items corresponding to each

query are separated by a semicolon. For example, the fictitious query

: QUERY

might return a response message of:

Response data types are explained later in this subsection. Note that

<new line><-END> is always sent as a response message terminator.

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

These paragraphs explain the data types available for parameters and

response data. They list the types available and present examples for

each type. SCPI defines different data formats for use in program

messages and response messages. It does this to accommodate

the principle of forgiving listening and precise talking. Recall

that forgiving listening means instruments are flexible, accepting

commands and parameters in various formats. Precise talking means

an instrument always responds to a particular query in a predefined,

rigid format. Parameter data types are designed to be flexible in

the spirit of forgiving listening. Conversely, response data types are

defined to meet the requirements of precise talking.

Data Types

Table 1-3.

Data Types

Parameter Typ es

Resp on se Da ta Typ es

Real or Integer

Integer

Numeric

Extended Numeric

Discrete

Numeric Boolean

String

Boolean

Definite Length Block

Indefinite Length Block

Non-decimal Numeric Hexadecimal

Octal

Binary

Notice that each parameter type has one or more corresponding

response data types. For example, a setting that you program using

a numeric parameter returns either real or integer response data

when queried. Whether real or integer response data is returned

depends on the instrument used. However, precise talking requires

that the response data type be clearly defined for a particular

instrument and query. The instrument command dictionary generally

contains information about data types for individual commands. The

following paragraphs explain each parameter and response data type

in more detail.

Parameter Types

Numeric Parameters. Numeric parameters are used in both

subsystem commands and common commands. Numeric parameters

accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers

including optional signs, decimal points, and scientific notation.

If an instrument setting programmed with a numeric parameter can

only assume a finite number of values, the instrument automatically

1-82 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

rounds the parameter. For example, if an instrument has a

programmable output impedance of 50 or 75 ohms, you specified

76.1 for output impedance, the value is rounded to 75. If the

instrument setting can only assume integer values, it automatically

rounds the value to an integer. For example, sending

is the same as sending 10.

10.123

Examples of numeric parameters:

no decimal point required

100

fractional digits optional

100.

-1.23

leading signs allowed

space allowed after e in exponentials

use either E or e in exponentials

leading + allowed

digits left of decimal point optional

Extended Numeric Parameters. Most measurement related

subsystems use extended numeric parameters to specify physical

quantities. Extended numeric parameters accept all numeric

parameter values and other special values as well. All extended

numeric parameters accept

and

as values. Other

special values, such as UP and DOWN may be available as documented

in the instrument’s command dictionary. Note that

can be used to set or query values. The query forms

and

are useful for determining the range of values allowed for a given

parameter.

In some instruments, extended numeric parameters accept

engineering unit suffixes as part of the parameter value. Refer to the

command summary to see if this capability exists.

Note that extended numeric parameters are not used for common

commands or

subsystem commands.

Examples of extended numeric parameters:

any simple numeric values

largest valid setting

100.

-1.23

MAX

valid setting nearest negative infinity

negative 100 millivolts

MIN

-100

Getting Started Programming 1-83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Discrete Parameters. Use discrete parameters to program settings

that have a finite number of values. Discrete parameters use

mnemonics to represent each valid setting. They have a long and

a short form, just like command mnemonics. You can used mixed

upper and lower case letters for discrete parameters.

Examples of discrete parameters used with the

subsystem:

internal frequency standard

external frequency standard

no frequency standard, free run mode

NONE

Although discrete parameters values look like command keywords,

do not confuse the two. In particular, be sure to use colons and

spaces properly. Use a colon to separate command mnemonics from

each other. Use a space to separate parameters from command

mnemonics.

Boolean Parameters. Boolean parameters represent a single binary

condition that is either true or false. There are only four possible

values for a Boolean parameter.

Examples of Boolean parameters:

Boolean TRUE, upper/lower case allowed

OFF Boolean FALSE, upper/lower case allowed

Boolean TRUE

Boolean FALSE

Response Data Types

Real Response Data. A large portion of all measurement data are

formatted as real response data. Real response data are decimal

numbers in either fixed decimal notation or scientific notation. In

general, you do not need to worry about the rules for formatting

real data, or whether fixed decimal or scientific notation is used.

Most high level programming languages that support instrument I/O

handle either type transparently.

Examples of real response data:

1.23

-100.0

0.5

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Integer Response Data. Integer response data are decimal

representations of integer values including optional signs. Most status

Examples of integer response data:

0 signs a re opt iona l

leading + sign allowed

-100 leading sign allowed

256 never any decimal point

Discrete Response Data. Discrete response data are similar to

discrete parameters. The main difference is that discrete response

data return only the short form of a particular mnemonic, in all

upper case letters.

Examples of discrete response data:

level internally

level using an external diode

level using an external power meter

level using a mm-wave source module

String Response Data. String response data are similar to string

parameters. The main difference is that string response data use only

double quotes as delimiters, rather than single quotes. Embedded

double quotes may be present in string response data. Embedded

quotes appear as two adjacent double quotes with no characters

between them.

Examples of string response data:

"This IS valid"

"SO IS THIS

"I said,

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming

Typical

Measurements

This subsection illustrates how the general SCPI concepts presented

in previous subsections apply to programming real measurements.

To introduce you to programming with SCPI, we must list the

commands for the synthesizer. We will begin with a simplified

example.

In This Subsection

The example programs are interactive. They require active

Using the Example

Programs

participation by the operator. If you desire to get an understanding

of the principles without following all of the instructions, read the

“Program Comments” paragraphs to follow the programmed activity.

The HP-IB select code is assumed to be preset to 7. All example

programs in this section expect the synthesizer’s HP-IB address to be

decimal 19.

To find the present HP-IB address use the front panel.

Press SYSYTEM

Select HP-IB Menu Ad r s Menu My

The active entry area indicates the present decimal address. If the

number displayed is not 19, reset it to 19.

Press

(9)(ENTER). If the synthesizer does not respond to a front

panel address change, set the HP-IB address switch (rear panel) to 31

(all ones) enabling front panel changes to both address and interface

language.

Now check that the interface language is set to SCPI.

Press

An asterisk denotes the selected interface language. If an asterisk is

not next to the SCPI key label, select Power

Language SCPI .

1-86 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Use of the Command Tables

In Table 1-4, notice that a new column titled “Allowed Values” has

been added to the command table. This column lists the specific

values or range of values allowed for each parameter. A vertical

bar

separates values in a list from which you must choose one

value. The commands listed in the table are only part of all the

available SCPI commands of the synthesizer. For a complete listing

of the programming codes see “SCPI Command Summary” in the

Operating and Programming Reference chapter that follows.

Table 1-4. Sample Synthesizer Commands

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter Typ e

Allow ed Va lu es

d iscr et e

fla t n ess a r r a y

to ca l

m ea su r ed p ow er

exten d ed n u m er ic

[lvl su ffix]

801

ext en d ed n u m er ic

su ffix],

cor r ection p a ir s

cen ter fr eq

sp ecified fr eq

r a n ge

sp ecified fr eq r a n ge

CW fr e q

ext en d ed n u m er ic

Boolea n

cou p led to

cen ter fr eq

d iscr et e

fr ee m od e

sta r t fr eq

ext en d ed n u m er ic

sp ecified fr eq r a n ge

Boolea n

a u t o fr eq st ep

fr eq step

20 t o 0.01

exten d ed n u m er ic

sp ecified fr eq r a n ge

o r

stop fr eq

ext en d ed n u m er ic

[n ] is 1 t o 5, 1 is t h e d efa u lt

MARKer [n ]

sp ecified fr eq r a n ge

exten d ed n u m er ic

m a r k er fr equ en cy

Getting Started Programming 1-87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-4. Sample Synthesizer Commands (continued)

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter Typ e

Allow ed Va lu es

set t in g

ext en d ed n u m er ic

[DB] or

cou p led

ou tp u t level

Boolea n

sp ecified p ow er r a n ge

exten d ed n u m er ic

Boolea n

R F on /off

t yp e of sw eep

sw eep t im e

d iscr et e

t o 133

exten d ed n u m er ic

a u t o sw eep

t im e sw it ch

Boolea n

su ffix] or

ext en d ed n u m er ic

:LLIMit

fa st est sw eep

t im e

This first program is to verify that the HP-IB connections and

interface are functional. Connect a controller to the synthesizer

via an HP-IB cable. Clear and reset the controller and type in the

following program:

HP-IB

Example

ABORT 7

LOCAL Source

CLEAR Source

REMOTE Source

PRINT "The source should now be in REMOTE."

PRINT "Verify that the 'REMOTE' LED is

END

Run the program and verify that the REMOTE LED is lit on the

synthesizer. If it is not, verify that the synthesizer address is set to

19 and that the interface cable is properly connected.

If the controller display indicates an error message, it is possible that

the program was entered in incorrectly. If the controller accepts the

REMOTE statement but the synthesizer REMOTE LED does not

turn on, perform the operational checks as outlined in the respective

Operating and Service Manuals to find the defective device.

1-88 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Program Comments

10: Setup a variable to contain the HP-IB address of the source.

20: Abort any bus activity and return the HP-IB interfaces to

their reset states.

30: Place the source into LOCAL to

Local Lockouts

that may have been setup. 40: Reset the source’s parser and clear

any pending output from the source. Prepare the source to receive

new commands.

50: Place the source into REMOTE.

60: Clear the display of the computer.

70: Print a message to the computer’s display.

When the synthesizer is in REMOTE mode, all the front panel

keys are disabled except the LOCAL key. But, when the LOCAL

LOCKOUT command is set on the bus, even the LOCAL key is

disabled. The LOCAL command, executed from the controller, is

then the only way to return all (or selected) instruments to front

panel control.

Local Lockout

Demonstration,

Example Program 2

Continue example program 1. Delete line 90 END and type in the

following commands:

PRINT "Verify that all keys are ignored,

except the 'LOCAL' key."

PRINT "Verify that 'LOCAL' causes the

REMOTE LED to go OFF."

100

press CONTINUE"

PRINT . . . . .

PAUSE

REMOTE Source

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

LOCAL LOCKOUT 7

PRINT "Source should now be in LOCAL LOCKOUT mode."

PRINT "Verify that all keys (including 'LOCAL')

have no effect."

press CONTINUE"

PRINT . . . . .

180

190 PAUSE

LOCAL Source

PRINT "Source should now be in LOCAL mode."

PRINT "Verify that the synthesizer's keyboard

200

210

220

230

is functional. "

END

240

To verify and investigate the different remote modes do the following:

1. Reset the controller.

2. On the synthesizer: Press

Getting Started Programming 1-89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clear the controller display and run the program. that the

REMOTE LED on the synthesizer is lit.

From the front panel, attempt to change the start frequency and

verify that this is impossible.

Verify that all keys except

are disabled.

Now press the

key and verify that the synthesizer

REMOTE LED is off and that you can modify any of the sweep

functions.

Execute a “continue” on the controller. With the controller

displaying “LOCAL LOCKOUT mode”, verify that the

synthesizer REMOTE LED is again lit.

Attempt to change the start frequency and press

that this is impossible.

Verify

Now press the synthesizer

action is taken.

key and verify that still no

Execute a “continue” on the controller. With the controller

10.

verify that the synthesizer REMOTE

displaying “LOCAL mode”,

LED is off. Also verify that all sweep functions now can be

modified via the front panel controls.

Note that the synthesizer

key produces the same result as

HINT

programming LOCAL 719 or LOCAL 7. Be careful because the

LOCAL 7 command places all instruments on the HP-IB in the local

state as opposed to just the synthesizer.

Program Comments

90 to 120: Print a message on the computer’s display, then pause.

130: Place the source into REMOTE.

140: Place the source into LOCAL LOCKOUT mode.

150 to 190: Print a message on the computer’s display, then pause.

200: Return the source to local control.

210 to 230: Print a message on the computer’s display.

In swept operation, the synthesized sweeper is programmed for the

proper sweep frequency range, sweep time, power level, and marker

frequencies for a test measurement. This program sets up the

synthesizer for a general purpose situation. The instrument is the

Setting Up A Typical

Sweep, Example

Program 3

Clear and reset the controller and type in the

same as in program 1.

following program:

ABORT 7

LOCAL 7

CLEAR Source

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMOTE Source

OUTPUT

100 OUTPUT

-5

110 OUTPUT

120 OUTPUT Source;"

130 OUTPUT

:MARKerl:STATe

OUTPUT

140

150 ENTER

160 OUTPUT

170 OUTPUT

180

ON"

190 PRINT "Source setup complete."

PRINT "Verify that the source is sweeping from"

210 PRINT to 7 at a power of -5

PRINT "with a sweeptime of 0.5 seconds."

200

220

230 END

Run the program.

Program Comments

10: Assign the source’s HP-IB address to a variable.

20 to 50: Abort any HP-IB activity and initialize the HP-IB

interface.

60: Set the source to its initial state for programming. The

state is not the same as the PRESET state. For complete details

of the instrument state at

in Chapter 2.

see “SCPI Command Summary,"

70: Select the frequency mode to be SWEEP instead of the default

sweep mode of “CW” that was selected with *RST.

80: Set the source start frequency to 4

90: Set the source stop frequency to 7

Note the optional

usage of the short-form mnemonic, “FREQ”.

100: Set the source’s power level to -5

110: Set the sweeptime to 500 ms. Notice that upper/lower case in

commands does not matter. Also spaces before the suffix (“MS”)

are not required in SCPI.

120 and 130: Set markers 1 and 2 to a fixed value. Notice that the

value for marker 2 does not end with a frequency suffix. Hertz is a

default terminator and is understood.

140: Wait until the source has completed setting up the commands

that have been sent so far before turning on the output.

150: The ENTER statement causes the program to wait here until

the source responds to the previous *OPC? with a ‘1’.

Getting Started Programming 1-91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

160: The source has now completed processing the commands.

The RF frequency, power, and markers are at their programmed

values. Turn on the RF output of the source.

170: Select a continuously initiated sweep instead of the default

mode of non-continuous that was selected with

180: Clear the computer’s display.

190 to 220: Print a message on the computer’s display.

The following example demonstrates the use of query commands and

response data formats. Clear and reset the controller and type in the

following program:

Queries, Example

Program 4

ABORT 7

LOCAL 7

CLEAR Source

REMOTE Source

OUTPUT

-5 dBm;STATE ON"

100 ENTER

PRINT "Present source CW frequency is :

OUTPUT

110

120

130 ENTER Source;W

PRINT "Present power ON/OFF state is :

OUTPUT

140

150

160 DIM

170 ENTER Source;A$

PRINT "Source's frequency mode is :

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

OUTPUT

MIN"

ENTER Source;A

PRINT "Minimum source CW frequency is :

OUTPUT

ENTER Source;X,Y

PRINT "Swept frequency limits

P R I N T

260 PRINT

S t a r t

Stop

END

270

Run the program.

Program Comments

10: Assign the source’s HP-IB address to a variable.

20 to 50: Abort any HP-IB activity and initialize the HP-IB

interface.

60: Clear the computer’s display.

1-92 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

70: Set the source to its initial state for programming.

80: Setup the source power level using a compound message.

90: Query the value of the source’s CW frequency.

100: Enter the query response into the variable ‘F’. The response

always is returned in fundamental units, Hz in the case of

frequency.

110: Print the CW Frequency in MHz on the computer display.

120: Query the value of a boolean function, POWER:STATE.

130: Enter the query response into a variable ‘W’. Boolean

responses are always ‘1’ for ON and ‘0’ for OFF.

140: Print the value of the POWER:STATE on the computer

display.

150: Query the value of a discrete function

160: Dimension a string variable to contain the response.

170: Enter the response into A$. The response will be a string

that represents the function’s present value.

180: Print the value of A$ on the computer display.

190: Example usage of a MIN query. This will request the

maximum value that the FREQ:CW function can be programmed

to.

200: Enter the numeric response into the variable A.

210: Print the value of A on the computer display.

220: This is compound query. Up to 8 parameters can be queried

from the synthesizer at one time using this method. In this

example, the start and stop frequencies are interrogated.

230: The responses are read back into the variables X and Y. The

order of the responses is the same as the order of the queries. X

will contain the START frequency and Y will contain the STOP.

240 to 260: Print the START/STOP frequencies on the display.

When a typical sweep, like example program 3, is set up, the

complete front panel state may be saved for later use in non-volatile

memories called registers 1 through 8. This can be done remotely as

a part of a program. Clear and reset the controller and type in the

following program:

Saving and Recalling

States, Example

Program 5

ABORT 7

LOCAL 7

CLEAR Source

REMOTE Source

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OUTPUT

SWE;STAR

ON"

100 PRINT "A sweeping state has been saved in REGISTER 1."

OUTPUT

110

120

130

PRINT "A CW state has been saved in REGISTER

Press Continue"

140 PRINT

PAUSE

160 OUTPUT

150

PRINT "Register 1 recalled. Verify source is sweeping.”

PRINT "Press Continue."

170

180

190 PAUSE

200 OUTPUT

PRINT "Register 2 recalled."

PRINT "Verify source is in CW mode.'

END

210

220

230

Run the program.

Program Comments

10: Assign the source’s HP-IB address to a variable.

20 to 50: Abort any HP-IB activity and initialize the HP-IB

interface.

60: Clear the computer’s display.

70: Setup the source for a sweeping state. Note the combination

of several commands into a single message. This single line is

equivalent to the following lines:

OUTPUT

4GHZ'

5GHZ"

ON"

80: Save this state into storage register 1.

90: Clear the computer display.

100: Print a message on the computer display.

110: Setup the source for a CW state. Note the combination

of several commands into a single message. This single line is

equivalent to the following lines:

OUTPUT

1.23456 GHZ"

-1

120: Save this state into storage register 2.

130 to 150: Print a message on the computer display and pause.

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

160: Recall the instrument state from register 1. It should contain

the sweeping state.

170 to 190: Print a message on the computer display and pause.

200: Recall the instrument state from register 2. It should contain

the CW state.

210 and 220: Print messages on the computer display.

Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program:

Looping and

Synchronization,

Example Program 6

100

ABORT 7

LOCAL 7

CLEAR Source

REMOTE Source

OUTPUT

OUTPUT Source;

OUTPUT

4 GHZ; STOP 5 GHZ; MODE SWEEP"

-1 DBM; STATE ON"

OUTPUT

110 OUTPUT

120 ENTER Source;X

REPEAT

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

CO to exit]";

DISP "Enter number of sweeps to take :

INPUT N

IF THEN

FOR TO N

DISP "Taking sweep number : ";I

OUTPUT

ENTER \

NEXT I

END IF

230 UNTIL N=O

240 END

Run the program.

Program Comments

10: Assign the source’s HP-IB address to a variable.

20 to 50: Abort any HP-IB activity and initialize the HP-IB

interface.

60: Clear the computer’s display.

70: Set the source to its initial state for programming.

80: Setup the frequency parameters using a compound message.

90: Setup the source’s power level and state using a compound

message.

Getting Started Programming 1-95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

100: Setup the source’s sweep time to 1 second.

110: Send the

command to the source to ensure that the

previous commands are completed and the source is ready to begin

controlled sweeps.

120: Enter the response to the *OPC? into the variable X. The

response should be a ‘1’.

130: Start of the loop.

140 and 150: Prompt the operator for the number of sweeps to

take. The number of sweeps to take is stored in the variable N.

Enter 0 to quit the program.

160: Don’t take any sweeps if N is less than 0.

170: Start a FOR/NEXT loop to take N sweeps.

180: Display the number of this sweep on the computer display.

190: Initiate a single sweep on the source and then wait until

the pending operation is complete. Return a ‘1’ when the sweep

completes.

200: Enter the response to the *OPC? into the variable X. The

program execution will halt on this ENTER statement until the

sweep is finished.

210: Repeat the

sequence N times.

220: End of the IF statement to skip sweeps if N is negative.

230: Exit the program if the value of N is 0.

The following example illustrates the use of the

cause the synthesizer to perform a synchronous sweep.

command to

Using the

Command, Example

Program 7

ABORT 7

LOCAL 7

CLEAR Source

REMOTE Source

OUTPUT

STOP

MODE

OUTPUT

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

OUTPUT

ENTER Source;X

FOR

TO 4

OUTPUT

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

190 NEXT I

200 PRINT “Finished sending commands to source.

210 PRINT “Note that execution is continuing for four cycles.”

220 END

Run the program.

Program Comments

10: Assign the source’s HP-IB address to a variable.

20 to 50: Abort any HP-IB activity and initialize the HP-IB

interface.

60: Clear the computer’s display.

70: Set the source to its initial state for programming.

80: Set the source up for a sweep, from 4

to 5

90: Set the sweep time to 2 second. In SCPI, suffixes are optional

if you program in fundamental units (for sweep time, that would

be seconds).

100: Send an

to the source.

110: Enter the query response to the *OPC? into a variable “X”.

The program execution will halt here until the source has finished

processing all the commands up to this point. Once complete, the

source will respond to the *OPC? with a “1”.

120: Begin a FOR/NEXT loop that is repeated four times.

130: Initiate a sweep on the source.

140: Send a

command to the source. This command

causes the source to stop executing new commands until all prior

commands and operations have completed execution. In this case,

there is a sweep in progress, so no further commands will be

executed until the sweep finishes.

150: Turn the RF output of the source ON.

160: Initiate a sweep on the source.

170: Send another

to the source. Although the

command causes EXECUTION of commands to be held off, it

has no effect on the transfer of commands over the HP-IB. The

commands continue to be accepted by the source and are buffered

until they can be executed.

180: Toggle the RF STATE to OFF.

190: Repeat the sample exercise.

200 and 210: Print messages on the computer display.

Getting Started Programming 1-97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following program interrogates the synthesizer and an HP

power meter for frequency and power information respectively.

Using the User Flatness

Correction Commands,

Example Program 8

The synthesizer (an HP

is programmed to sweep from

2 to 20

with frequency-correction pairs every 100 MHz and

leveled output power. For this example, we assume that the

path losses do not exceed 5

and that the HP

power meter

already has its power sensor’s calibration factors stored in sensor

data table 0. If another power meter is used, the power sensor’s

calibration factors will have to be stored in a look-up table. Modify

the program to suit your particular measurement requirements. Up

to 801 points may be entered in the user flatness correction table

with this program.

SCPI commands are used to set up the source parameters and enter

correction frequencies and data into the correction table.

the address of the source and power meter

ASSIGN

INTEGER Error-flag

TO 719

TO 713

ABORT 7

!Set up source

OUTPUT @Source;

2 GHZ; STOP

100 OUTPUT @Source; "SWEep:TIME 200 MS"

110 OUTPUT @Source;

120 OUTPUT @Source;

130 ENTER @Source; Done

5 DBM;:INITiate:CONTinuous

ON"

operation complete?

140

150 !Set up power meter

160 OUTPUT @Meter;

170 OUTPUT @Meter;

180 OUTPUT @Meter;

190

200

210 OUTPUT

power meter

"POWer:STATe OFF"

sure RF is off!

220 Zero-meter (@Meter, Error-flag)

230 IF Error-flag THEN

240

250

260

BEEP

CLEAR SCREEN

PRINT "Error: Meter did not complete zeroing operation!"

270 ELSE

280

290 !Set up correction frequencies in User Flatness Correction table

300

310

320

330

340

350

OUTPUT @Source;

WHILE

1-96 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OUTPUT @Source; Freq;

Freq=Freq+Increment

END WHILE

360

370

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

OUTPUT

Freq;

OUTPUT @Source;

ON"

data in User Flatness Correction table

OUTPUT @Source;

ENTER @Source; Freq

WHILE

USER"

Power;

OUTPUT @Source;

ENTER @Source; Freq

END WHILE

500 END IF

510 END

520

530 SUB Zero-meter (@Meter, INTEGER Error-flag)

540

550

560

570

580

600

610

620

630

640

650

660

670

680

690

700

710

720

730

OUTPUT @Meter;

OUTPUT

WHILE Zeroing AND NOT Finished

Attempts=Attempts+l

Meter-stat=SPOLL

IF BIT

WAIT 1

THEN

END WHILE

IF NOT Zeroing THEN

ELSE

END IF

of power meter

measurement routine

740 DEF

sensor data table 0

OUTPUT @Meter;

750

760

770

780

790

800

810

820

830

OUTPUT @Meter;

OUTPUT

ENTER

for power meter to

REPEAT

settle; determine power

OUTPUT @Meter;

ENTER

840

850

Getting Started Programming 1-99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

860

870

880

890

900

910

920

930

940

950

960

970

980

THEN

ELSE

END IF

UNTIL

RETURN Power

FNEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming the

Status System

This subsection discusses the structure of the status system used in

SCPI instruments, and explains how to program status registers. An

important feature of SCPI instruments is that they all implement

status registers the same way. The status system is explained in the

following paragraphs:

In This Subsection

General Status These paragraphs explain the way that status

also contains an example of how bits in the various

registers change with different input conditions.

Required

These paragraphs describe the minimum required

Status Groups status registers present in SCPI instruments. These

registers cover the most frequently used

functions.

The generalized status register model shown in Figure

is the

General Status Register

Model

building block of the SCPI status system. This model consists of a

condition register, a transition filter, an event register and an enable

Enable

Condition

Transition

filter

Event

Bit

Summary

Bit

Bit 3

Bit Name

Bit Number

Figure

Generalized Status Register Model

When a status group is implemented in an instrument, it always

contains all of the component registers. However, there is not always

a corresponding command to read or write to every register.

Condition Register

The condition register continuously monitors the hardware and

firmware status of the instrument. There is no latching or buffering

for this register, it is updated in real time. Condition registers are

read-only.

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

There may or may not be a command to read a particular condition

Transition Filter

The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the

condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register.

Transition filter bits may be set for positive transitions

negative transitions

or both. Positive means a condition

bit changes from 0 to 1. Negative means a condition bit changes

from 1 to 0. Transition filters are read-write. Transition filters

are unaffected by

(clear status) or queries. They are set to

instrument dependent values at power on and after

Event Register

The event register latches transition events from the condition

are latched, and once set they remain set until cleared by a query or

(clear status). There is no buffering, so while an event bit is

set, subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored. Event

registers are read-only.

Enable Register

The enable register specifies the bits in the event register that

can generate a summary bit. The instrument logically

corresponding bits in the event and enable registers, and

all

the resulting bits to obtain a summary bit. Summary bits are in

turn recorded in the Status Byte. Enable registers are read-write.

Querying an enable register does not affect it. There is always a

command to read and write to the enable register of a particular

status group.

An Example Sequence

Figure

illustrates the response of a single bit position in a

typical status group for various settings. The changing state of the

condition in question is shown at the bottom of the figure. A small

binary table shows the state of the chosen bit in each status register

at the selected times

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Case A

Case

Case C

Case

Condition

Figure

Typical Status Register Bit Changes

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming the

Trigger System

This subsection discusses the layered trigger model used in SCPI

instruments. It also outlines some commonly encountered trigger

configurations and programming methods. Trigger system topics are

explained in the following paragraphs:

In This Subsection

Generalized Trigger These paragraphs explain the structure and

Model

components of the layered trigger model used in

all SCPI instruments.

Common Trigger

Configurations

These paragraphs explain the

configurations implemented in the synthesizer.

and TRIG

Trigger Command These paragraphs provide condensed definitions

Definitions for the keywords used in this subsection.

Understanding trigger systems requires more technical expertise than

most other topics covered in this section. If you find this subsection

difficult, keep in mind that you do not have to program the trigger

system to make measurements or output signals. Using

READ, or

you can avoid having to learn the information in

this subsection.

Generalized Trigger

Model

Overview

An instrument trigger system synchronizes instrument actions

with specified events. An instrument action may be to make a

measurement or source an output signal. The events used to

synchronize these actions include software trigger commands,

changing signal levels, and pulses on BNC connectors.’ The trigger

system also lets you specify the number of times to repeat certain

actions, and delays between actions.

Figure

shows a simplified view of the generalized SCPI trigger

model. Instruments may implement some or all of this model, to

accommodate varying needs. Each unshaded block in Figure

represents a particular trigger state. The generalized trigger model

allows an arbitrary number of event- detection states. Note that

there can be two paths into a state and two paths out of a state.

These are called the downward entrance and exit, and the upward

entrance and exit. Upward means moving towards the idle state and

downward means moving towards instrument actions.

An instrument moves between adjacent states, depending on its

internal conditions and the commands that you send. When you first

turn on power to an instrument, it is in the idle state. You can force

the instrument to the idle state using :

The initiate

and event detection trigger states are essentially a list of conditions

that must be satisfied to reach the adjacent states. The sequence

04 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

operation state signals the instrument hardware to take some action,

and listens for a signal that the action has been taken.

Idle

*RST

Initiate

Event

Detection

Event

Detection

I n s t r u m e n t

Actions

Sequence

Operation

Figure

Generalized Trigger Model

Details of Trigger States

These paragraphs use flow charts to explain the decision making rules

inside each trigger state. These rules govern how the instrument

moves between adjacent states. Some of the flow charts reference

commands that have not been discussed yet. These commands

are explained later in this subsection. Keep in mind that this

explanation covers the most general case. Your particular instrument

may not implement all of the commands discussed here.

Inside the Idle State. Figure

illustrates the operation of the idle

state.

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

*RST

Figure

Inside the Idle State

or forces the trigger

Turning power on, or sending

system to the idle state. The trigger system remains in the

idle state until it is initiated by or

ON . Once one of these conditions is satisfied,

the trigger system exits downward to the initiate state. Note that

sets

OFF.

Whenever the trigger system leaves the idle state, it sets the

instrument’s Operation Pending Flag. Returning to idle clears

the flag. The Operation Pending Flag is a special bit inside the

instrument that can affect how the instrument responds to certain

commands. You need to know this fact when using

and other commands.

Inside the Initiate State. Figure

initiate state.

illustrates the operation of the

Figure

Inside the Initiate State

If the trigger system is on a downward path, it travels directly

through the initiate state without restrictions. If the trigger system

is on an upward path, and

is ON, it exits

downward to an event-detection state. If the trigger system is on an

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

upward path and

the idle state.

is OFF, it exits upward to

Inside Event Detection States. Figure 1-38 illustrates the operation

of an arbitrary event detection state named <state-name>. Typical

<state-names

ARM,

, and STOP.

Normal downward execution is controlled by the source command.

SOURce

The : <state-name> : SOURce command specifies which particular

input can generate the event required to continue the downward

path. If the source chosen is a non-analog signal, such as IMMediate,

BUS, or

event. If, however, an

additional qualifications may apply. You specify these additional

qualifications using appropriate and

commands. Sending sets the SOURce to IMMediate.

, no further qualifications are required to generate an

or analog signal is chosen,

The downward path also provides a command to override normal

operation.

IMMediate

The : <state-name> : IMMediate command bypasses event detection,

and

through the event detection state contains only one condition. A

: <state-name> : command sets the number of times the

qualifications one time. The upward path

trigger system must successfully exit that event detection state on a

downward path. If this condition is satisfied, the trigger system exits

upward.

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Inside the Sequence Operation State. Figure

illustrates the

operation of the sequence operation state.

The downward entrance to the Sequence Operation State signals

that some instrument dependent action should begin at once. An

upward exit is not allowed until the instrument signals that its

action is complete. Note that complete can be defined differently for

different instruments. For example, consider an instrument that can

sweep a range of frequencies starting with

action-complete signal can be defined to coincide with the output of

either or

and ending with

The

Figure

Inside the Sequence Operation State

In the previous paragraphs, you learned about the basic building

blocks allowed in a SCPI trigger system. Generally, an instrument

implements only a portion of the trigger features available. These

Common Trigger

Configurations

paragraphs discuss the simplest configurations:

and TRIG.

The

Configuration

configuration is the simplest possible trigger configuration.

The

It uses no event detection states, and requires only two subsystems

for programming, and

implement these two subsystems

All SCPI instruments

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Idle

Initiate

S e q u e n c e

Instrument

Actions

Figure

The

Trigger Configuration

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s P a r a m eter Typ e

st at e

Boolean

Example commands using the

trigger configuration:

abort operations, go to idle

:INIT:IMM

:INIT:CONT ON

execute one sequence operation

execute sequence operations continuously

stop sequence operations after the current one is

complete

CONT OFF

The TRIG Configuration

Instruments using the TRIG configuration include one event

detection state named TRIG, and a corresponding

subsystem. And, all SCPI instruments implement the required

and

subsystems.

l-l 10 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E X T

B U S

IMMED

Initiate

TRIG

Event Detection

BUS

EXT

I n s t r u m e n t

Actions

Sequence

Figure 1-41. The TRIG Trigger Configuration

The HP 8360 series synthesizers follow the SCPI model of triggering.

It is a layered model with the structure shown in Figure

Description of

Triggering in the HP

8360 Series

Synthesizers

Idle State

Sweep Initiated

Waiting for the

Trigger Signal

to be True

Sweep Started

Sweep State

Perform a Sweep

(Frequency, Power,

Stepped, List, or Analog)

Figure

HP 8360 Simplified Trigger Model

The process of sweeping involves all 3 of these states. The IDLE

state is where the sweep begins. The IDLE state is left when

Getting Started Programming

l-l11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the sweep is initiated. This can happen on a continuous basis

: CONT ON) or on a demand basis : CONT OFF). The

functions of continuous and single sweeps are handled by this

command. When the ON command is given, the sweep

is continuously re-initiated. When in the OFF state, the sweep is

initiated with the command.

Once initiated, the wait for trigger state is entered. Here, the trigger

signal selected by the TRIG : command is examined until a

TRUE condition is detected. These trigger signals are:

This signal is always TRUE.

This is the external trigger input jack. A positive

transition on this jack constitutes a TRUE signal.

This signal is the HP-IB <get> (Group Execute

Trigger) message or a command.

BUS

When a TRUE signal is found, the sweep is actually started.

The act of producing the sweep in some cases involves the use

of trigger signals. For example, the stepped and list sweeps

have modes that allow triggering for point-to-point advancement

through the sweep. These trigger signals are selected by individual

TRIG:

commands in the appropriate subsystems (i.e.

LIST:TRIGger:SOURce and SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce). The

definition of these signals in the synthesizer cause the sweep to jump

to the next point when the signal becomes TRUE, therefore the

first point in the list or stepped sweeps is produced immediately

upon starting the sweep. Receiving a trigger signal at the last point

causes the IDLE state to be re-entered. Analog sweeps do not use

the trigger signals during the sweep (although the trigger signals are

needed to start the sweep as described).

The

command resets any sweep in progress and immediately

returns the instrument to the IDLE state.

The and commands indicate a complete operation

at the end of the sweep upon re-entry into the IDLE state.

Advanced Trigger Configurations

Because the SCPI layered trigger model is expandable, many more

complex trigger configurations are possible.

The following paragraphs contain condensed definitions of the

keywords used in the command tables. Many of the commands in

trigger related subsystems are event commands. Remember that

event commands cannot be queried. Similarly, event commands

Trigger Keyword

Definitions

have no related

actions or settings. Event commands cause a

particular action to take place inside the synthesizer.

l-l 12 Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ABORt

The ABORt command forces the trigger system to the idle state. Any

measurement or output sequence in process is aborted as quickly as

possible. ABORt does not alter the settings programmed by other

commands, unlike

cannot be queried.

ABORt is a root level event command and

IMMediate

The IMMediate command provides a one-time override of the normal

downward path in an event-detection state. The instrument must be

in the specified event detection state when IMMediate is received, or

an error is generated and the command has no effect. For example,

the instrument must be in the TRIG state for

: IMMediate

to work properly. If the instrument is in the idle state, the command

has no effect, and an error would be generated. IMMediate is an

event command and cannot be queried.

The

settling and the time the trigger out signal is sent. Specifying

suffix) instructs the synthesizer to

set the specified time as the delay necessary to ensure proper settling.

command specifies the time between the source

:TRIGger:ODELay

Sending

zero.

sets

to an instrument dependent value, usually

SOURce

The SOURce command selects the trigger source for an

event-detection state. Only one source can be specified at a time,

and all others are ignored. Sending

sets SOURce to IMMediate.

The most commonly used sources are:

BUS

The event detector is satisfied by either Group Execute

or a command. <GET> is a low level

HP-IB message that can be sent using the TRIGGER command in

HP BASIC.

An external signal connector is selected as the source.

IMMediate

Qualified events are generated automatically. There is no waiting

for a qualified event.

l-l 13

Getting Started Programming

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

See Also

Connectors, HP-IB Menu

“Getting Started Programming,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Adrs Menu

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

accesses the HP-IB address menu.

Controls the system power meter address.

M eter Adrs

Can control the synthesizer’s address, depending

on the setting of the rear panel HP-IB switch.

8360 Adrs

Controls the system printer address.

Printer Adrs

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference A-l

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SCPI: NONE, see the individual

Analyzer: NONE

listed.

Programming Codes

See Also

Menu,

listed above.

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Address Selection” in Chapter 3, INSTALLATION.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

accesses the automatic level control (ALC) functions.

Accesses the ALC bandwidth menu.

ALC

Specifies the coupling factor of an

external coupling device and causes

the display to indicate the power at

the coupler main output.

Coupling Factor

Disables the ALC leveling circuits.

Relative power level is controlled

by means of the level DAC and

attenuator. Power is not sensed at

any point, and absolute power level is

uncalibrated.

Leveling Mode ALCoff

Leveling Mode Normal

Leveling Mode Search

Sets the synthesizer to continuous

leveling at the specified leveling point.

The synthesizer activates power search

leveling mode. Similar to ALCoff

mode, but first automatically searches

for the correct modulator setting

so that the desired power level is

produced.

Sets the synthesizer to level power

externally. A negative detector output

must be connected to the EXT ALC

input.

Leveling Point

Sets the synthesizer to level power

internally.

Leveling Point Internal

Leveling Point Module

Sets the synthesizer to level power

at the output of a millimeter-wave

module. Either an HP

series millimeter-wave source

module must be connected to the

SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE.

Leveling Point

Sets the synthesizer to level power at

an external power meter. A power

meter’s recorder output must be

connected to the EXT ALC input.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifies the operating range of an

external power meter used in an

external leveling setup. This causes

the synthesizer display to agree with

the power meter’s power indication.

Par

Range

The following paragraphs explain the power control (leveling)

function of the synthesizer in detail.

ALC SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The ALC system, referred to as a system because it encompasses

more than one functional area, is shown as a simplified block diagram

in Figure A-l. The purpose of this system is to control the amplitude

or power level of the RF energy generated by the synthesizer. It is a

feedback control system, in which the output power is measured and

compared to the desired power level. If the output power does not

equal the desired power level the ALC system changes the output

until they are equal.

Desired power level can be set by either front panel or remote

operation. As shown in Figure A-l, the inputs and calibration data

are processed by the synthesizer CPU, which uses this information to

set the Level DAC.

In turn, the Level DAC sends a controlling voltage to the Level

Control Circuits. In the presence of modulation, voltages appearing

at the AM and/or PULSE inputs contribute to the control of the

Level Control Circuits.

In synthesizers with optional step attenuators, the power level at the

output connector can be reduced by a maximum of 90

in 10

steps. This is in addition to the control capabilities provided by the

Level Control Circuits.

A Feedback Signal to the Level Control Circuits can be provided by

either internal or external detectors. This signal is the comparison

voltage necessary for accurate, stable, power level settings and good

source match at various Leveling Points. Alternatively, the power

level can be set without using feedback. In this mode however, power

level is uncalibrated and is subject to drift with temperature.

The following paragraphs describe the operation of the different

leveling modes and leveling points.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Two terms are used in the following discussions: power output and

ALC level. Power output means actual output power including the

effects of the attenuator. ALC level means power levels before the

attenuator. In synthesizers without attenuators, these two terms are

equivalent.

Note

Internal Leveling Leveling Mode

Leveling Point

In this configuration (Figure A-l), power is sensed by a detector

internal to the synthesizer and a dc output from this detector is fed

back to the Level Control Circuits.

The ALC level is limited at the low end by the Level Control Circuits

and at the high end by maximum available power. Noise and

drift limit the range at the low end to -20

or greater. The

combination of RF frequency and RF components (different models

of synthesizer have different RF components) limit the ALC range

available at the high end. The internal instructions (firmware) of

the synthesizer limit the ALC level range available for request from

-20 to

If the power level requested is higher than the

synthesizer is capable of producing, the maximum available power is

produced, and the message line displays UNLVLED (unleveled). When

the synthesizer performs frequency sweeps at certain ALC levels,

maximum available power can be exceeded during small portions of

the sweep; in this case, a flashing UNLVLED message appears.

ALC leveling accuracy depends on power level. Although the ALC

level is

-10 to

from -20 to

it is most accurate from

This fact is reflected in the performance

specifications of the synthesizer.

Since many applications require power output

Coupled Operation.

less than -20

0 to 90

to -110

an optional step attenuator has a range of

steps. With this option, power output down

is achieved when the Step Attenuator and Level

in 10

Control Circuits work in conjunction (see Figure A-l). With the

attenuator, the ALC level is normally used over the smaller, more

accurate portion of its range. Since ALC level accuracy suffers below

-10

and at some frequencies only $1

of RF output is

For power

available, the ALC level is set between -10 and 0

less than -100

the attenuator is set to 90

and the ALC

level is used from -10 to -20

At frequencies where power

and the

(or whatever power is available

output above 0

is desired, the attenuator is set to 0

ALC level is used from 0 to

at the RF frequency in use).

Coupled operation is assumed by the synthesizer unless

or Leveling Mode

is selected. The proper

combination of ALC level’and attenuator setting is decided by the

firmware. In coupled operation, when desired power output is set via

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(POWER LEVEL), the ALC level and attenuator are set automatically to

provide the most accuracy for the power requested.

Uncoupled Operation.

In some applications it is advantageous to

control the ALC level and attenuator separately, using combinations

of settings that are not available in coupled operation. In uncoupled

mode

when the desired power output is set via

(POWER LEVEL), only the ALC level is changed. The attenuator setting

is changed via Set:

One use of uncoupled operation is power sweep, where the output

power linearly tracks the sweep voltage ramp. The synthesizer can

generate power sweeps of up to 40

power at the start of the sweep is set via (POWER LEVEL) (coupled

operation) or by a combination of and Set

depending on frequency. The

POWER LEVEL

(uncoupled operation). The sweep range is entered by selecting

Power Sweep. If the sweep range entered exceeds the ALC range

(stop power greater than maximum available power), the UNLVLED

warning message appears at the end of sweep. No warning is given at

the time of entry. If the start power is entered when the synthesizer

is in coupled operation, the ALC level is set no lower than -10

limiting the available power sweep range. Using uncoupled operation

and setting the ALC level to -20

sweep range.

gives an additional 10

External Leveling

Leveling Mode Normal ,

or o r Module

Leveling Point

In externally leveled operations, the output power from the

synthesizer is detected by an external sensor. The output of this

detector is returned to the leveling circuits, and the output power is

automatically adjusted to keep the power constant at the point of

detection. Figure

shows a basic external leveling arrangement.

The output of the detected arm of the splitter or coupler is held

constant. If the splitter response is flat, the output of the other

arm is also constant. This arrangement offers superior flatness over

internal leveling, especially if long cables are involved. Flatness

may be improved with user flatness correction ((FLTNESS ON/OFF),

Menu applied at the external leveling point.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DETECTOR

Figure

ALC Disabled

Typical External Leveling Hookup

Leveling Mode

, Leveling Mode Search

ALC Off. In this configuration, the ALC is disabled, power is

not sensed at any point, and therefore the absolute power level is

uncalibrated (see Figure A-l). Direct and separate control of the

RF modulator (p/o RF Components) and the attenuator is possible.

The synthesizer’s front panel indicates the attenuator setting and

a reference level. The reference level is an approximate indication

of the attenuation provided by the RF modulator . Typically the

RF amplifier that follows the modulator is saturated for modulation

levels near 0

Therefore the actual change in the RF output power

will not track the indicated reference level until the amplifier is out of

saturation.

The ALC off mode is useful for applications that involve pulse

modulation with extremely narrow pulses. If the pulse is narrow

enough, the ALC may be unable to provide accurate leveling due to

bandwidth limitations.

Search.

Search mode is similar to the ALC off mode in that,

the ALC is disabled in order to remove bandwidth limitations.

The essential difference is that, when search mode is enabled, the

synthesizer searches out the appropriate modulator level such that

the RF output power after the ALC is disabled closely matches the

power prior to search mode being enabled. Specifically, when search

mode is selected the synthesizer follows this sequence of steps:

1. All modulation is disabled and the ALC system is closed to

provide a calibrated reference power.

2. The output power is measured using the internal coupler/detector.

3. The ALC system is disabled (opened).

4. While monitoring the internal detector, the RF modulator level

is varied until the detected power is equivalent to the reference

power measured in step 2.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Modulation is re-enabled if appropriate.

These steps are performed in approximately 200

any time power or frequency is changed.

and are repeated

listed above,

(MOD), (POWER LEVEL),

See Also

S e t

“Externally Leveling the Synthesizer”, “Working with Mixers”, and

“Working with Spectrum Analyzers,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALC Bandwidth

Select

ALC

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

sets the synthesizer to choose the ALC bandwidth

automatically depending on the current sweep and modulation

conditions. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this

feature is active.

SCPI: POWer:ALC:BANDwidth:AUTO

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

ALC

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

ALC Bandwidth

Select High

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(100

sets the synthesizer to the ALC high bandwidth position

In this mode, the ALC bandwidth operates in a wide

Description

bandwidth for all sweep and modulation conditions. An asterisk next

to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: Sending the synthesizer an ALC bandwidth frequency value of

Programming Codes

causes it to select the high ALC bandwidth mode.

POWer:ALC:BANDwidth:AUTO

POWer:ALC:BANDwidth

suffix] or

Analyzer: NONE

ALC

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALC Bandwidth

Select Low

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(10

sets the synthesizer to the ALC low bandwidth position

In this mode, the ALC bandwidth operates in a narrow

bandwidth for all sweep and modulation conditions. An asterisk next

to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: Sending the synthesizer an ALC bandwidth frequency value of

Programming Codes

causes it to select the low ALC bandwidth mode.

POWer:ALC:BANDwidth:AUTO

POWer:ALC:BANDwidth

suffix] or

Analyzer: NONE

See Also

ALC BW Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

ALC Menu

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

reveals the

of the ALC bandwidth select menu.

Sets the ALC bandwidth to be

automatically chosen by the

synthesizer, depending on the

current sweep and modulation

conditions.

ALC Bandwidth Select Auto

Sets the ALC bandwidth to the

high bandwidth position (100

and to remain there for all sweep

and modulation conditions.

ALC Bandwidth Select High

ALC Bandwidth Select Low

Sets the ALC bandwidth to the low

bandwidth position (10

and

A-l 1

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALC

to remain there for all sweep and

modulation conditions.

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

SYSTEM

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

causes the synthesizer to alternate on successive sweeps

between the present instrument state and a second instrument state

stored in an internal register (1 to 8). Select Altrnate Regs once to

turn it on, a second time to turn it off. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

SYSTem:ALTernate:STATe

SYSTem:ALTernate

Analyzer:

where

1 through 8 function on,

function off

See Also

[RECALL),

“Saving and Recalling an Instrument State” in Chapter 1.

AM BW Cal Always

USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

This

causes an AM bandwidth calibration to be performed

Description

every time a frequency or power parameter is changed.

SCPI: CALibration:AM:AUTO ON

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Modulation

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AM Cal Once

USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

performed.

causes a single AM bandwidth calibration to be

SCPI: CALibration:AM:[EXECute]

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Modulation

AM Cal Menu

Group

USER CAL

Menu Map

Description

This

accesses the AM bandwidth calibration menu.

Causes an AM bandwidth calibration

to be performed every time a

frequency or power parameter is

changed.

AM BW Cal Always

Causes a single AM bandwidth

calibration to be performed.

AM BW Cal Once

listed above.

See Also

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AM Menu

Function Group (MOD)

Menu Map

Description

This

softkeys. These

(Option 002 only) accesses the amplitude modulation

engage external and internal amplitude

modulation. They allow you to define the scaling, waveform, rate,

and depth of the internal AM.

Toggles on and off the amplitude modulation mode

for an external AM source.

Toggles on and off the amplitude modulation mode

using the internal AM generator.

AM On/Off

Internal AM Rate

Sets the rate of the internal amplitude modulation.

AM Depth

Sets the depth of the internal amplitude

modulation.

AM Type

Deep AM

Sets the scale to linear at 100% per volt.

Sets the scale to exponential at 10

per volt.

Opens the ALC loop when the detected signal

level power is below the detector’s sensing range.

Displays the waveforms for internal amplitude

modulation.

SCPI: NONE, see the individual

Analyzer: NONE

listed.

Programming Codes

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AM On/Off

MOD (MODULATION)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates the exponentially-scaled amplitude modulation

function. Amplitude modulation lets the RF output of the

synthesizer be continuously and exponentially varied at a rate

determined by the AM input. See “Specifications” for the AM

characteristics, input range, and damage level. An asterisk next to

the key label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

AM:TYPE

AM[:STATE]

Analyzer: NONE

CONNECTORS,

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

See Also

AM On/Off

MOD (MODULATION)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates the linearly scaled amplitude modulation

function. The amplitude of the RF output changes linearly as a

function of AM input changes. See “Specifications” for the AM

characteristics, input range, and damage level. An asterisk next to

the key label indicates that this feature is active.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming Codes

AM:TYPE

AM[:STATE]

Analyzer:

function on,

function off

CONNECTORS, (MOD)

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

AM On/Off

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) activates the amplitude modulation

mode for an external source. The AM source is connected to the AM

modulation connector.

When external AM is in effect, the RF output is amplitude

modulated with a rate and depth set by the external source.

Amplitude scaling is controlled by the following softkeys:

AM Type

An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that external AM is active and

message line.

is displayed on the

Programming Codes

AM:SOURce

AM:STATe ON/OFF

Analyzer:

function on,

function off

(MOD), also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Markers

AM On/Off

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) activates the internal amplitude

modulation mode. No external source is needed.

When internal AM is in effect, the parameters are controlled by

the following softkeys: Internal AM Rate Internal AM Depth

AM Type

Deep AM Waveform Menu.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that internal AM is active

and is displayed on the message line. Both amplitude and pulse

modulation can be in effect simultaneously.

Programming Codes

AM:SOURce

AM:STATe ON/OFF

Analyzer: NONE

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

See Also

Markers

MARKER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

Active markers are normally displayed as intensified dots on a

CRT display. With

Markers selected, active markers are

displayed as amplitude spikes (an abrupt discontinuity in the sweep

trace). The marker amplitude can be varied. The synthesizer

XXXX Where XXXX

displays:

AMPLITUDE MARKER SIZE:

represents an amplitude value. Use the rotary knob, the step keys,

or the numerical entry keys with the dB(m) terminator key to

set the desired value. If a small change is required, the left and

right arrow keys can be used to underline the digit to be changed.

Select

Markers again to return to the normal intensified dot

representation. See “Specifications” for the range of acceptable

A- 17

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Markers

amplitude values. An asterisk next to the key label indicates this

feature is active.

SCPI: MARKer:AOFF

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer:

function on,

function off.

“Marker Operation” in Chapter 1.

“Setting Up A Typical Sweep, Example Program 2” in Chapter 1.

AM Type 10

MOD (MODULATION)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) scales the amplitude modulation

exponentially. Amplitude modulation lets the RF output of the

synthesizer be continuously and exponentially varied at a rate

determined by the AM input or at a rate set by

AM. See “Specifications” for the AM characteristics, input range, and

damage level. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this

feature is active.

for internal

Programming Codes

See Also

AM:TYPE

Analyzer: NONE

CONNECTORS,

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER

AM Type

MOD (MODULATION)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) scales the amplitude modulation

function linearly. The amplitude of the RF output changes linearly

as a function of AM input changes (or at a rate set by

for

internal AM).

ee “Specifications” for the AM characteristics, input

range, and damage level. An asterisk next to the key label indicates

that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

See Also

AM:TYPE

Analyzer:

CONNECTORS,

function off

function on,

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

ANALYZER STATUS

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

The following is the status register structure of the synthesizer when

the analyzer programming language is selected. This status structure

is the structurally and syntactically the same as on the HP

Description

Output Status bytes, is used to read the two

bytes from the synthesizer. The first status byte concerns

Request), while the second

status

the cause of an SRQ (S

status byte concerns failures and faults, as follows:

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER

S T AT U S B YT E

B i t

Decim a l

Va lu e

128

SRQ on

Nu m e r ic

En tr y

SRQ on

S R Q o n n e w R E Q U E S T

SRQ on

En d of

SRQ on

Ch a n ged in

Exten d ed

st a t u s

F u n ct ion

RF Settled

An y F r on t

P a n el Key

P r essed

SE R VICE

H P -IB or

fr eq u en cies

or sw eep

t im e in

syn t a x er r or . Sw eep

Com p leted

(H P -IB or

F r on t

Byt e

effect .

P a n el)

E XT E N D E D S T AT U S B YT E

B i t

Decim a l

Va lu e

128

Ove r

Self Test

F a iled

RF Un lock ed Exter n a l

F r e q u e n cy

Oven

Cold

R F Un leveled P ow er

F a ilu r e

F u n ct ion

F a u lt

Mod u la tion

In d ica t or

R efer en ce

Select ed

Status Byte 1

Bit 0: SRQ caused by a key closure on the front panel of the

synthesizer (use the OM code to determine the front panel status).

Bit 1: SRQ caused by the completion of a numeric entry (use the OA

code to determine the value of the numerical entry).

Bit 2: SRQ caused by a change in the extended status byte (status

byte 2) affected by the RE-coded mask (see the RE code for an

explanation of this masking).

Bit 3: SRQ caused by the completion of phase locking and the

settling of the RF source (use the OK code to determine the last lock

frequency).

Bit 4: SRQ on end-of-sweep or mid-sweep update in NA (network

analyzer code) mode.

Bit 5: SRQ caused by HP-IB syntax error.

Bit 6: SERVICE REQUEST; by

convention, the

instrument needs service from the controller when this bit is set true.

Bit 7: SRQ caused by a change in the coupled parameters (start

frequency, center frequency, and sweep time). Use the OC code to

determine the new values of the coupled parameters.

Status Byte 2 (Extended Status Byte)

Bit 0: Self test failed at power on or at Instrument Preset. This bit

remains latched until this status byte has been read, or until cleared

by the CS or CLEAR 719 commands.

Bit 1: Excessive amplitude modulation input.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Arrow Keys

Bit 2: Oven for the reference crystal oscillator is not at operating

temperature.

Bit 3: External reference frequency is selected.

Bit 4: RF is unlocked (UNLOCK appears in the message line). Use

OF to determine the source of the unlocked output. This bit remains

latched until this status byte has been read, or until cleared by the

CS or CLEAR 719 commands.

Bit 5: ac line power interruption has occurred since the last

Instrument Preset. This bit also remains latched until read or

cleared.

Bit 6: RF is unleveled (use OR to determine present power level).

This bit also remains latched until read or cleared.

Bit 7: FAULT message is displayed. Use OF to determine the cause

of the fault.

SCPI STATUS REGISTER

The “INSTALLATION” chapter.

See Also

Arrow Keys

ENTRY

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

This group of entry keys lets you manipulate numerical values in the

active entry line.

Description

and

arrow keys identify (by underlining) the digit to be

changed. For example, if CW frequency is in the active entry line,

and the display indicates:

cw:

you may wish to change the 5 to a 6. Press the

10005.000000 MHz

five times until

the underline is under the 5. Now use the rotary knob or the

to change the 5 to a 6. The underlined digit remains the active

character in this function until the synthesizer is preset, turned off, or

the underline is moved completely left or right.

The

and

arrow keys increment or decrement the numeric

value by a predetermined amount. The increment value depends

on the active function and the step value set. All increment values

are defaulted to their original values when the synthesizer is preset

(unless Preset Mode User has defined the default differently).

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Arrow Keys

SCPI: No specific command is available, but the key can be

addressed, see SCPI Key Numbers.

Analyzer: NONE

Programming

Codes

Menu, List Menu

See Also

“Entry Area” and “Creating and Applying the User Flatness

Correction Array” in Chapter 1.

USER DEFINED

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you select any

and assign its function to

Description

1 of 12 user defined keys in the [USER DEFINED) Menu. The following

message appears on the synthesizer display:

be assigned. Complete are assigned not just the key label.

Press MENU KEY to

For example, assigning List Menu to the user defined menu, copies

the complete structure (keypath) of that key. All of the pages and

lower level menus are placed within the user defined menu.

SCPI: SYSTem:KEY:ASSign <n>,<n>

Programming Codes

See Also

The first <n> in the above command, corresponds to the key number

to be assigned, while the second <n> corresponds to the user menu

key where it is to be placed in the user menu.

Analyzer: NONE

SCPI Key Numbers, USER DEFINED

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Fill

FREQUENCY, POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

is used in two locations:

Menu and

List Menu.

Flatness Menu When selected, the synthesizer waits for a frequency

increment value to be entered. Increment:

is displayed in

the active entry area. A list of frequencies is created automatically,

beginning at the auto fill start frequency and always ending with the

auto fill stop frequency. The synthesizer uses the increment value on

all points, but if the stop frequency requires a different increment to

be used to be exact, the synthesizer simply ends the frequency list at

the stop frequency disregarding the increment value.

If the increment value requested creates a list that exceeds the

number of elements available, the following message appears:

TOO MANY CORRECTION PTS REQUESTED

List Menu When selected, the synthesizer waits for a frequency

increment value to be entered.

Increment:

is displayed in

the active entry area. A list of frequencies is created automatically,

with all points separated by the frequency increment value. The list

begins at the auto fill start frequency and ends at a frequency less

than or equal to the auto fill stop frequency.

If the increment value requested creates a list that exceeds the

number of points available

the following message appears:

TOO MANY LIST PTS REQUESTED

Fltness Menu or List Menu

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer: NONE

Fltness Menu, List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Fill

FREQUENCY, POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

is used in two locations:

Menu and

List Menu.

Flatness Menu When selected, the synthesizer waits for a numeric

value representing the number of correction points to be entered.

Number of Correction Points: is displayed in the active entry area.

A list of frequencies containing the number of specified points is

created automatically. The list begins at the auto fill start frequency

and ends at the auto fill stop frequency. The rest of the points are

equally spaced between them. A minimum of two points must be

entered.

If the number of points requested creates a list that exceeds the

number of elements available

the following message appears:

TOO MANY CORRECTION PTS

List Menu When selected, the synthesizer waits for a numeric value

representing the number of list points to be entered. Number

of List Frequencies: is displayed in the active entry area. A list

of frequencies containing the number of specified points is created

automatically. The list begins at the auto fill start frequency and

ends at the auto fill stop frequency. The rest of the points are equally

spaced between them. A minimum of two points must be entered.

If the number of points requested creates a list that exceeds the

number of points available

the following message appears:

Error. . .too many list points requested.

Points used: 0

Points available: 801

SCPI: NONE, see Fltness

Analyzer: NONE

or List Menu

Programming Codes

See Also

Menu, List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Fill Stop

Auto Fill Start

Function Group

FREQUENCY, POWER

Menu Map

Description

This

List Menu. The operation is the same in both applications.

This enables the entry of a start frequency used to determine

is used in two locations: Fltness Menu and

the beginning frequency of the automatic filling array. The array

is not created until either the increment value or the number of

points is assigned. The auto fill start frequency does not affect the

synthesizer start frequency. When Auto Fill Start is selected, the

active entry area indicates:

Fill Start: XXXXXXXXX MHz

where X represents a numeric value. Unless a previous entry was

made, the display indicates the synthesizer minimum frequency.

SCPI: NONE, see Fltness Menu or List Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fltness Menu, List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Auto Fill Stop

Function Group

Menu Map

FREQUENCY, POWER

This

List Menu. The operation is the same in both applications.

This enables the entry of a stop frequency used to determine

is used in two locations: Fltness Menu and

Description

the ending frequency of the automatic filling array. The array is not

created until either the increment value or the number of points is

assigned. The auto fill stop frequency does not affect the synthesizer

stop frequency. When Auto Fill Stop is selected, the active entry

area indicates:

Fill Stop: XXXXXXXXX MHz

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fill Stop

where X represents a numeric value. Unless a previous entry was

made, the display indicates the synthesizer maximum frequency.

SCPI: NONE,see Fltaess Menu or List Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fltness Menu, List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Auto Track

POWER, USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

filter to the oscillator. Use it to maximize RF power output. The

synthesizer displays: Peaking At: XXXXX

optimizes the tracking of the synthesizer’s output

represents frequency values. Peaking begins at the low frequency

end and steps through to the high end of the frequency range. Auto

Track is complete when the display returns to its original state. On

synthesizers without a step attenuator provide a good source match

on the RF connector. Use a power sensor or a 10

attenuator. If

a good source match is not provided, the synthesizer can

because of excessive reflections at the output.

SCPI: CALibration:TRACk

Analyzer: SHRP

Programming Codes

See Also

Tracking Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Blank Disp

Function Group

SYSTEM

When this

Menu Map

Description

is selected, it causes the top four lines of the

key is pressed.

display to blank and remain blank until the

Blanking the display prevents sensitive information from being

displayed. As an added benefit, remote execution time is reduced

because the display does not require refreshing. This key does not

disable any other key functions. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates this function is active.

SCPI: DISPlay[:STATe]

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer:

disables the display,

re-enables the display

Security

Operating and Programming Reference B-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FREQUENCY

Function Group

NONE

This

Menu Map

Description

lets you select the center frequency for center

frequency/frequency span swept operation. When you press

the synthesizer displays:

CENTER:

XXXXX MHz. Where XXXXX

represents a frequency value. Use the entry area to set the desired

value.

Certain center frequency and frequency span combinations cause the

synthesizer to limit the value entered. In general, any combination

that would cause the synthesizer to exceed its minimum or maximum

specified frequency will be limited.

Programming Codes

FREQuency:CENTer

FREQuency:MODE

suffix] or

Analyzer: CF

(SPAN),

See Also

“Center Frequency/Span Operation” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference C-l

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MARKER

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

sets the center frequency of the sweep to the frequency

of the most recently activated marker. Select any marker Ml . . .

then select to change the center frequency of

the sweep to that of the marker. The frequency span does not change

unless the new sweep limits fall outside the frequency range of the

synthesizer, in that case the synthesizer automatically scales the

frequency span to be within the synthesizer’s operating frequency

range.

Programming Codes

FREQuency:CENTer

from above> [freq suffix]

Analyzer: MC

See Also

“Marker Operation” in Chapter 1.

Clear Fault

SERVICE

Function Group

Menu Map

This

clears all the latched fault status indicators.

Description

SCPI: DIAGnostics:OUTPut:FAULts

The above command relays the fault information and clears all faults.

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

Fau lt Menu

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clear

Clear Memory

Function Group

SYSTEM

This

Menu Map

Description

causes the synthesizer to return to the factory preset

instrument state, after writing alternating ones and zeroes over all

state information, frequency lists, and save/recall registers a selected

number of times. When you select Clear Memory , the synthesizer

displays the following in the active entry area:

# OF TIMES TO CLEAR MEMORY: X

Enter the number of times the state information should be

overwritten. While the synthesizer is working to overwrite the state

information, it flashes the count on the display.

This

causes the synthesizer to recall the original calibration

data stored in permanent memory (EEROM) all list and user ALC

correction data will be lost.

Programming Codes

SYSTem:SECurity:COUNt <n>

SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] ON

SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] OFF

The transition from on to off triggers the blanking. Sending the “off’

message by itself will do nothing.

Analyzer:

SHKZOHZ

Security Menu

“Using the Security Features” in Chapter 1.

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clear Point

Function Group

POWER

This

Menu Map

Description

lets you change the correction value for the active

frequency point to the “Undefined” state.

SCPI: NONE, see Fltness Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

CONNECTORS

AM /FM O UTPUT (Opt

ion 002 only) Outputs the

generated AM or FM waveform. This output can drive

greater. The AM output is scaled the same as it is generated, either

or 10 The FM scaling depends on the FM deviation

BNC Connectors

chosen. The following table shows the scale versus deviation.

AM INPUT There are two AM operation modes: linear and log.

When the synthesizer is in linear AM mode, the input accepts a

-1 to

signal. With an AM input of OV, the RF output level

(the reference level) is unaffected; at -lV input, the RF is shut off,

and with a

input, the RF output is 100% (3

higher that the

reference level. Therefore, there must be

of margin between

the reference power level and the maximum available at a given

frequency. The on (OV input) to off input) ratio is a function

of power level and frequency, but is always greater than 20

The amplitude of the RF output changes linearly as the AM input

changes.

When the synthesizer is in log AM mode, the input accepts a wider

range of input signal. For every -lV input, the RF output level

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

decreases by 10

For every

increases by 10

So the

dynamic range of positive to negative power levels is dependent on

the synthesizer power level setting.

The input impedance for this input connector is factory set at

but can be switched to 2

Refer to “Adjustments” in

the Calibration manual. See “Specifications” for the electrical

requirements of the AM input. Damage levels for this input are

AUX OUTPUT provides a reference signal from 2 to 26.5

at a

typical minimum power level of -10

is 50

Nominal input impedance

EXT ALC allows the synthesizer to be externally leveled. This input

is used for power meter leveling or negative crystal detector leveling.

Input impedance in crystal or meter leveling modes is nominally 1

MR. See “Specifications” for the signal requirements. Nominal input

impedance is 100

FM IN PUT accepts a -8 to

signal when on the 1 MHz/V

sensitivity, or a -1 to

signal when on the 10 MHz/V sensitivity.

Any signal greater than these limits will cause distortion. The

deviation changes linearly as the FM input changes from 0 to its

upper or lower voltage limit. The input impedance for this input

connector is factory set at

to “Adjustments” in the Calibration manual. Damage level for this

input is or

but can be switched to 60052. Refer

PULSE INPUT is TTL compatible. A TTL high input

causes a maximum selected RF power output, while a TTL low input

causes minimum RF output

input impedance is 50

RF on/off ratio). Nominal

When using internal pulse generator, a

TTL-level pulse sync signal preceding the RF pulse by nominally

70 ns is produced at this connector. The electrical requirements of

the PULSE INPUT are detailed in “Specifications”. The damage

levels for this input are

PULSE SYNC OUT (Option 002 only) Outputs a 50 ns wide TTL

pulse synchronized to the leading edge of the internally-generated

pulse.

PULSE VIDEO OUT (Option 002 only). Outputs the pulse

modulation waveform that is supplied to the modulator. This can be

either the internally- or externally-generated pulse modulation.

SWEEP OUTPUT provides a voltage range of 0 to

the synthesizer is sweeping, the SWEEP OUTPUT is OV at the

beginning of the sweep and at the end of the sweep regardless

of the sweep width. In CW mode, the SWEEP OUTPUT ranges

from 0 V at the synthesizer minimum frequency to V at the

V. When

specified maximum frequency, with a proportional voltage for

frequencies between the specified minimum and maximum. When the

synthesizer is in manual sweep operation the sweep output voltage is

a percentage of the span. Minimum load impedance is 3

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONNECTORS

STOP SWEEP IN/OUT stops a sweep when this input is pulled

low. Retrace does not occur, and the sweep resumes when this input

is pulled high. The open circuit voltage is TTL high and is internally

pulled low when the synthesizer stops its sweep. Externally forcing

this input high will not cause damage or disrupt normal operation.

10 MHz REF INPUT accepts a 10 MHz

Hz, 0 to

reference signal for operation referenced to an external time base.

Nominal input impedance is 50

10 MHz REF OUTPUT provides a 0

from the internal frequency standard of the synthesizer. This input

is a connector that can be used as the master clock reference

10 MHz signal derived

output for a network of instruments.

TRIGGER INPUT activated on a TTL rising edge. Used to

externally initiate an analog sweep or to advance to the next point of

a step list or a frequency list.

TRIGGER OUTPUT Produces a 1

wide TTL-level pulse at 1601

points evenly spaced across an analog sweep, or at each point in a

step list or a frequency list.

supplies a voltage that is proportional to the RF

output frequency, with a ratio of 0.5 volt output for every 1

RF frequency (factory setting). This ratio is switchable to either

0.25 or 1 volt. The switch is located on the

SYTM assembly, see

Adjustments in the Service Guide for information.

Z-AXIS

(approximately

supplies a positive rectangular pulse

into 2 during the retrace and switch points

when the synthesizer is sweeping. This output also supplies a

pulse when the RF output is coincident with a marker frequency.

AUXILIARY INTERFACE connector provides control signals to the

Multi-pin Connectors

S-parameter test set switch doubler. This connector is a

D-subminiature receptacle located on the rear panel. It is also

used for dual synthesizer measurement systems (two-tone systems),

refer to Step Control Master for more information.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUXILIARY INTERFACE

CABLE

Figure C-l. Auxiliary Interface Connector

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-l. Pin Description of the Auxiliary Interface

Signal

Level

Function

P i n #

No Connection

out

Z-Axis Blanking/Markers

Spare

TTL

Spare

TTL

Low Stop Sweep

out

No Connection

Divider-Sync

External Trigger

Spare

T’TL

out

o u t

Spare

Low Retrace

No Connection

Low Marker

Low Qualified Stop Sweep

are

o u t

Spare

0 to

ram

Sweep Output

Ground

Low Blank Request

Spare

No Connection

Spare

o u t TTL

Low Source Settled

No Connection

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONNECTORS

HP-IB connector allows the synthesizer to be connected to any other

instrument or device on the interface bus. All HP-IB instruments

can be connected with HP-IB cables and adapters. These cables are

shown in the accompanying illustration. The adapters are principally

extension devices for instruments that have recessed or crowded

HP-IB connectors.

. .

LEO

. .

2 8

Figure

HP-IB Connector and Cable

HP-IB Interface Cables Available

HP-IB Cable

Lengths

Part Numbers

lm (3.3 ft)

(6.6 ft)

(13.2 ft)

0.5 m (1.6 ft)

As many as 14 HP-IB instruments can be connected to the

synthesizer (15 total instruments in the system). The cables can be

interconnected in a “star” pattern (one central instrument, with

the HP-IB cables emanating from that instrument like spokes on

a wheel), or in a linear pattern (like boxcars on a train), or any

combination pattern. There are certain restrictions:

Each instrument must have a unique HP-IB address, ranging from

0 to 30 (decimal). Refer to 8360

the synthesizer’s HP-IB address.

for information on setting

In a two-instrument system that uses just one HP-IB cable, the

cable length must not exceed 4 meters (13 ft).

When more than two instruments are connected on the bus, the

cable length to each instrument must not exceed 2 meters (6.5 ft)

per unit.

The total cable length between all units must not exceed 20 meters

(65 ft).

Hewlett-Packard manufactures HP-IB extender instruments

(HP models

that overcome the range limitations

imposed by the cabling rules. These extenders allow twin-pair cable

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONNECTORS

and telephone modem operation over

operation up 1 km (3,280 ft),

any distance. HP Sales and Service offices can provide additional

information on the HP-IB extenders.

The codes next to the HP-IB connector, illustrated in Figure

describe the HP-IB electrical capabilities of the synthesizer, using

IEEE Std. 488-1978 mnemonics (HP-IB, GP-IB,

are all electrically equivalent). Briefly, the mnemonics

translate as follows:

and

Source Handshake, complete capability.

Acceptor Handshake, complete capability.

Talker; capable of basic talker, serial poll, and

unaddress if MLA.

Talker, Extended address; no capability.

TEO

LE O

Listener, capable of basic listener, and unaddress if

MTA.

Listener, Extended address; no capability.

Service Request, complete capability.

Remote Local, complete capability.

Parallel Poll, no capability.

Device Clear, complete capability.

Device Trigger, complete capability.

CO, 1, 2, 3, 28 Controller capability options; CO, no capabilities;

Cl, system controller;

send REN;

send IFC and take charge

send I. F. messages.

Electrical specification indicating open collector

outputs.

E l

These codes are described completely in the IEEE Std

document, published by The Institute of Electrical and Electronic

345 East

Street, New York, New York 11017.

Engineers, Inc.,

SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE sends and receives digital and

analog signals to and from an HP millimeter-wave

source module. With the source module connected, the synthesizer

assumes the characteristics of the source module. Refer to

Leveling Point Modu le for more information.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONNECTORS

M O O

MOO Cl

C N T L

MOD CO

MO D

MOD SENSE

MOD

MOO

DIG

(COAX)

Figure

Interface Signals of the Source Module Connector

The codes indicated on the illustration above translate as follows:

Source module data line zero. Signals MOD DO

through MOD are the mm source module

MOD DO

data bus lines (bi-directional).

Data line one.

MOD

Data line two.

MOD

Data line three.

MOD

Source module control line zero. Signals MOD

CO and MOD Cl are the control lines for the

read/write to and from the mm source module.

MOD CO

MOD Cl

Control line one.

Source module clamp control (not used).

CLAMP CNTL

MOD SENSE

Source module sense. A

current is injected

on this line by the mm source module to

indicate its presence. This signal always equals

ov.

Low

RF off. Source module RF is turned off.

L MOD RF OFF

EXT LVL RET

EXT LVL

Source module external leveling return.

Source module external leveling input, from the

mm source module.

Internal

to the mm source module.

Power supply. Range is -14.25 to

Power supply. Range is

Digital ground.

DIG GND

MOD ANLG GND

ANLG GND RET

Source module analog ground.

Analog ground return.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference C-l 1

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONNECTORS

The synthesizer is equipped with a precision 3.5 mm male

RF Output Connector

connector (2.4 mm male connector on 40

models). The output

impedance, SWR and other electrical characteristics are listed in

“Specifications”.

When making connections, carefully align the center

conductor elements, then rotate the knurled barrel while the mating

component remains still. Tighten until firm contact is made.

Take care when working with either of these connectors. If this

connector is mechanically degraded in any way, high frequency losses

occur. Refer to Application Note 326, Connector Cure, for more

information.

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

This

initiates continuous sweep-retrace cycling of the

Description

synthesizer. The sweep is initiated by one of the trigger functions,

while the sweep speed is controlled by the sweep time function. The

green LED located above this key lights when the synthesizer is

performing an list, step, or analog sweep. The LED is off

of the following: retrace, band crossings, phase locking at

frequency of each new sweep and during manual sweeps.

during all

the start

SCPI:

Analyzer:

Programming Codes

See Also

Manual Sweep, [SINGLE)

“Continuous, Single, and Manual Sweep Operation” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disable

Copy List

Function Group

POWER

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you copy the frequency information of the frequency

list to the flatness correction menu. If there is no frequency list to

copy, nothing happens.

SCPI: NONE, see

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fltness Menu

Disable

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

correction pairs) so that the 1601 point flatness array will be applied

when is on. The 1601 point flatness array is

lets you disable the user flatness array

Description

accessible only through the HP-IB interface.

SCPI:

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coupling Factor

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

allows specification of the coupling factor of an external

coupler/detector used to externally level the synthesizer output

power. Negative coupling factor values are required for valid entry.

See “Specifications”

for the coupling factor range.

SCPI: POWer:ALC:CFACtor

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

ALC

“Externally Leveling the Synthesizer” in Chapter 1.

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you select a synthesized continuous wave frequency.

When you press

LED off) and displays:

the synthesizer stops sweeping (green SWEEP

XXXXX MHz. Where XXXXX

CW:

represents a frequency value. Use either the rotary knob, the step

keys (with or without the left/right arrow keys), or the numerical

entry keys with a terminator key to set the desired value. If a small

change is desired, use the left and right arrow keys to underline the

digit to be changed.

Programming Codes

FREQuency[:CW] <num>[freq suffix] or

FREQuency:MODE CW

Analyzer: CW

Coupled,

See Also

“CW Operation and Start/Stop Frequency Sweep” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coupled

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

couples the CW function to the center frequency

function. Any change initiated in either one of these parameters

causes a change in the other.

SCP I: FREQuency:CW:AUTO

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dblr

POWER

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

accesses the doubler amp mode softkeys. These

are applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed. The

doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is controlled by the

instrument firmware. Its use depends on the frequency of operation

and on the calibration constants set at the factory. The instrument

defaults after preset to this automatic mode of operation which is

the specified operation.

in this menu will allow you to turn

the doubler amplifier always on or always off. These two modes are

unspecified operation for instruments with a doubler installed. These

have no effect on instruments without a doubler.

Sets the doubler amp mode to

AUTO. This is the default after

preset and must be used for specified

performance.

Doubler Amp Mode AUTO

Doubler Amp Mode On

Turns the doubler amplifier on

regardless of the frequency of

operation. Using this mode results in

unspecified performance.

Turns the doubler amplifier off

regardless of the frequency of

operation. Using this mode results in

unspecified performance.

Doubler

Mode Off

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above.

Operating and Programming Reference D-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deep AM

Function Group

MODULATION

Menu Map

Description

This

activates distortion reduction mode for deep AM

operation. Deep AM automatically switches to the ALC off leveling

mode when the modulation level drives the “detector-logger” (part

of the RF components, see Figure A-l) below its detection range.

The modulated waveform is DC coupled and ALC leveled above -13

Below -13

the waveform is DC controllable but not ALC

This value

leveled, and is subject to drift of typically

is reduced by a factor of 10 if the low ALC bandwidth feature is

selected. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature

is active.

Programming Codes

AM:MODE DEEP

AM:STATe

Analyzer: NONE

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Delay Menu

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

accesses the pulse delay softkeys.

(Option 002 only)

let you delay the internally generated pulsed output

This

These

from either the PULSE SYNC OUT signal or from the external pulse

signal at the PULSE input.

Delays the output pulse from the

PULSE SYNC OUT signal.

Pelay

Delays the output pulse from the

PULSE input.

Pulse D e la y Trig’d

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

All

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

(MOD), also see “Modulation” and “Pulse”.

Delete Menu

FREQUENCY, POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this

leads to the delete choices for both the frequency list menu and the

power flatness menu.

Deletes the complete array.

Delete All

Delete Current

Delete

Deletes the active line in the array.

Appears in the power flatness menu only. It

deletes the points that are undefined.

SCPI: NONE, see Fltness Menu or List Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Menu, List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Delete All

FREQUENCY, POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delete All

In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this

occurs in the frequency list menu. The other occurs in the power

flatness menu.

One

Description

In the both applications, this

array with one keystroke.

lets you delete all entries in the

SCP I: NONE, see Fltness Menu or List Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Menu, List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Delete Current

Function Group

Menu Map

FREQUENCY, POWER

In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this

occurs in the frequency list menu. The other occurs in the power

flatness menu.

One

Description

In the list menu application, the frequency entry and the associated

offset and dwell values in the active line are deleted. The active line

pointer and can be pointing at any of values

is designated by the

within the array.

In the flatness menu application, the frequency and associated

correction value in the active line is deleted. The active line pointer

can be pointing to either the frequency value or the correction

value.

SCPI: NONE, see Fltness Menu or List Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Menu, List Menu

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delta Marker

Delete Undef

Function Group

POWER

Menu Map

Description

This

occurs in the power flatness menu. It lets you delete

only those points that are undefined. Undefined correction values are

noted by the display as Undefined.

SCPI: NONE, see Fltness Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Delta Marker

MARKER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

causes the difference in frequency between two markers

to appear on the synthesizer display. The frequency difference is

XXXXX

DELTA MARKER

indicated in the following format:

MHz. Where m= the last marker activated, n= the reference marker,

and XXXXX represents some frequency value. On a CRT display,

the trace between the two selected markers is intensified. An asterisk

next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

At preset (factory), the synthesizer is set to measure the difference

between

been activated after preset, selecting Delta Marker indicates the

difference between and Ml. Both of these markers have an

and Ml (marker reference). If markers have not

asterisk next to their key label, indicating that they are on.

Whenever Delta Marker is selected, it reactivates the last marker

selected and makes that marker the “m” frequency. If the delta

marker feature is active, selecting a marker causes the “m” frequency

to change to the marker selected. If a frequency entry is made when

delta marker is in the active entry area, the frequency value of the

“m” frequency is changed to the new frequency entry causing the

new difference in frequency to be displayed. Negative frequency

differences are possible if “n” is greater than “m”.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delta Marker

SCP I: MARKer[n]:DELTa?

Analyzer: function on,

<num>

function off

Programming Codes

See Also

“Marker Operation” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements” in Chapter 1.

Delta Mkr Ref

MARKER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

displays the five markers available as the delta marker

Description

reference. The delta marker frequency is calculated using the

equation:

where

is the frequency of the active marker and

is the

frequency of the reference marker.

SCP I: MARKer:REFerenc <marker number>

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer:

function on,

function off.

Delta Ma r ker

“Marker Operation” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements” in Chapter 1.

Status

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Status

This

causes the status of various features to be displayed.

Description

For example, this is what the synthesizer displays as its status after a

factory preset:

ALC=On

UsrCorr=Off

AM=Off

FM=Off

Pwr Swp=Off

SwpMode=Swept

Altn=Off SwpTrig=Auto AutoCal=None

This key is useful when checking the current operation state of the

synthesizer. The following is a listing of the various mnemonics used

to indicate status.

Table D-l. Mnemonics used to Indicate Status

Function

Mnemonic

State

Mnemonic

Pulse

Pls

Off

Scalar

Internal

External

Scalar

Intrnl

Extrnl

Off

Alternate Registers

Altn

Off

ALC Leveling Point Lvl

Internal

Int

External

Power Meter

Source Module

Ext

Mtr

Mod

ALC Leveling Mode ALC

Off

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Status

Table D-l.

Mnemonics used to Indicate Status (continued)

Function

Mnemonic

State

Mnemonic

Flatness On/Off

Off

Start Sweep Trigger

Automatic

HP-IB

Auto

Bus

External

Ext

Power Slope

Power Sweep

Sweep Mode

Rf Slope

Pwr Swp

Off

Ramp

Step

List

Swept

Step

List

c w

Zero Span

Peaking or

Peak

AM BW or

Peak RF Always

AM BW Cal Always

Cal Always

Freq or Frq

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

STATUS MESSAGES

Amp Mode AUTO

Function Group

Menu Map

POWER

This

is applicable to instrument models with a doubler

installed. The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation

is controlled by the instrument firmware. The use of the amplifier

depends on the frequency of operation and on the calibration

Description

constants set at the factory. The instrument defaults after preset to

this automatic mode of operation which is the specified operation.

This

has no effect on instruments without a doubler.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

This feature is the default after preset.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Doubler Amp Mode Off

Programming Codes

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE:AUTO

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE:AUTO?

Analyzer: NONE

See Also

Doubler Amp Mode Off

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

installed. The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is

controlled by the instrument firmware. This turns off the

automatic mode of operation and turns off the amplifier so that it is

never used. This is unspecified mode of operation since the output

power may not be at the maximum leveled output power specification

is applicable to instrument models with a doubler

Description

at frequencies generated in the doubled mode. This

effect on instruments without a doubler.

has no

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE?

Analyzer: NONE

Dblr

See Also

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Doubler Amp Mode On

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

is applicable to instrument models with a doubler

Description

installed. The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is

controlled by the instrument firmware. This turns off the

automatic mode of operation and turns on the amplifier so that it is

always used. This is an unspecified mode of operation since it can

cause increased harmonics and degraded dynamic range at some

frequencies. This

doubler.

has no effect on instruments without a

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE?

Analyzer: NONE

Dblr

See Also

Dwell Coupled

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you couple the dwell time for points in the stepped

frequency sweep mode to the ramp sweep mode sweep time. The

equation to determine the dwell time in the dwell coupled mode is as

follows:

Coupled Dwell Time

(sweep time)

(number of step points)

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: SWEep[:FREQ

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

Step Sup Menu

See Also

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8360 Adrs

Function Group

SYSTEM

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you change the HP-IB address of the synthesizer.

Enter the address desired using the numeric entry keys or the

up/down arrow keys. The address value may be set between 0 and

30. The synthesizer stores the address value in non-volatile memory.

The default address of the synthesizer is 19.

SCPI: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Connectors, HP-IB Menu

“Getting Started Programming,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Enter

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you enter a power correction value for a frequency

Description

point in the flatness array. A frequency point must be entered before

a correction value can be accepted, otherwise the following error

message appears:

ERROR

Must first enter correction freq. The up/down arrow

keys let you scroll through the frequency points available for power

correction. If no correction value is entered for a frequency point, the

synthesizer display indicates Undefined. The range of acceptable

values is -40 to

An asterisk next to the key label indicates

that this feature is active.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference E-l

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter

SCPI: NONE, see

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Enter Freq

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you enter a frequency point into the flatness

Menu is selected,

correction array. When the Power

Enter Freq is automatically activated. Frequency points must be

entered before correction values can be accepted into the array.

Frequency points can be entered in any order, and the synthesizer

automatically reorders them beginning with the lowest frequency.

One frequency-correction pair is the minimum and 801 is the

maximum number of points that can be entered. An asterisk next to

the key label indicates that this feature is active.

see Fltness Menu

Programming Codes

See Also

Fltness Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Enter List Dwell

Function Group

Menu Map

FREQUENCY

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter List

This

lets you enter a dwell time for a frequency point in the

Description

frequency list array. A frequency point must be entered before a

dwell value can be accepted, otherwise the following error message

appears:

ERROR: Must first enter a List Frequency. The rotary knob and

the up/down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequency points

available to change the default dwell values. The range of values is

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this

feature is active.

NONE,see List Menu

Programming Codes

See Also

List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Enter List Freq

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you enter a frequency point into the frequency list

array. The frequency list may contain as few as one and as many as

801 points. The order frequencies are entered is the order they are

listed. Additions to an existing list are placed as indicated by the

active entry arrow. The rotary knob and the up/down arrow keys let

you scroll through the frequencies points. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: NONE, see List Menu

Programming Codes

See Also

List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter List Offset

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you enter an offset value for a frequency in the

frequency list. A frequency point must be entered before a power

value can be accepted, otherwise the following error message appears:.

ERROR: Must first enter

Frequency. The rotary knob and

the up/down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequency points

available to change the default power values. An asterisk next to the

key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: NONE, see List Menu

Programming Codes

See Also

List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

ENTRY KEYS

Function Group

Menu Map

NONE

The entry keys consist of, the numeric entry keys (0 through

the decimal point key, the negative sign/backspace key, and the

terminator keys. These keys are active whenever the ENTRY

ON/OFF LED is lit.

Description

ARROW KEYS, ROTARY KNOB

“Entry Area” in Chapter 1.

See Also

“Getting Started Programming” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ext Det Cal

ENTRY

NONE

This

Function Group

Menu Map

lets you turn off (blank) the active entry area and

Description

disable the ARROW keys, rotary knob, and entry keys. When

any function key (hard or soft) is pressed, the active entry area is

reactivated. The yellow LED, ENTRY ON, next to

indicates whether the entry area is active (LED on=active).

SCPI: No specific code activates

Programming Codes

See Also

Arrow Keys

“Entry Area” in Chapter 1.

Ext Det Cal

USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

enables the synthesizer to act as a controller to an HP

power meter. This causes an immediate execute on

the interface bus and generates an HP-IB error if no power meter is

present on the interface bus or if the synthesizer is unable to address

the power meter. Use external detector calibration to characterize

and compensate for an external negative diode detector used in an

external leveling configuration.

Programming Codes

CALibration:PMETer:DETector:INITiate?

CALibration:PMETer:DETector:NEXT?

suffix]

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fault Menu

Function Group

SERVICE

This

Menu Map

Description

accesses the fault information softkeys. Use this

if a fault is indicated on the message line.

Indicates the latched status of PEAK, TRACK,

RAMP, SPAN, and ADC.

Fault Info 1

Indicates the latched status of EEROM, PWRON,

CALCO, PLLZERO, PLLWAIT, and FNXFER.

Fault Info 2

Fault Info 3

Fault

Indicates the latched status of CALYO,

TMR CNFLCT, and SEARCH.

Clears all latched fault status messages.

SCPI: DIAGnostics:OUTput:FAULts

Programming Codes

This command produces a string of ones and zeroes (16 bits)

separated by commas to indicate the latched status of the different

fault indicators.

Bit #

Fault Name

PEAK

TRACK

RAMP

SPAN

ADC

EEROM

PWRON

CALCO

PLLZERO

PLLWAIT

FNFXER

CALYO

TMR CNFLCT

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference F-l

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Analyzer: NONE

listed above.

See Also

SERVICE

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

messages.

displays the latched status of the following fault

Indicates that the peak algorithm is unable to align

PEAK FAIL

the YTM

to the frequency of the YO.

This fault indication is possible only if a peaking or

autotrack routine has been initiated.

Indicates that the autotrack algorithm is unable to

calculate the calibration constants needed to track

TRACK FAIL

the YTM

to the frequency of the YO.

This fault indication is possible only if an autotrack

routine has been initiated.

Indicates that the ramp algorithm is unable to adjust

RAMP FAIL

SPAN FAIL

the sweep ramp voltage to

at the end of

the sweep. Initiate a full self-test to gather more

information if this fault is indicated.

Indicates that the span algorithm is unable to adjust

the YO to achieve the correct frequency at the end

of a band. This fault indication is possible only if a

sweep span routine has been initiated.

FAIL Indicates that the internal YO

line adjusted

at power-on or at preset is unable to calibrate.

Initiate a full self-test to gather more information if

this fault is indicated.

ADC FAIL

Indicates that the ADC (analog-to-digital converter)

is not responding to a measurement request within

the time-out period. The ADC is used extensively

in the operations of the synthesizer. Initiate a full

self-test to gather more information if this fault is

indicated.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fault Info 2

Fault Menu.

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fault Menu

Fault Info 2

SERVICE

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

messages.

displays the latched status of the following fault

EEROM FAIL Indicates that the EEROM (electrically erasable

read only memory) has failed to store data properly.

Whenever any data is stored in EEROM, the

integrity of the data is checked (read back and

compared to the data in RAM). The EEROM is the

main storage location for calibration data. If this

fault is indicated the present calibration data may be

PWRON FAIL Indicates that the test of the processor, ROM, RAM

and I/O system performed at power-on has failed.

The front panel INSTR CHECK LED lights. Initiate

a full self-test to gather more information if this fault

is indicated.

CALCO FAIL Indicates that the internal calibration data has been

defaulted either deliberately or due to an EEROM

failure.

PLLZERO

FAIL

Indicates a phase lock loop error caused by either a

hardware failure or misadjustment.

Indicates a phase lock loop error caused by either a

hardware failure or misadjustment. Initiate a full

self-test to gather more information if this fault is

indicated.

PLLWAIT

FAIL

FNXFER

FAIL

Indicates that the transfer of fractional-N data

has failed. Initiate a full self-test to gather more

information if this fault is indicated.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Info 2

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

Fault Menu

See Also

Fault Info 3

SERVICE

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

messages.

displays the latched status of the following fault

CALYO FAIL Indicates that the YO adjusted at power-on or at

preset is unable to calibrate. Initiate a full self-test

to gather more information if this fault is indicated.

Indicates that the manual sweep DAC adjusted at

FAIL

power-on or at preset is unable to calibrate. Initiate

a full self-test to gather more information if this fault

is indicated.

Indicates a possible internal software error. Two

routines are trying to use the same timer.

TMR

CNFLCT

FAIL

Indicates that the ALC search leveling algorithm has

failed. This fault indication is possible only if the

search leveling mode is on.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fault Menu

HP 8360

Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fltness

POWER

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

reveals the

in the flatness correction menu that

control user-defined

leveling parameters.

Automatically creates a frequency list with all

points separated by the specified increment in a

given frequency range.

Auto Fill

Automatically creates a frequency list

containing the specified number of points in a

given frequency range.

Auto Fill

Sets the start frequency of the flatness

correction array that will load automatically

when either the number of points or the

increment size is specified.

Auto Fill Start

Sets the stop frequency of the flatness array

that will load automatically when either the

number of points or the increment size is

specified.

Auto Fill Stop

Changes the power correction value for the

indicated frequency point to the undefined state.

Clear Point

Copy List

Copies the frequency list, (see List Menu

into the frequency parameter of the flatness

correction array.

Disables the frequency-correction pair array and

uses the HP-IB transferred 1601 point correction

set to apply correction information.

Disable

Reveals the delete softkeys.

Delete Menu

Enter Corr

Enables the entry of a power correction value

for a frequency point.

Enables the entry of a single frequency point

into the flatness correction array.

Enter Freq

Freq Follow

Sets the synthesizer to CW frequency mode so

that the corresponding correction values can be

entered.

Reveals the

in the power meter measure

Mtr

correction menu.

The

in this menu help front panel users enter and edit

are not

flatness correction parameters. These editing

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

accessible over HP-IB. To load correction arrays over HP-IB, the

correction arrays must be created in the controlling program and

then downloaded to the synthesizer. The corresponding SCPI array

creation and control commands are given after the description of this

feature.

The HP 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers provide extremely flat

power to a test port, for testing power sensitive devices such as

amplifiers, mixers, diodes or detectors. The user flatness correction

feature of the synthesizer compensates for attenuation and power

variations created by components between the source and the test

device.

User flatness correction allows the digital correction of up to 801

frequency points (1601 points via HP-IB), in any frequency or sweep

mode (i.e. start/stop, CW, power sweep etc.). Using a power meter

to calibrate the measurement system as shown in Figure F-l, a table

of power level corrections is created for the frequencies where power

level variations or losses occur (see Figure

These frequencies

may be sequential linear steps or arbitrarily spaced. To allow for the

correction of multiple test setups or frequency ranges, you may save

as many as eight different measurement setups (including correction

tables) in the internal storage registers of the synthesizer.

HP-IB

INPUT

PORT

POUER

I AND OTHER I

OUTPUT PORT

SENSOR

OEVICE

Figure F-l. Basic User Flatness Configuration Using an HP

Power Meter

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Correction

Undefined

Frequency (MHZ)

10.000000

110.000000

210.000000

Auto Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

stop

Start

Figure

User Flatness Correction Table as Displayed by the Synthesizer

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Theory of operation

The unparalleled leveled output power accuracy and flatness of the

HP 8360 series synthesizer. This is achieved by using a new digital

(versus analog) design to control the internal automatic leveling

circuitry (ALC).

An internal detector samples the output power to provide a dc

feedback voltage. This voltage is compared to a reference voltage

which is proportional to the power level chosen by the user. When

there is a discrepancy between voltages, the power is increased

or decreased until the desired output level is achieved. For

comprehensive theory on the ALC system, refer to the

the “A” section of this manual.

entry in

The factory-generated internal calibration data of the synthesizer

is digitally segmented into 1601 data points across the start/stop

frequency span chosen. Subsequently, these points are converted into

1601 reference voltages for the ALC system. The digital ALC control

scheme not only delivers excellent power accuracy and flatness at

the output port of the synthesizer, but also provides the means to

execute the user flatness correction feature.

Generally, a power meter is required to create a table of correction

data that produces flat power at the test port. You may measure

and enter correction data for up to 801 points. The correction

data contained in the table is linearly interpolated to produce a

data array across the start/stop frequency span set on the

synthesizer. The

calibration data of the synthesizer (Figure

data array is summed with the internal

When user flatness

correction is enabled, the sum of the two arrays produces the 1601

reference voltages for the ALC system.

1601 Equodistont

Point Array

Accessible Only

Computer

User Flatness Correction Array

1601 Points

far ALC

1601 Points of Internal

Calibration Data

Figure

The Sources of ALC Calibration Correction Data

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the correction frequency span is only a subset of the start/stop

frequency span set on the source, no corrections are applied to the

portion of the sweep that is outside the correction frequency span.

The following example illustrates how the data is distributed within

the user flatness correction array.

Assume that the synthesizer is set to sweep from 2 to 18

you only enter user flatness correction data from 14 to 18

but

Linear interpolation occurs between the correction entries to provide

the 401 points required for the 14 to 18

corrections are applied to the 2 to 13.99

Refer to Figure

portion of the array. No

portion of the array.

Point Number

Frequency

1200

1600

Points

of Data

No Corrections Applied

Corr. Freq.

Figure

Array Configuration when the Correction Data Frequency Span is a Subset of the

Synthesizer Frequency Span

Number of points interpolated between correction entries is

calculated as follows:

freq. span between correction entries

1600 1 = Number of pts

stop frequency

start frequency

When correction frequencies are arbitrarily spaced, the number of

interpolated points varies.

When utilizing the user flatness correction feature, do not exceed the

synthesizer ALC operating range. Exceeding the ALC range causes

the output power to become unleveled and eliminates the benefits

of user flatness correction. The ALC range can be determined

by subtracting the minimum output power (-20

from the

maximum specified power. When the optional step attenuator is

ordered on a synthesizer with firmware released prior to November

1990, the attenuator needs to be uncoupled to obtain the full ALC

This can be accomplished by selecting POWER [MENU]

range.

For example, an HP

to -20

has an ALC range of

When user flatness correction is enabled, the maximum

test

port power is equivalent to the maximum available leveled power

minus the maximum path loss

an HP has a maximum path loss of 15

components between the source output and the test port, the test

port power should be set to -5 When user flatness correction

For example, if

due to system

is enabled, this provides the maximum available power to the device

under test (DUT).

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming Codes

CORRection:FLATness

The portion of the above command contained in

can be

entered from one to 801 times. This command creates the

frequency-correction pair array similar to the front panel array.

The correction entered is at the associated frequency and

frequencies in between are determined by linear interpolation.

CORRection:FLATness?

This command queries the flatness array created with CORR:FLAT.

CORRection:ARRay[i]

The portion of the above command contained in

must

be entered 1601 times. This array must contain 1601 evenly

spaced correction values. This command creates the

correction set that has no equivalent front panel entry. If this

command is used to enter flatness correction information the

CORRection:SOURce command (described below) will be set to

array. There is an array for the foreground state (i=O) and for the

background state

foreground state

is not specified, the default is the

CORRection:ARRay[i]?

This command queries the entire

CORRection:SOURce[i]

correction set.

When the above command is set to flatness CORR:SOUR FLAT, the

array chosen is the frequency-correction pair array. When the

command is set to array CORR:SOUR ARR, the array chosen is the

1601 point correction set.

CORRection:SOURce[i]?

Queries the source of correction.

CORRection[:STATe]

Sets the switch on the user flatness correction feature. This is the

same as pressing

on the front panel.

CORRection:STATe?

Queries the condition of the internal switch.

CORRection:FLATness:POINts?

The above command returns information on how many

frequency-correction pairs were entered using the CORR : FLAT

command.

Analyzer: NONE

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coupling

List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements” in Chapter 1.

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

applies flatness correction to the synthesizer RF output.

Description

If no array has been created, pressing this key applies 0

correction at all points. The yellow LED above the

when user flatness correction is on.

of flatness

lights

SCPI: CORRection[:STATe]

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

FM Coupling

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM input to be

AC-coupled. If you choose AC-coupled FM, you will be modulating a

phase locked carrier. This is the specified synthesized operation. You

must modulate at a 100

rate or greater. If not, the frequency

changes caused by the modulation are inside the phase locked loop

bandwidth and the output will not be linear FM. For modulation

frequencies below 100

choose DC-coupled FM.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that AC FM coupling is

selected. This selection is the factory preset default.

For synthesizers without Option 002, see FM

F-l 1

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coupling

SCPI: FM:FILTer:HPASs

<num> sets the AC bandwidth to 100

Programming Codes

for any value

and sets the AC bandwidth to 20 Hz for any value

Analyzer: NONE

[MOD], also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

FM Coupling DC

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM input to be

DC-coupled. Use DC coupling for modulation rates below 100

In this mode, the phase-locked loop is de-activated. This means that

the synthesizer is operating as an open loop sweeper. The synthesizer

will not be phase locked, and therefore, be aware that the phase noise

and CW frequency accuracy specifications do not apply.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that DC FM coupling is

selected. The factory preset default is AC coupling.

For synthesizers

Option 002, see FM On/Off DC.

SCPI: FM:FILTer:HPASs <num>[freq

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FM Menu

Function Group (MOD)

Menu Map

Description

This

softkeys. These

(Option 002 only) accesses the frequency modulation

engage external and internal frequency

modulation. They allow you to define the coupling, waveform, rate,

and deviation of the internal FM.

Toggles on and off the frequency

modulation mode for an external FM

source.

Ext

Int

Toggles on and off the frequency

modulation mode using the internal

FM generator.

Sets the rate of the internal frequency

modulation.

Internal FM Rate

Internal FM Deviation

Sets the deviation of the internal

frequency modulation.

Sets AC coupling for modulation rates

FM Coupling

of 100

or greater. The RF signal

is phase locked.

Sets DC coupling for modulation

FM Coupling DC

Waveform Menu

rates of less than 100

locked loop is open.

The phase

Displays the waveforms for internal

frequency modulation.

SCPI: NONE, see the individual

Analyzer: NONE

listed.

Programming Codes

(MOD), also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FM On/Off AC

Function Group

MODULATION

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you select AC coupled frequency modulation

(FM), and makes FM deviation frequency the active function.

FM sensitivity is selectable. Use the rotary knob, up/down, or

numeric entry keys to choose, 100

1.00 MHz/V or 10.0 MHz/V.

Frequency deviation is dependent on the magnitude of the input

signal. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is

active.

Programming Codes

FM:SENSitivity

FM:COUPling AC

FM:STATe

Analyzer:

function on, followed by either 100

10 MHz

function off.

(MOD), CONNECTORS

See Also

FM On/Off DC

MODULATION

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you select DC coupled frequency modulation

(FM) and makes FM deviation frequency the active function.

FM sensitivity is selectable. Use the rotary knob, up/down, or

numeric entry keys to choose, 100

1.00 MHz/V or 10.0 MHz/V.

Frequency deviation is dependent on the magnitude of the input

signal. When DC FM is chosen the synthesizer displays DC FM on the

message line. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this

feature is active.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming Codes

FM:SENSitivity

FM:STATe

Analyzer: NONE

On/Off Ext

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) activates the frequency modulation

mode for an external source. The FM source is connected to the FM

modulation connector. The FM sensitivity function is active. It is

factory preset to 10 MHz/V. Use the numeric entry keys, arrow keys,

or rotary knob to change the sensitivity to 100

or 1 MHz/V.

When external FM is in effect, the RF output is frequency modulated

with a rate and depth set by the external source. The FM coupling

is controlled by the following softkeys: FM Coupling

The FM coupling defaults to 100

This is AC

or greater. For modulation rates

choose DC-coupled FM.

FM Coupling DC!.

coupling for FM rates of 100

below 100

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that external FM is active

and is displayed on the message line.

For synthesizers without Option 002, see FM

DC.

AC and

Programming Codes

FM:SOURce

FM:SENSitivity

FM:STATe

Analyzer:

function on,

function off

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FM On/Off Int

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) activates the internal frequency

modulation mode. No external source is needed.

When internal FM is in effect, the parameters are controlled by the

following soft keys:

Internal FM Rate Internal FM Deviation

FM Coupling

FM Coupling DC Waveform Menu. The

synthesizer is factory preset to a 1 MHz rate, 1 MHz deviation, and

sine wave parameters.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that internal FM is active

and FM is displayed on the message line.

Programming Codes

FM:SOURce

FM:STATe

Analyzer: NONE

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

See Also

Freq Cal Menu

USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

accesses the sweep span calibration menu.

Span

Always Performs a sweep span calibration each time

the frequency span is changed.

Performs a sweep span calibration.

Swp Span Cal

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FREQUENCY

SCPI: NONE, see

Analyzer: NONE

listed above.

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above.

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Freq Follow

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

facilitates the entry of correction values. The synthesizer

Description

generates the corresponding CW frequency at the set power level as

you scroll the correction cells of the flatness array. An asterisk next

to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: NONE, see Fltness Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fltness Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

FREQUENCY M E N U

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

allows access to the frequency functions listed below.

When this feature is on, the center

frequency and the CW frequency is

kept equal. Changing either the center

frequency or the CW frequency causes the

other to change to the same value. An

asterisk next to the key label indicates that

this feature is active.

Coupled

Sets the frequency multiplier value and

applies it to all frequency parameters.

Freq Mult

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FREQUENCY

Sets the frequency offset value and applies

it to all frequency parameters.

Freq Offset

List Menu

Displays the frequency list create/edit

softkeys.

Reveals the stepped frequency sweep edit

soft keys.

Step Swp Menu

Sets the frequency step size in the CW

frequency mode.

Size CW

Sets the frequency step size in the swept

frequency mode.

Up/Down Size Swept

zoom

Places the synthesizer in the

sweep

mode, where the rotary knob and numeric

entry keys control CF, and the up/down

arrow keys control AF.

listed above.

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Freq

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set a frequency multiplier value and applies it to

all frequency parameters. Any integer value between and including

is accepted. Changing the multiplier value changes the display,

it does not affect the output of the synthesizer.

For example:

1. Set the start frequency to 4

2. Set the stop frequency to 10

3. Set the frequency multiplier to 5.

Note that the display indicates

and

asterisks appear next to the frequency data.

4. Now set the stop frequency to 30

The synthesizer frequency

is 6

or 30

Frequency multiplier and offset are related as shown by the following

equation:

Entered value or Displayed Frequency

Generated x Multiplier) + Offset value

(Frequency

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating

Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Freq Offset

The factory preset value is 1. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

FREQuency:MULTiplier

FREQuency:MULTiplier:STATe

<num> will be rounded to the nearest integer.

Analyzer: SHFA

FREQUENCY (MENU), Freq

See Also

Freq Offset

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set a frequency offset value and applies it to

all frequency parameters. The frequency offset ranges between and

including fllO.O

Changing the frequency offset value changes

the display but does not affect the output frequency. Frequency

multiplier and offset are related as shown by the following equation:

Entered value or Displayed Frequency = (Frequency

Generated x Multiplier) + Offset value

The factory preset value is 0 Hz. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

FREQuency:OFFSet

FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe

Analyzer: SHFB

FREQUENCY

Freq

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cal

USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

initiates a full synthesizer user calibration. The

calibration performed is instrument state dependent. For example, if

the synthesizer is in ramp sweep mode, a sweep span calibration and

an auto track is done. If the synthesizer has amplitude modulation

active on a CW signal, then RF peaking and an AM bandwidth

calibration is performed.

Programming Codes

See Also

See the individual types of calibration.

Analyzer: NONE

AM BW Cal Once, Auto Track,

AM BW Cal Always,

Peak RF Once, Swp Span Cal Always,

Peak RF Always,

Swp Span Cal Once

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Global Dwell

Function Group

FREQUENCY

Menu Map

Description

This

is used to set a dwell time value for

points in the

frequency list array.

SCPI: NONE,see List Menu

Analyzer:NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Enter List Dwell, List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Global Offset

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

is used to set an offset value for all points in the

frequency list array.

SCPI:NONE, see List Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Enter List Offset, List Menu

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To set the synthesizer’s HP-IB address, refer to “Address” in this

manual.

HP-IB Address

HP-IB Menu

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

reveals the

in the HP-IB control menu.

Reveals the

that

Adrs Menu

allow HP-IB addresses to be

changed.

Sets analyzer as the external

interface language.

Programming Language

Language CIIL

Language SCPI

Sets CIIL as the external

interface language.

Sets SCPI as the external

interface language.

Three different programming languages are available:

SCPI, Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments,

is the instrument control programming language developed by

Hewlett-Packard to conform to the IEEE 488.2 standard (replacing

IEEE 728-1982). The IEEE 488.2 standard provides codes,

formats, protocols, and common commands that were unavailable

in the previous standard.

Analyzer is the programming language compatible with the

synthesized sweepers system language and many

network analyzers.

CIIL, Control Interface Intermediate Language, is the instrument

control programming language used in option 700 synthesizers.

Option 700 synthesizers are M.A.T.E. (Modular Automatic Test

Equipment) compatible.

Operating and Programming Reference H-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONNECTORS, HP-IB

“Getting Started Programming”

See Also

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal AM Depth

(MOD)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the AM depth for

internally-generated AM. Use the numeric entry keys, arrow keys,

or rotary knob to change the value of the depth. The synthesizer

accepts values from 0 to 99.9 percent (0 percent is equivalent to no

modulation) and has a resolution of 0.1 percent. The factory preset

depth is 30 percent.

Programming Codes

UNIT:AM

Analyzer: NONE

(MOD), also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal AM Rate

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the AM rate for

internally-generated AM. Use the numeric entry keys, arrow keys,

or rotary knob to change the rate. The synthesizer accepts values

from 1 Hz to 1 MHz, however it is specified to 1 MHz only for a sine

waveform. Refer to the specifications. The factory preset rate is

100

SCPI: AM:INTernal:FREQuency

Analyzer: NONE

suffix>]

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

Internal AM Waveform Noise

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the AM waveform to

Description

noise (white noise AM rate;

distribution centered around

AM depth) for internally-generated AM. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active. The factory preset default

is sine wave.

SCPI: AM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal AM Waveform Sine

Internal AM Waveform Ramp

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the AM waveform to

Description

ramp for internally-generated AM. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active. The factory preset default is sine

wave.

SCPI: AM:INTernal:FUNCtion RAMP

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

Internal AM Waveform Sine

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the AM waveform to sine

Description

wave for internally-generated AM. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active. Sine wave is the factory preset

waveform.

SCPI: AM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

(MOD), also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal AM Waveform Square

(MOD)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the AM waveform to

square wave for internally-generated AM. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active. The factory preset default

is sine wave.

SCPI: AM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

Internal AM Waveform Triangle

(MOD)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the AM waveform to

triangle wave for internally-generated AM. An asterisk next to the

key label indicates that this feature is active. The factory preset

default is sine wave.

AM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal

Rate

Internal FM Deviation

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM deviation for

Description

internally-generated FM. Use the numeric entry keys, arrow keys, or

rotary knob to change the value of the deviation. The synthesizer

accepts values from 1 Hz to 10 MHz. The factory preset deviation is

1 MHz.

SCPI: FM[:DEViation]

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

Internal FM Rate

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM rate for

internally-generated FM. Use the numeric entry keys, arrow keys, or

rotary knob to change the value of the rate. The synthesizer accepts

values from 1 Hz to 1 MHz, however it is specified to 1 MHz only for

a sine waveform. Refer to the specifications. The factory preset rate

is 1 MHz (note that the synthesizer also presets to a sine waveform).

SCPI: FM:INTernal:FREQuency

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal FM Waveform Noise

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM waveform to noise

distribution centered around FM

Description

(white noise FM rate;

deviation) for internally-generated FM. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active. The factory preset default

is sine wave.

SCPI: FM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

Internal FM Waveform Ramp

[MOD)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM waveform to

ramp for internally-generated FM. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active. The factory preset default is sine

wave.

SCPI: FM:INTernal:FUNCtion RAMP

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

(MOD), also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal FM Waveform Square

Internal FM Waveform Sine

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM waveform to sine

Description

wave for internally-generated FM. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active. Sine wave is the factory preset

waveform,

SCPI: FM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

Internal FM Waveform Square

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM waveform to

Description

square wave for internally-generated FM. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active. The factory preset default

is sine wave.

SCPI: FM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal FM Waveform

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the FM waveform to

triangle wave for internally-generated FM. An asterisk next to the

key label indicates that this feature is active. The factory preset

default is sine wave.

FM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

Internal Menu

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you define the parameters of the

internal pulse modulation.

Internal Pulse Generator Width

Sets the width of the on portion of the

internally-generated pulse.

Internal Pulse Generator Rate

Sets the repetition frequency of the

internally-generated pulse.

Internal Pulse

Period

Sets the period of the internally-generated pulse.

. Internal Pulse Generator Delay

Delays the pulse from the trigger signal applied to

the external trigger.

Internal Pulse Mode Auto

Default mode of generating automatically-triggered

internal pulses.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Pulse Generator Period

Internal Pulse Mode Gate

Turns on the internal pulse mode during the

positive cycle of the externally generated pulse.

Internal Pulse Mode Trigger

Triggers on the leading edge of the external pulse

input.

SCPI: NONE, see the individual

Analyzer: NONE

listed.

Programming Codes

See Also

a so see “Modulation” and “Pulse”.

Internal Pulse Generator Period

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set a value for the internal

Description

pulse generator’s pulse period. The pulse is adjustable from

300 ns to 400 ms with ‘25 ns resolution. The factory preset default

is 2 ms pulse period. When this feature is active, its current value is

displayed in the active entry area.

Since period and rate are inversely related, if both are given values,

only the last one will be applied which will cause the first one to be

recalculated. Use the one that is convenient for your application. For

example, if you set the pulse period, do not change the pulse rate

(the synthesizer automatically adjusts the rate to match the period.)

SCP I: PULS:INTernal:PERiod <num>[time

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

a so see “Pulse” and “Modulation”.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Pulse Generator Rate

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set a value for the internal

Description

pulse generator’s pulse rate. The range of acceptable values is from

2.5 Hz to 3.33 MHz. (These values are obtained by taking the inverse

of the period.) The factory preset default is 500 Hz. When this

feature is active, its current value is displayed in the active entry

area.

Since rate and period are inversely related, if both are given values,

only the last one will be applied which will cause the first one to be

recalculated. Use the one that is convenient for your application. For

example, if you set the pulse rate, do not change the pulse period

(the synthesizer automatically adjusts the period to match the rate.)

SCPI: PULM:INTernal:FREQuency

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

a so see “Pulse” and “Modulation”.

Internal Pulse Generator Width

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set a value for the internal

Description

pulse generator’s pulse width. The pulse is adjustable from 25 ns

to 400 ms with 25 ns resolution. The factory preset default is 1 ms

pulse width. If you set a value for the pulse width that is greater

than the pulse period, the pulse period is recalculated to a value

equal to the pulse width plus 25 ns. When this feature is active, its

current value is displayed in the active entry area.

HP 8360

Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Pulse Mode Gate

SCP I: PULM:INTernal:WIDTh <num>[time

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer: NONE

a so see “Pulse” and “Modulation”,

Internal Pulse Mode Auto

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) is the default mode of generating

Description

internal pulses. It is not synchronized to any trigger signal. An

asterisk next to the key label indicated that this mode is selected.

SCPI: PULM:INTernal:TRIGger:SOURce

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

a so see “Pulse” and “Modulation”.

Internal Pulse Mode Gate

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) logically

the internal pulse

Description

generator with a gating signal supplied from an external source.

Programming Codes

PULM:INTernal:GATE

PULM:INTernal:TRIGger:SOURce

Analyzer: NONE

(MOD), also see “Pulse” and “Modulation”.

See Also

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Pulse Mode Trigger

Function Group (MOD)

Menu Map

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set the internal pulse

Description

generator to trigger on the leading edge of the externally generated

pulse.

SCPI: PULM:INTernal:TRIGger:SOURce

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

also see “Pulse” and “Modulation”.

Invert Input

Function Group (MOD)

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) inverts the logic of the external pulse

input. With this function active,

V turns off RF power.

SCPI: PULM:EXTernal:POLarity

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

also see “Pulse” and “Modulation”.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Leveling Mode

ALC

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

lets you open the ALC loop. Direct and separate control

of the linear modulator circuit (LVL DAC) and attenuator (ATN)

is possible (see Figure A-l). The power level must be set using an

external indicator (power meter/sensor). If the power level is set

when the synthesizer is in CW mode and then pulse modulation is

activated, the peak pulse level equals the CW level. The attenuator

value is set via the Set

in the POWER menu.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

POWer:ALC:STATe

POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO

Analyzer:

Pulse On/Off External, Set

“Working with Mixers,” in Chapter 1.

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference L-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Leveling Mode

Normal

ALC

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

lets you set the leveling mode of the synthesizer to

continuous leveling at the desired leveling point. In this mode, the

RF OUTPUT is controlled by the automatic level control (ALC)

circuit, otherwise referred to as the leveling loop. The attenuator

works in conjunction with the ALC to achieve the full range of

power levels. At factory preset, ALC normal is the default state. An

asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: POWer:ALC:STATe

Analyzer: Al, internal normal;

power meter normal; source module normal.

Programming Codes

See Also

external normal;

external

Leveling Mode

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

causes the ALC to switch off once the desired power

level is reached. When this leveling mode is activated, or when

power, or frequency is changed, the synthesizer switches to CW

frequency and closes the ALC system until the desired power level is

reached. The synthesizer reverts to its original frequency/modulation

state and opens the ALC system. This mode is similar to ALC off

mode and is useful for narrow pulse applications. An asterisk next to

the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: POWer:ALC:STATe

Analyzer:

Programming Codes

Pulse Modulation

“Working with Spectrum Analyzers,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Leveling

Leveling Point

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the synthesizer to accept an external

feedback connection from a negative-output diode detector to level

power. The EXT ALC BNC is the input connection for the required

signal. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is

active.

Programming Codes

POWer:ALC[:SOURCce]

POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO

Analyzer:

See Also

“Externally Leveling the Synthesizer,” in Chapter 1.

Leveling Point

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you set the synthesizer to level at the output of the

Description

directional coupler located inside the synthesizer. An asterisk next to

the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: POWer:ALC[:SOURce]

Analyzer: Al

Programming Codes

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Leveling Point

Module

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the synthesizer to level at the output of an

series millimeter-wave source module. All models of the

HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers drive mm-wave source modules.

High power models of HP 8360 drive the mm-wave source modules

directly and to specified power levels. An HP

power amplifier

is needed in other configurations. The source module interface

multi-pin connector provides the communication path between the

synthesizer and mm-wave source module. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: POWer:ALC[:SOURce]

Analyzer:

Programming Codes

See Also

CONNECTORS

“Externally Leveling the Synthesizer,” in Chapter 1.

Leveling Point

ALC

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you set the synthesizer to level at the power

Description

sensor of an external power meter. This mode of operation requires

a feedback connection from the power meter to the EXT ALC

BNC located on the synthesizer. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: POWer:ALC[:SOURce]

Analyzer:

Programming Codes

See Also

CONNECTORS

“Externally Leveling the Synthesizer,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List

LINE SWITCH

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

The line switch (on/off switch) has two positions, off or standby and

on. If line power is connected to the synthesizer and the line switch

is set to off, the synthesizer is in the standby state (amber LED on).

Standby provides power to the internal frequency standard oven.

When line power is connected and the line switch is set to on, the

synthesizer power supplies are enabled and a limited self-test is

initiated. The CPU self test is performed; power supplies and the

front panel processor are checked.

NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

“INSTALLATION” for information on fuses.

“Error Messages” for information on messages displayed at power on.

List Menu

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

allows access to the frequency list functions.

Automatically creates a frequency list using the

user-specified increment value.

Auto Fill

Automatically creates a frequency list

Auto Fill

containing a user-specified number of points.

Allows the entry of a start frequency for the

frequency list.

Auto Fill Start

Auto Fill Stop

Delete Menu

Allows the entry of a stop frequency for the

frequency list.

Reveals the frequency list delete menu.

Allows the entry of a dwell time for a frequency

point in the frequency list.

Allows the entry of a frequency point into the

frequency list.

Enter List Freq

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List Menu

Enter List

Allows the entry of an ALC output power

correction value for a frequency in the frequency

list.

Global

Automatically sets the dwell time for all points

in the frequency list to a user-specified value.

Automatically sets the ALC output power

correction value for all points in the frequency

list to a user-specified value.

Reveals the frequency list in the point trigger

menu.

Pt Trig Menu

A frequency list consists of two or more frequency points. A

frequency point can be any frequency value within the specified

frequency range of the synthesizer and must be entered before a value

for either ALC output power offset or dwell time is accepted. The

maximum number of frequency points in a frequency list is 801.

Creating a Frequency List

There are two methods of constructing a frequency list:

1. Use the Enter List Freq

to begin entering frequency

points. The list will be generated in the order the values are

entered.

2. If the minimum and maximum frequencies of the synthesizer

frequency range are not the endpoints desired for the frequency

list,use the Auto Fill Start and Auto Fill Stop

the frequency list endpoints. Then, use either the

Auto Fill

or Auto Fill

to create the list.

A list created by this method is ordered with the lowest frequency

as the first point and the highest frequency as the last point of the

frequency list.

Editing

Points

To add a frequency point to the list, place the active entry arrow

where you want the next frequency point to appear. The frequency

point is added directly after the value indicated by the arrow.

Lists created by the Auto Fill method are appended to an existing

list much the same way frequency points are added to a list. The

newly created list is added between the frequency point indicated by

the active entry arrow and the point directly after it.

If adding a new list of frequencies causes the existing list to exceed

Note

the maximum number of frequency points allowed

the new list

is not appended to the existing list. The error message TOO MANY

LIST PTS REQUESTED is displayed.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List Menu

To remove a frequency point and its associated offset value and dwell

time, use the delete menu (Delete

To remove an

entire frequency list, use the delete me

(Delete All

Editing ALC Offset and Dwell Time

Once a frequency point has been entered, You can assign an ALC

offset and a dwell time value. Use either the Enter List Power

or Global Offset

to enter offset values. Use either the

Enter List Dwell or Global Dwell.

values.

to enter dwell time

The editing

of this menu are not accessible over HP-IB.

Frequency lists to be loaded over HP-IB must first be created in the

controlling program and then downloaded in their entirety to the

synthesizer.

Programming Codes

{<num>[freq

LIST:[POWer]:CORRection

{<num>[time

In the above three commands, the entries contained in

repeated between 1 to 801 times.

can be

LIST:FREQuency:POINts?

LIST[:POWer]:CORRection:POINts?

In the above three commands, the synthesizer responds with the

number of points for the named parameter that are in the list array.

If a particular list is shorter than another, an error is generated upon

execution. An exception is made for the case where the shorter list

is of length 1. In this case, the list of length 1 is treated as though

it were a list of equal length, with all values the same. At

all

lists for the current state are cleared and reset to a single value.

Analyzer: NONE

(SAVE), Sweep Mode List

“Creating and Using a Frequency List,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List Mode Pt Trig

Auto

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the synthesizer to automatically step

through a frequency list, when the synthesizer is in sweep list mode.

SCPI: LIST:TRIGger:SOURce

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

List Menu, Pt Trig Menu, Sweep Mode List

“Creating and Using a Frequency List,” in Chapter 1.

List Mode Pt Trig

Bus

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the trigger point to be the HP-IB. When the

synthesizer receives an HP-IB trigger, it steps to the next frequency

point of the frequency list, provided the synthesizer is in sweep list

mode.

SCPI: LIST:TRIGger:SOURce BUS

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

List Menu, Pt Trig Menu, Sweep Mode List

“Creating and Using a Frequency List,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List Mode Pt Trig

Ext

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the trigger point to be an external hardware

trigger. When the synthesizer receives an external hardware trigger,

it steps to the next frequency point of the frequency list, provided

the synthesizer is in sweep list mode.

SCPI: LIST:TRIGger:SOURce

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

List Menu,

Trig Menu, Sweep Mode List

“Creating and Using a Frequency List,” in Chapter 1.

(LOCAL)

INSTRUMENT STATE

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you cancel remote operation and return the

synthesizer to front panel operation. The front panel keys are

deactivated when the synthesizer is operated remotely. If the external

controller executes a LOCAL LOCKOUT command, pressing the

key does not return the synthesizer to front panel control.

SCPI: LOCAL

Analyzer: LOCAL

Programming Codes

See Also

NONE

“Getting Started Programming,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sweep

MARKER

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

lets you set the synthesizer to start sweeping at the

frequency of marker 1 (Ml), and stop sweeping at the frequency of

marker 2

must have a higher frequency value than Ml. If

Sweep is activated when

is at a lower frequency than

Ml, the values of Ml and

are permanently interchanged. While

this function is active, the start/stop frequencies of the synthesizer

are changed to the values of Ml and

label indicates this feature is active.

An asterisk next to the key

SCPI: SWEep:MARKer:STATe

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer:

function on, MPO function off.

Marker Ml,

“Marker Operation,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Manual Sweep

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the synthesizer to the manual sweep mode

of operation. Depending on what parameter is sweeping, you can

use either the rotary knob or the ARROW keys to manually sweep

between the start/stop limits. In manual sweep mode, the synthesizer

does not automatically retrace at the sweep end point (the user must

turn the rotary knob to retrace), and the green SWEEP LED does

not light. The resolution of the rotary knob is 0.1% of the sweep

span in either start/stop or

mode. The resolution of the

and

arrow keys are dependent on the resolution defined by

Operating and Programming Reference M-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the

and

keys. Frequencies in the manual sweep mode are

synthesized, just as they are in CW mode.

There are two major differences between manual sweep and a sweep

generated by activating the CW function and rotating the rotary

knob or pressing the ARROW keys.

1. The sweep output voltage ramp is 0 to

but in CW mode, OV corresponds to lowest frequency of the

synthesizer frequency range and V corresponds to the highest

frequency of the range. In manual sweep mode, OV corresponds

to the start frequency specified and V corresponds to the

V in both modes,

stop frequency specified. In both cases, the sweep voltage at

intermediate frequencies is a linear interpolation of the frequency

span. For example, a frequency half-way between the start/stop

limits has a sweep voltage of

2. The bandcross points in CW mode occur at 2.4, 7, 13.5, 20, 25.5,

and 32

In manual sweep mode the bandcrossing points

have 200 MHz of flexibility, that is automatically used by the

synthesizer for optimum performance. For example, a 2.3 to 7.1

sweep could be accomplished without any band changes in

manual sweep mode.

SCPI: SWEep:MODE

This is the command for frequency manual sweep.

Programming Codes

POWer:MODE

POWer:SPAN <num>[lvl

This is the command for power manual sweep.

LIST:MODE

This is the command for manual list sweep.

Analyzer:

Power Sweep,

List

See Also

“Continuous, Single, and Manual Sweep Operation,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MENU SELECT

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

allows access to the marker functions.

Causes the synthesizer to display markers as an

amplitude pulse.

Markers

Changes the synthesizer’s center frequency to

the value of the most recently activated marker.

Display the frequency difference between the

active marker and the marker designated by the

Delta Mkr Aef .

Delta Marker

Delta Mkr Ref

Reveals the

in the delta marker

reference menu.

Sweep

Marker Ml

Marker

Causes the synthesizer to sweep from Ml to

Makes Ml frequency the active function.

Makes

frequency the active function.

Marker

Turns off all markers.

Markers

Off

Changes the synthesizer start and stop

frequencies to the values of Ml and

The markers are functional whenever an asterisk appears next to the

key label, but only one marker can be active at a time. The active

marker is indicated in the active entry area.

listed above.

See Also

“Marker Operation,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Marker Ml

Function Group

MARKER

Menu Map

Description

The softkeyslabeled Marker Ml through Marker

function

identically. The

turns the marker off/on. When an asterisk

appears next to the key label, it indicates that the marker is on, but

not necessarily active. A marker is only active when it is indicated in

the active entry area.

The active entry area displays the active marker and its frequency

value. Use the rotary knob, the ARROW keys, or the entry keys to

set the frequency. Markers are displayed normally as Z-axis intensity

dots, but can be changed to amplitude pulses

Markers

When a marker is turned off, the frequency value of that marker

is retained in memory. If the marker is reactivated, the stored

frequency value is recalled for that marker.

The frequency value of Ml and of

can also be used to define

parameters in two other marker features:

Sweep and

Start-Ml

Programming Codes

suffix] or

MARKer[l]:STATe

Analyzer: Ml function on, MO function off.

Markers,

Menu,

See Also

“Marker Operation,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Marker

MARKER

Function Group

Menu Map

See MARKER Ml

Description

Programming Codes

uency]

suffix] or

Analyzer:

function on, MO function off.

Ma r ker s,

Sweep ,

Menu ,

See Also

“Marker Operation,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Marker

MARKER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

See MARKER Ml

Programming Codes

uency] <num>[freq suffix] or

Analyzer:

function on, MO function off.

Markers,

See Also

“Marker Operation,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Marker

MARKER

Function Group

Menu Map

See

Description

Programming Codes

uency]

suffix] or

Analyzer:

function on, MO function off.

Markers,(MARKER), MkrRef Menu

“Marker Operation,” in Chapter 1.

See Also

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Marker

MARKER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

See

Programming Codes

uency] <num>[freq suffix] or

Analyzer:

function on, MO function off.

Markers ,

See Also

“Marker Operation,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Measure

Markers All Off

Function Group

MARKER

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you turn all the markers off. The frequency value

given to the markers remains in memory and will be recalled when

the marker are pressed again. Markers ,

, and Sweep are not affected by turning the

markers off. The function (or the frequency values) is retained as the

synthesizer settings.

SCPI: MARKer:AOFF

Analyzer: SHMO

Programming Codes

See Also

Markers ,

“Marker Operation,” in Chapter 1.

Sweep,(MARKER)

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Measure Corr All

Function Group

Menu Map

POWER

This

enables the synthesizer to act as a controller to

power meter to measure flatness correction

Description

command an HP

values at all frequency points defined in the flatness array.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Menu, Mtr

“Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array,” in

Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Measure Corr

Current

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you enable the synthesizer to act as a controller

power meter to measure a single flatness

to command an HP

correction value at the current flatness array frequency.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fltness Menu, Mtr

“Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array,” in

Chapter 1.

Measure

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you enable the synthesizer to act as a controller to

power meter to measure flatness correction

Description

command an HP

values for those frequency points of the flatness array that do not

have correction values assigned.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fltness Menu, Mtr

“Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array,” in

Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Meter Adrs

Function Group

SYSTEM

Menu Map

Description

In cases where the synthesizer is capable of acting as a controller

to an HP

power meter, this

enables you to set the

programming address of the power meter. The address value can

be set from 0 to 30, with the factory default address set at 13. The

address value is stored in non-volatile memory.

SCP I: DIAGnostics:INSTrument:PMETer:ADDRess <num>

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance,” in Chapter 1.

“INSTALLATION,” Chapter 3.

Meter On/Off AM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you display the value of the depth

of the externally-generated amplitude modulation.

SCPI: MEASure:AM?

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Meter On/Off FM

Function Group

(MOD)

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you display the frequency

deviation produced by the externally-generated frequency

modulation.

SCPI: MEASure:FM?

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

(MOD), also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

MENU SELECT

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

allows access to the modulation functions. The

following types of modulation are available:

AM Amplitude modulation is accepted from an external

source at the AM connector. The AM can be scaled

either linearly or exponentially. Synthesizers with

Option 002 also have the capability of internally

synthesizing amplitude modulation in sine, square,

triangle, ramp, or noise waveforms. Deep AM

(a distortion reduction mode) can be selected for

use when operating at a deep amplitude modulation

level.

Frequency modulation is accepted from an external

source at the FM connector. The FM can be either

AC-or DC-coupled. Synthesizers with Option 002

also have the capability of internally synthesizing

frequency modulation in sine, square, triangle, ramp,

or noise waveforms.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

On/Off

Pulse

Pulse modulation is accepted from an external

source at the PULSE connector. In addition, pulse

modulation can also be internally generated. The

pulse is adjustable in standard synthesizers with

1.0

a 27.778

resolution. Synthesizers can also produce

square wave for use with HP scalar

network analyzers. Synthesizers with Option 002

generate a synthesized pulse that is adjustable with

25 ns resolution.

Additional information is available under “Modulation”, or refer to

the type of modulation by name (AM, FM, Pulse.)

“Modulation”

See Also

On/Off AM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you output the

generated amplitude modulation waveforms to the rear panel

AM/FM OUTPUT connector. When scaled linearly at

the

maximum output voltage is

- 1 v .

V and the minimum output voltage is

Programming Codes

MODulation:OUTput:SOURce AM

MODulation:OUTput:STATe

Analyzer: NONE

[MOD), also see “AM” and “Modulation”.

See Also

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

M-l 1

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

On/Off FM

(MOD)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you output the

generated frequency modulation waveforms to the rear panel AM/FM

OUTPUT connector. When scaled exponentially at 10 the

maximum output voltage is offset to 0 V and the minimum voltage

level is -4 V.

Programming Codes

MODulation:OUTput:SOURce FM

MODulation:OUTput:STATe

Analyzer: NONE

also see “FM” and “Modulation”.

See Also

Modulation

The synthesizer’s amplitude and pulse modulation performance is

directly tied to the ALC (Automatic Level Control) system. Refer to

the ALC block diagram in Figure M-l. The ALC system controls the

amplitude or power level of the RF output. A portion of the output

signal is detected, summed with the reference level signal, and the

difference (error) signal drives an integrate-and-hold circuit. The

integrator output drives the RF output power level via the linear

modulator. When the sum of the detected and reference signals is

0 volts, the output of the integrator is held at a constant level and

the RF output is leveled. This loop is bandwidth-limited by the

integrator and the integrate-and-hold circuit. Notice, however, that

there is a feedforward path that allows changes in power level that

are bandwidth-independent from the rest of the ALC loop. Power

level information supplied by the level DAC and AM input travels

General Circuit Theory

the feedforward path to drive a linear modulator. (See

additional information on the ALC system.)

for

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure M-l. ALC Block Diagram

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Amplitude modulation can be accepted from an external source at

the AM connector or can be internally generated by synthesizers with

Amplitude

Modulation

Option 002. The damage level of the AM input is

input impedance of the AM connector is A jumper on the

ALC board allows you to change the input impedance to 2

“Adjustments” in the Service Guide.) The AM can be scaled either

linearly at 100% per volt or exponentially at 10 per volt.

V DC. The

(See

When internal AM is chosen (Option

the rate and depth are set

by in the AM menu. The waveform menu provides a choice

of sine, square, triangle, ramp, or noise waveforms. The monitor

menu lets you output the internally generated modulation waveforms

to the rear panel AM/FM OUTPUT connector. The AM output is

scaled the same as it is generated, either

or 10

This

connector can drive or greater. The monitor menu also lets you

display the value of the AM depth.

UNLVLED Message

The maximum leveled output is limited by the synthesizer’s

maximum leveled output power specification. (Individual synthesizers

may be capable of greater leveled output power; the unleveled

message indicates the actual limit.) Amplitude modulation adds to

and subtracts from the reference RF power level. If an

message appears on the display, you may be trying to modulate

beyond the synthesizer’s maximum output power capability.

OVRMOD Message

The maximum AM depth is limited to approximately 90% by the

detector’s ability to sense low power levels. If you try to amplitude

modulate too deep without using deep AM mode (explained later),

you will see an

message displayed on the message line. Also,

if you modulate below -20

mode or below -50

ALC level without using deep AM

with deep AM or search ALC mode, you

will see an

message.

Dynamic Range

The ALC and attenuator combination (when an optional attenuator

is present) are automatically set by the synthesizer to keep the ALC

in its most accurate range (0 to -10

operating mode.

This is called the coupled

For applications where modulating across an attenuation switch point

is undesirable, you can uncouple the attenuator and manually set the

power level of the ALC and the attenuator.

For example, setting the power level to 0

give an ALC level of 0 and 0

mode, the attenuator can be set to 10

giving 0

in coupled mode will

of attenuation. In uncoupled

and the ALC to

output power and greater AM depth potential. The

ALC can now be varied over its entire range and the attenuator

remains at a fixed level.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Amplitude Modulation

Uncoupled mode can also be used for the following:

To increase the available AM depth if you are modulating near the

minimum power range of the ALC loop.

To offset the power sweep range.

To reduce AM noise by operating at a higher ALC level.

AM Rate

The maximum AM rate available is limited by the bandwidth of

the components in the RF path. At rates of about 100

integrator can no longer respond so the ALC loop is

the

opened. The feedforward path provides the capability to modulate at

much faster rates.

RF components in the ALC loop limit the ALC bandwidth to

250

to 100

High power and Option 006 synthesizers are also limited

by the components in the RF path. Synthesizers with

frequency doublers

the doubler for carrier frequencies greater than 20

are limited by the 100

bandwidth of

Note that

due to the feedforward scheme, AM bandwidth is not affected when

amplitude and pulse modulation are simultaneously activated.

Deep AM

Deep AM mode is a means of reducing distortion when the desired

AM depth is very deep (greater than 90%) or when modulating below

an ALC level of -20

Amplitude modulation is summed with

the reference level signal. The detected signal is compared to the

reference. Therefore, the ALC loop should follow the AM input.

However, the detector’s ability to sense low power levels limits the

maximum AM depth. When the modulation signal reduces the

output power level to a level which is below the detector’s range

limit, the error signal generated sends the integrator to rail, resulting

in gross AM distortion. This is where deep AM mode should be used.

Deep AM engages a comparator circuit (see Figure M-l) to sense the

power level of the detected signal. When the signal level is out of the

detector’s range, the loop integrator switch opens (opening the ALC

loop). The output of the integrator is frozen, applying a constant

drive to the modulator. Since the modulator’s most linear range is

at low power levels, the AM envelope distortion is minimal. When

the comparator senses a signal that is within the detector’s range, the

integrator switch is closed, re-engaging ALC loop leveling.

Figure

shows the leveled AM characteristics in the different

modes. The maximum leveled output with ALC engaged is shown as

the synthesizer’s maximum leveled output specification. (Individual

synthesizers may have more power; watch for an

The minimum level is limited by the detector’s range (approximately

-20 With deep AM engaged, the minimum level (where the

ALC loop is opened) is set to -13 This guarantees that the

message.)

detector can still sense the signal level with no distortion. With the

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Amplitude Modulation

ALC loop open, the minimum level is limited by the modulator’s

range to approximately -50

out

- - - - - -

Figure

Power Accuracy Over the AM Dynamic Range

Calibrating the Linear Modulator

The AM bandwidth calibration feature calibrates the linear

modulator gain at the current CW frequency. This results in more

accurate performance in deep AM mode when the ALC loop is

opened. Figure

shows the calibrated response of the modulator

compared to the uncalibrated response. If you choose to calibrate

“Always”, the synthesizer will automatically perform the calibration

whenever you change the CW frequency. Although this feature

provides more accurate performance, note that it also slows the

frequency switching time by 20 ms.

ALC Bandwidth

Since the ALC loop is open at power levels less than -13

deep AM mode, power levels at very slow AM rates are subject to

integrate-and-hold drift of typically 0.25 Setting the ALC

bandwidth to low reduces drift by a factor of 10 by switching a

larger capacitor into the integrator circuit. The larger capacitor

reduces the effects of leakage on the integrator. The ALC bandwidth

defaults at factory preset to the auto selection which normally

selects the appropriate bandwidth (high or low) for your application.

However, in this case (modulating with deep AM at a slow rate),

auto mode would have set the ALC bandwidth to high where a

setting of low would decrease drift. To make the bandwidth selection,

the synthesizer determines which functions are activated such as

frequency list mode, step sweep mode, search leveling mode, sweep

frequency mode, AM or pulse modulation, among others. (For a

complete explanation of the selection sequence, see “Getting Started,

Advanced”.)

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FM Modulation

Frequency modulation can be accepted from an external source at

the FM connector or can be internally generated by synthesizers

with Option 002. The damage level of the FM input is V DC.

A jumper on the All FM Driver

FM Modulation

The input impedance is set to

board allows you to change the input impedance to

(See “Adjustments” in the Service Guide.) The FM sensitivity can

be scaled to either 100

When internal FM is chosen (Option

are set by in the FM menu. The waveform menu provides

1 MHz/V, or 10 MHz/V.

the rate and deviation

a choice of sine, square, triangle, ramp, or noise waveforms. The

monitor menu lets you output the internally generated modulation

waveforms to the rear panel AM/FM OUTPUT connector. The

scale of the FM output depends on the FM deviation chosen. The

following table shows the scale versus deviation. The monitor menu

also lets you display the value of the FM deviation.

FM Coupling

Whether provided from an external source or generated internally

(Option

the FM system can be either AC or DC coupled. If

you choose AC coupled FM, you will be modulating a phase-locked

carrier. This is the specified synthesized operation. The modulation

rate must be 100

or greater. If not, the frequency changes

caused by the modulation are inside the phase-lock loop bandwidth

and the output will not be linear FM. For modulation frequencies

below 100

choose DC coupled FM. In this mode, the phase

locked loop is de-activated. This means that the synthesizer is

operating as an open loop sweeper. The synthesizer will not be

phase locked, and therefore, be aware that the phase noise and CW

frequency accuracy specifications do not apply.

Message (Maximum Deviation)

The maximum FM deviation is limited by the following two

conditions:

Maximum FM deviation must be less than 8 MHz and

Maximum FM deviation must be less than n x 5 x FM rate

(refer to the “Frequency Bands” specification for the value of n).

The following chart shows the limits of each band given these two

conditions. For example, in band 1 at a 1 MHz FM rate, the FM

deviation must be less than 5 MHz.

n (1) x 5 x FM Rate (1 MHz)

5 MHz.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FM Modulation

The FM rate can be decreased as long as the FM deviation remains

less than n x 5 x FM rate and less than 8 MHz.

Figure

FM Deviation and Rate Limits

If the FM deviation is set greater than the 8 MHz limit, it must

be decreased for specified performance. An message is

displayed on the message line if the FM deviation exceeds

n x 5 x FM rate. Then, either decrease the FM deviation or increase

the FM rate until both conditions for FM deviation are met.

At FM rate levels greater than those shown for each band

corresponding to the 8 MHz FM deviation level, the n x 5 x FM

rate value will always be greater than 8 MHz so the maximum FM

deviation is no longer limited by the FM rate, only by the maximum

limit of 8 MHz.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Modulation

Pulse modulation can be accepted from an external source at the

PULSE connector or can be internally generated. The damage levels

of the PULSE input are and -5 V DC. The input impedance is

Pulse Modulation

A function generator must be capable of driving TTL levels

load. With no input signal, the pulse input is held low, so

into a

activating pulse with no input causes RF output to shut off.

The synthesizer can also produce a 27.778

square wave for use in

HP scalar network analyzers. Synthesizers with Option 002 internally

generate a synthesized pulse. The synthesizer provides internal

pulse modulation with pulse widths adjustable with 1

(adjustable with 25 ns resolution with Option 002).

resolution

Leveling

Pulse leveling performance depends on the accuracy of the diode

detector which measures the RF amplitude. The ALC block

diagram, Figure

the synthesizer which controls a pulse modulator. The pulse input

is represented by trace 1 in Figure The pulse modulator is

shows the pulse modulation input signal to

either full on or full off. The amplitude, when the pulsed RF is on,

is controlled by the linear modulator used for CW leveling and AM.

Trace 2 is the resultant RF pulse, which is the RF output. This pulse

is detected by the diode detector. It trails the pulse input because of

propagation delays in the pulse modulator and its drive circuits.

The output of the detector is amplified by a logarithmic amplifier

(log amp). Trace 3 is the output of the log amp. Note that this

signal is delayed from the RF output signal and that the rise time

is slower. This is a result of the bandwidth of the detector and the

log amp. The amplitude of trace 3 is summed with the reference

signal from the level DAC and the difference (error) signal drives

The integrator output drives the RF

an integrate-and-hold circuit.

output power level via the linear modulator. When the sum of the

detected and reference signals is 0 volts, the output of the integrator

is held at a constant level and the RF output is leveled.

Trace 4 is the delayed signal from the pulse input which controls the

switch in the integrate-and-hold circuit. Trace 4 is timed to coincide

with trace 3. Since the integrate-and-hold switch is closed only when

trace 3 is high, the integrator responds to correct the power level

only when the RF power is on.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Modulation

Figure

ALC Block Diagram

(B) PULSE WAVEFORMS

PULSE INPUT

3 LOG AMP OUTPUT

S/H CONTROL

Figure

Pulse Modulation System

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Modulation

Leveling Narrow Pulses

For narrow pulses of less than 1

width, either use search leveling

mode or use unleveled operation. (If you do not, you will see the

output level continue to rise as the synthesizer tries to correct for the

off portion of the cycle.)

In search leveling mode, the RF amplitude is set with pulse

modulation off and the ALC loop closed. Then the loop integrator

output is measured. Next, the integrator is disconnected and the

modulator is driven directly with a DC voltage which has been set to

the value that was provided by the loop integrator. Any AM signal

present is added to this DC voltage. This procedure is automatic

with search leveling mode engaged. The level setting procedure is

automatically repeated whenever the carrier frequency or power level

is changed and takes approximately 250 ms. This procedure should

also be repeated periodically to correct for the effects of temperature

drift.

Unleveled operation can be used for very narrow pulses by opening

the ALC loop (see “Leveling Mode

The power level is set

in CW operation, with pulse modulation off, using an external power

meter. With Option 006, pulses as narrow as 20 ns can be produced

in this mode. Changes due to temperature drift can be expected in

this mode also.

Pulse Envelope

The best pulse envelopes are obtained with the peak RF function

(see “Peak RF Always”). This feature aligns the output filter

so that its

is centered on the RF output. The pulse

envelope changes with frequency and changes slightly with power

level. Synthesizers with Option 006 pulse capability vary little with

frequency.

The pulse envelope produced by the synthesizer has finite rise

time and overshoot. Below 2.3

are essentially independent of frequency, but above 2.3

the rise time and overshoot

synthesizers without Option 006, they are strongly influenced by the

shape and centering of the tracking YIG filter.

Source Match

The best source match is obtained at the synthesizer’s operating

frequency. In addition, synthesizers with certain RF components at

the output provide improved broadband source match. These include

synthesizers with Option 006, with high power output (HP

and

or with the Option 001 step attenuator set to

Performance can be improved by padding between the reflections.

At the source, for output power above -10

leveling mode to normal results in 0

setting the

attenuation. If enough

power is available, uncoupled operation can be used to improve the

synthesizer’s source match by inserting 10 attenuation and using

a 10 higher ALC level.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Modulation

Video Feedt hrough

Video feedthrough is a video signal at the modulation rate that is

superimposed on the RF envelope (see Figure

If large enough,

video feedthrough can disturb mixer balance, amplifier bias, crystal

detector output, etc. Because it is low frequency energy, it can

disturb systems that are not intended to deal with it, especially

demodulation systems. High band

YIG filter that essentially eliminates video feedthrough except in

the pulse modulator is after the YIG filter).

employs a tracking

Option 006 (b

Attempts to measure high band video feedthrough can turn out to

be measurements of ground currents in coaxial cables. Low band

z em o a low-level mixer followed by a high gain

pl y

amplifier. At high power levels

-10

the bias levels in the

amplifier shift slightly as the RF is turned on or off. The slew of the

bias from one level to another couples to the output and produces

the video feedthrough waveform. At low ALC levels (-10

another mechanism dominates. Mixer imbalance produces DC at the

output of the mixer, and its magnitude varies with RF amplitude and

modulator state. This shifting DC level couples through the amplifier

as video feedthrough spikes. In percentage terms, this mechanism

gets worse at low levels.

RF ENVELOPE

WITH

VIDEO FEEDTHROUGH

RF ENVELOPE

VIDEO

FEEDTHROUGH

Figure

Video Feedthrough

Slow Rise Time Pulse Modulation for Scalar Network Analyzers

For use with Hewlett-Packard scalar analyzers, the synthesizer

offers a scalar pulse modulation mode that provides approximately

rise and fall times. An internal oscillator provides the 27.778

square wave with no external connections necessary. The slow

waveform reduces the spectral width of the output, improving

measurements made on filters with steep skirts. A slow pulse rise

time (approximately 2

inputs as well.

is available for externally generated pulse

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Module Menu

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

accesses the source module selection softkeys.

Millimeter-wave source modules can be connected to the synthesizer

source module interface connectors (there is one each on the front

and rear panels). These

give you the option of letting the

synthesizer automatically look at both connectors for source modules

or telling the synthesizer to look only at the front or at the rear

connector. You can also turn off module sensing completely.

Sets the synthesizer to automatic

selection of the source module

(selects the front connector if source

modules are present at both front and

rear connectors). This is the default

after preset.

Module Select AUTO

Sets the synthesizer to select the source

module connected to the front panel

source module interface connector.

M odule Select Front

M odule Select R ear

M odule Select None

Sets the synthesizer to select the source

module connected to the rear panel

source module interface connector.

Disables source module sensing.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Module Select

POWER and FREQUENCY

2 and 5

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This command sets the automatic selection of the millimeter source

module interface connector. The synthesizer looks at both front and

rear connectors and determines the type of source module

(if any) connected. If a source module is present at both connectors,

the synthesizer selects the front connector as the active one. After

selecting the interface the instrument frequency limits and multiplier

are altered accordingly. However, the leveling point is not changed.

See Leveling Point Module to set the synthesizer to level at the

output of the source module.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active. This

feature is the default after preset.

Programming Codes

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect:AUTO

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect:AUTO?

Analyzer: NONE

Module Menu

See Also

Module Select Front

Function Group

Menu Map

POWER and FREQUENCY

2 and 5

This command causes the synthesizer to examine only the front

panel source module interface connector to determine the type

of source module (if any) connected. The instrument frequency

limits and multiplier are altered according to the source module

connected. However, the leveling point is not changed. See

Leveling Point Module to set the synthesizer to level at the

output of the source module.

Description

An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming Codes

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect?

Analyzer: NONE

Module Menu

See Also

Module Select

POWER and FREQUENCY

2 and 5

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This command disables millimeter source module sensing. The

synthesizer will not alter its frequency limits and multiplier even

if a source module is connected to either source module interface

connector.

An asterisk next, to the key label indicates this feature is active.

Programming Codes

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect?

Analyzer: NONE

See Also

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Rear

POWER and FREQUENCY

2 and 5

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This command causes the synthesizer to examine only the rear

panel source module interface connector to determine the type

of source module (if any) connected. The instrument frequency

limits and multiplier are altered according to the source module

connected. However, the leveling point is not changed. See

Leveling Point Module to set the synthesizer to level at the

output of the source module.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active.

Programming Codes

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect?

Analyzer: NONE

Module Menu

See Also

Monitor Menu

Function Group (MOD)

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) accesses the menu which allows you

to output internally-generated AM and FM waveforms to the rear

panel AM/FM OUTPUT connector. It also accesses the

which allow you to display the AM depth and FM deviation of the

modulation waveforms.

Outputs the AM waveform to the AM/FM

On/Off AM

OUTPUT connector.

On/Off FM

Outputs the FM waveform to the AM/FM

OUTPUT connector.

Displays the AM depth of the modulating

signal.

Meter On/Off AM

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Displays the FM deviation of the modulating

signal.

Me t e r

SCPI: NONE, see the individual

Analyzer: NONE

listed.

Programming Codes

See Also

(MOD), also see “Modulation”.

more n/m

ALL FUNCTION GROUPS

ALL MENU MAPS

Function Group

Menu Map

The more

at one of the menu maps. Notice the line (keypath) drawn from

more By selecting this the next page of the menu is

revealed. If you are viewing the last page of the menu, selecting

allows you to page through the menus. Look

Description

more n/m returns the first page of the menu. In this

represents the page you are on and “m” represents the total number

of pages in the menu.

“n”

SCPI: Not Applicable

Analyzer: Not Applicable

Programming Codes

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mtr

POWER

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

accesses the meter measure softkeys.

Measures flatness correction values for all

Corr All

frequency points in the flatness correction

array.

Measures a flatness correction value for the

frequency point currently in the active line of

the flatness correction array.

Measures flatness correction values for all

frequency points in the flatness correction

array that have no correction values assigned.

Corr Undef

The meter measure function uses an external HP

power meter

to automatically measure and store power correction values for the

frequency points requested.

SCPI: NONE, see Fltness Menu

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Flatness Me n u

“Creating and Applying the User Flatness Array,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Peak RF Always

POWER, USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

appears in two locations: the POWER Tracking

and the USER CAL Tracking Menu. The operation is the same in

both locations.

This

causes the synthesizer, when in CW or manual-sweep

output mode, to align the output filter (SYTM) so that its

is centered on the RF output. Peaking is used to obtain both the

maximum available power and spectral purity, and the best pulse,

FM envelopes, at a given frequency. This peaking occurs each time

the frequency is changed, or every seven minutes. An asterisk next to

the key label indicates this function is active.

SCP I : CALibration:PEAKing:AUTO

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer:

function on, RPO function off.

Auto Track, Peak RF Once, Tracking Me n u

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference P-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Peak RF Once

POWER, USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

appears in two locations: the POWER Tracking Menu

and the USER CAL Tracking

both locations.

. The operation is the same in

This

causes an instantaneous, one-time execution of the

peaking function when the synthesizer is in the CW or manual sweep

mode. It aligns the output filter (SYTM) so that its

centered on the RF output.

SCPI:

Analyzer: SHAK

Programming Codes

See Also

Auto Tracking,

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance,” in Chapter 1.

Peak RF

Tracking Menu

POWER

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you control the output power level of the

Description

synthesizer. The synthesizer has different power leveling modes and

leveling points, and as such, the (POWER

key controls different

aspects of the power level (ALC) system.

The following is an explanation of power level operation in the

different ALC system configurations.

In Normal, Internal, the [POWER LEVEL) key controls the output

power level of the synthesizer directly. The attenuator (if present)

is controlled together with the complete range of the ALC system

to -20

When you press [POWER LEVEL), the active entry area displays:

POWER LEVEL :

X . XX

where X represents a numeric value. The data display area indicates:

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LEVEL)

INT :

x.xx.

In Normal, Uncoupled Attenuator, the (POWER LEVEL) key controls

the Level

within the ALC level range

uncoupled from the ALC system and is controlled separately with the

Set key.

and Level Control

(see Figure A-l)

to -20

The attenuator is

When you press (POWER LEVEL), the active entry area displays:

A L C :

where X represents a numeric value. The data display area indicates:

Power

INT :

x.xx .

In Normal, External Detector

the [POWER LEVEL) key

controls the output power of the synthesizer as compared to the

external detector feedback voltage. The attenuator

(if present) is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system and the

(POWER LEVEL key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits

(see Figure A-l) within the ALC level range

to -20

This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from a

negative-output diode detector to the EXT ALC connector.

When you press (POWER LEVEL), the active entry area displays:

EXT POWER:

where X represents a numeric value. The data display area indicates:

EXT :

x.xx .

In Normal, Power Meter

the (POWER LEVEL) key

controls the output power of the synthesizer as compared to the

feedback voltage of the power meter. The attenuator (if present) is

automatically uncoupled from the ALC system and the

POWER LEVEL

key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits (see

Figure A-l) within a more restricted range of the ALC level.

Instead of the 45

available in this mode, with the upper end of the range set by the

Pwr Range This mode of operation requires a feedback

range of the ALC in other modes, 12

connection from the recorder output of a power meter.

When you press (POWER LEVEL), the active entry area displays:

POWER LEVEL:

where X represents a numeric value. The data display area indicates:

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MTR:

x.xx .

In Normal, Module, the (POWER LEVEL) key controls the output

power of the synthesizer as compared to the feedback voltage from

a millimeter-wave source module. The attenuator (if present) is

automatically uncoupled from the ALC system and the (POWER LEVEL

key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits (see

Figure A-l) within the ALC level range

to -20

This

mode of operation requires a feedback connection from the module to

the synthesizer through the SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE.

When you press [POWER LEVEL), the active entry area displays:

MODULE LEVEL:

where X represents a numeric value. The data display area indicates:

MDL:

x.xx .

there is no feedback voltage to level the power, so power

level is uncalibrated. A leveling point is not specified in this mode.

The (POWER LEVEL) key controls the linear modulator directly, from 0

to approximately -80

The attenuator (if present) is automatically

uncoupled from the ALC system.

When you press [POWER LEVEL), the active entry area displays:

REFERENCE:

where X represents a numeric value. The data display area indicates:

OFF:

x.xx

and the message line indicates: UNLVLED.

In Search, any of the leveling points can be specified and used as the

comparison feedback voltage. Basically, this mode operates the same

as ALCoff after the searched-for power level is reached. The active

entry area displays different information depending on the leveling

point chosen.

SCPI: POWer[:LEVEL] <num>[lvl suffix] or

Analyzer: PL

Programming Codes

CONNECTORS, Det Gal Me nu,

Set

Tracking Menu,

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POWER

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

accesses the power function softkeys.

Accesses the

in the flatness

correction menu.

Power Offset

Changes the displayed power to include

an offset, but does not change the

output power of the synthesizer.

Activates the linear, power-per-frequency

mode of power output, and makes RF

slope (dB/GHz) the active function.

Power Slope

Power Sweep

Set

Activates power sweep mode and makes

power sweep

function.

the active

Activates uncoupled attenuator as

the mode of operation and makes the

attenuator value the active function.

Tracking Menu

Accesses the

in the tracking

calibration menu.

Uncouples the attenuator from the ALC

system.

Allows you to enter values for the power

level step size.

Power

All RF power functions except for power level, flatness on/off, and

RF on/off are contained in the power menu.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above,

ON/OFF], (POWER LEVEL), and

“Getting Started Basic” and “Getting Started Advanced,” in

Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power Offset

Function Group

POWER

This

Menu Map

Description

changes the mapping of absolute power parameters on

input to the synthesizer. It does not change the RF output produced

by the synthesizer. The equation used to determine the displayed

value is:

Entered or Displayed Power = Hardware Power (ALC)

Offset.

Active

Programming Codes

POWer:OFFset:STATe

POWer:OFFset

Analyzer: NONE

[POWER LEVEL) and POWER

Power Slope

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you compensate for system, cable, and waveguide

variations due to changes in frequency, by linearly increasing or

decreasing power output as the frequency increases. RF slope values

may range from -2.50 to

per

The power at the

beginning of the sweep equals the current power level. An asterisk

next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

POWer:SLOPe:STATe

POWer:SLOPe

Analyzer:

functions in the fundamental units of

code where m is 1 (on) or 0 (off); d is the numerical value

function on, SLO function off. Note that because SL

you program the SL

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power Sweep

and t is either “DB” or the ASCII LF terminator. For

example, for a slope of 1.5 dB/GHz use this procedure:

1. 1.5 dB/GHz = 1.5 Hz

2. 1.5 Hz =

3. The programming code is

DB”

LEVEL), Power Sweep

“Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation” in Chapter 1.

Power Sweep

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

enables the power sweep function. RF output power

can be swept both positively and negatively over a selected range.

The level of the power sweep starting point is the power level

programmed. Power sweep widths can be 45

wide in either

direction. However, the power sweep range is dependent on

the ALC level set. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that

this feature is active.

Programming Codes

POWer:MODE

POWer:STARt

POWer:SPAN <num>[level

Analyzer:

function on, PSO function off.

POWER LEVEL ,

“Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation” in Chapter 1.

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUMENT STATE

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

This

(green) causes the synthesizer to perform a short

Description

version of self-test, and initializes the synthesizer to a standard

starting configuration. Two states can be defined for the standard

configuration: Factory or User.

Press

standard configuration. If the red LED adjacent to THE [PRESET)

KEY (labeled INSTR CHECK) t y

at any time to test the synthesizer and restore to a

s a on after preset, the synthesizer

failed self-test; refer to “Troubleshooting Manual”.

Cycling power with the POWER switch does not have the same

effect as presetting the synthesizer. Cycling power causes the

synthesizer to display the programming language, the HP-IB address,

and the firmware revision date. After the synthesizer displays this

data, it restores its configuration to the state before power was

turned off.

SCPI: SYSTem:PRESet[:EXECute]

Analyzer: IP

Programming Codes

See Also

Preset M ode Factory,

M ode User

“Changing the Preset Parameters,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Factory

Preset Mode

Factory

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

sets the standard starting configuration of the

key is pressed, as set by the

synthesizer when the

manufacturer. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this

feature is active. The following is a description of the configuration.

Start sweep at the minimum specified frequency.

Stop sweep at the maximum specified frequency.

Power level set at 0

Sweep time set to auto.

CONT sweep.

Sweep mode ramp.

ALC leveling point internal.

ALC leveling mode normal.

Markers set to activate at the center frequency of the sweep.

All function values stored in memory registers 1 through 9 remain

in their previous states.

The checksum of the calibration data is calculated, and if an error

is detected, the calibration data in protected memory is used. If

the checksum of the protected data is not correct, then default

values are used an error message (EEROM FAILED, LOST CAL)

is displayed.

SCP I : SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE

Analyzer: IP, which is the same as

Programming Codes

See Also

PRESET

Preset Mode User

“Changing the Preset Parameters,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preset Mode User

SYSTEM

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

sets the standard starting configuration of the

synthesizer when the (PRESET) key is pressed, as set by the user. You

can define any starting conditions: Set up the synthesizer with the

conditions you want, then select Preset Mode User . Now whenever

you press

the synthesizer returns to the configuration

you set. If preset mode user is set, when you press (PRESET), the

synthesizer displays the following:

*** USER DEFINED PRESET RECALLED ***

You can still do a factory preset. When the user preset mode

is active, the

Factory Preset appears when you press

(PRESET). An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature

is active.

SCPI:SYSTem:PRESet TYPE USER

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Preset Mode Factory, Save User Preset

“Changing the Preset Parameters,” in Chapter 1.

Printer Adrs

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets the synthesizer recognize a printer address between

Description

0 and 30. The synthesizer can act as a controller for a printer during

self-test, if the log-to-a-printer feature is initiated.

SCP I : DIAGnostic:INSTrument:PRINTer:ADDRess <num>

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Adrs Menu,

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MENU SELECT

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you view previous menus. All menus visited

Description

from the last preset are remembered and displayed in a

“last-visited-first-seen” order. Refer to Figure P-l, and follow the

arrow paths as indicated.

SOME OTHER

PREVIOUS MENU

AREA

Figure P-l. How

Works

The sequence of keystrokes that created the movement shown in

Figure P-l is:

1. FREQUENCY

mare

List Menu

Delete Menu

P-l 1

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

more n/m

Programming

Language

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you select Analyzer Language as the synthesizer’s

interface language. This language uses HP

mnemonics and

provides HP network analyzer compatibility. Any commands issued

within 100 ms of a change in language may be ignored or lost. An

asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: SYSTem:LANGuage

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Adrs

ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER

“Getting Started Programming,” in Chapter 1.

“INSTALLATION,” Chapter 3.

Programming

Language CIIL

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you select CIIL as the synthesizer’s external

interface language. The use of this language requires the M.A.T.E.

option (Option 700) to be installed. Any commands issued within

100 ms of a change in language may be ignored or lost. An asterisk

next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming Language

SCPI: SYSTem:LANGuage CIIL

Analyzer: CIIL

Programming Codes

See Also

Adrs Menu

The M.A.T.E. option (Option 700) is documented in a separate

manual supplement called, HP 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers

Option 700 Manual Supplement.

Programming

Language

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI)

is the instrument control programming language adopted by

Hewlett-Packard. SCPI provides commands that are common

from one Hewlett-Packard product to another, eliminating “device

specific” commands.

Description

This

lets you select SCPI as the synthesizer’s external

interface language. This is the default language set at the factory.

Any commands issued within 100 ms of a change in language may be

ignored or lost. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this

feature is active.

SCPI: SYSTem:LANGuage SCPI

Analyzer: SYST or SCPI

Programming Codes

See Also

Adrs Menu, SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY, SCPI STATUS

“Getting Started Programming,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pt Trig

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

accesses the list mode point trigger softkeys.

Automatically steps the synthesizer

to next point in the frequency list.

List

Pt Trig Auto

Steps the synthesizer to the next

point in the frequency list when an

HP-IB trigger is received.

List Mode Pt Trig Bus

List Mode Pt Trig Ext

Steps the synthesizer to the next

point in the frequency list when

an external hardware trigger is

received.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above, List Menu

Pulse

Normal

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set a value for the internal

pulse generator’s pulse delay. The output pulse is delayed from

the leading edge of the PULSE SYNC OUT signal. The range of

acceptable values is from 0 to a maximum of 25 ns less than the

period. The factory preset default is 0 ns. Use the numeric entry

keys, arrow keys, or rotary knob to change the value. When this

feature is active, its current value is displayed in the active entry

area.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Delay

SCP I : PULM:INTernal:DELay <num>[time

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

MOD

a so see “Pulse” and “Modulation”.

Pulse Delay

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(Option 002 only) lets you set a value for the internal

pulse generator’s pulse delay. The output pulse is delayed from the

leading edge of the PULSE input signal. The range of acceptable

values is from 225 ns to 419 ms. The factory preset default is 225 ns.

Use the numeric entry keys, arrow keys, or rotary knob to change the

value. When this feature is active, its current value is displayed in

the active entry area.

SCP I : PULM:EXTernal:DELay <num>[time

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “Pulse” and “Modulation”.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Menu

Function Group (MOD)

Menu Map

Description

This description is for the Pulse Menu

for synthesizers

go to

without Option 002. For the Option 002 Pulse Menu

the “Pulse Menu” heading that follows this one.

This

reveals the pulse parameter softkeys.

Sets the internal pulse generator’s

pulse period.

Pulse Period

Sets the internal pulse generator’s

pulse repetition rate.

Pulse Rate

Applies the appropriate filter

(fast, slow) to both internal and

external pulse waveforms.

Pulse Rise Time Auto

Applies a fast rise pulse filter to

both internal and external pulse

waveforms.

Pulse Rise Time Fast

Applies a slow rise pulse filter to

both internal and external pulse

waveforms.

Pulse Rise Time Slow

Sets the internal pulse generator’s

pulse width.

Pulse Width

listed above,

(MOD)

See Also

Pulse Menu

Function Group

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Map

Description

This description is for the Pulse Menu

for synthesizers with

go to the

Option 002. For the standard 002 Pulse Menu

“Pulse Menu” heading that precedes this one.

This

accesses the pulse modulation softkeys. These

engage external, internal, and scalar pulse modulation. They allow

you to define the rise time, and give access to the internal menu for

defining the parameters of the internally-generated pulse modulation.

Pulse

Toggles on and off the pulse modulation mode for

an external pulse source.

Pulse

Int

Scalar

Toggles on and off the internal scalar modulation

mode.

Toggles on and off the internal pulse modulation

mode.

Gives access to the internal menu for defining

the parameters of the internally-generated pulse

modulation.

al Menu

Pulse Rise Time Fast

Applies a fast rise pulse filter to both internal and

external pulse waveforms.

Rise Time Slow

Applies a slow rise pulse filter to both internal and

external pulse waveforms.

Pulse Rise Time Auto

Automatically applies the appropriate filter

(fast or slow) to both internal and external pulse

waveforms.

Inverts the pulse input logic. When active, a

input turns RF power off.

Invert Input

SCPI: NONE, see the individual

Analyzer: NONE

listed.

Programming Codes

See Also

(MOD), also see “Modulation” and “Pulse”.

P- 17

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates the pulse modulation mode for an external

pulse source. The pulse source is connected to the PULSE INPUT

BNC connector and fed to the pulse modulator through a buffer

circuit.

When pulse modulation is in effect, the RF output is turned on

(programmed power is produced) and off

attenuation) at a

rate determined by the pulse modulation input. Pulse and amplitude

modulation can be in effect simultaneously. An asterisk next to the

key label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

PULSe:SOURce

PULSe[:STATe]

Analyzer:

function on,

function off.

Pulse Menu

CONNECTORS,

See Also

Pulse

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates pulse modulation mode using the internal pulse

generator. No external connection is needed. When internal pulse

modulation is selected the PULSE INPUT BNC becomes an output

for the internally generated signal. An asterisk next to the

label indicates that this feature is active. The pulse parameters

(width, period, rate, rise time, etc.) are controlled by softkeys. See

Pulse Menu (or

Menu for synthesizers with Option 002)

for a list of these softkeys.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse

Programming Codes

PULSe:SOURce

PULSe[:STATe]

Analyzer: NONE

Pulse Menu

Pulse

Scalar

(MOD)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates pulse modulation mode, and sets the internal

pulse generator to produce 27.778

(18 pulse width, 36 pulse period). The rise and fall times of

the RF envelope are approximately 2 These pulses allow proper

square wave pulses

operation with HP scalar network analyzers in ac detection mode.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

PULSe:SOURce

PULSe[:STATe]

Analyzer: SHPM function on,

function off.

Pulse Menu

“INSTALLATION,” Chapter 3.

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Period

(MOD)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator’s

to 65.5

pulse period. The range of acceptable values is from 2

ms. The factory preset value is 2 ms. When this feature is active, its

current value is displayed in the active entry area.

SCPI: PULSe:TIMing:PERiod <num>[time suffix] or

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Pulse Menu

Pulse Rate

MODULATION

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you set the internal pulse generators pulse repetition

The

Description

rate. The repetition rate can vary from 15.26 Hz to 500

factory preset value is 500 Hz. When this feature is active, its current

value is displayed in the active entry area.

SCPI: PULse:FREQuency <num>[freq suffix] or

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Pulse Menu

HP 8360

Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Rise

Pulse Rise Time

MODULATION

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the pulse rise time to depend on the state of

the synthesizer pulse scalar function. If pulse scalar is on, rise time is

set to slow. Conversely if pulse scalar is off, then the rise time is set

to fast. The factory default is pulse rise time set to auto. An asterisk

next to the key label indicates that this function is active.

SCPI: PULM:SLEW:AUTO

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Pulse Menu

Pulse Rise Time

Fast

MODULATION

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you set the pulse rise time to

ns regardless of

Description

any other conditions. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that

this function is active.

SCP I : PULM:SLEW <num>[time

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Pulse Menu

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Rise Time

MODULATION

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the synthesizer to apply a slow rise pulse

filter to both internal and external pulse waveforms. This results in

pulses having approximately 2

rise/fall times. An asterisk next to

the key label indicates that this function is active.

SCP I : PULM:SLEW <num>[time

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Pulse Menu

Pulse Width

(MOD)

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator’s

pulse width. The range of acceptable values is from 1

to 65.5 ms.

The factory preset value is 1 ms. When this feature is active, its

current value is displayed in the active entry area.

SCPI: PULSe:INTernal:WIDTh <num>[time suffix] or

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Pulse Menu

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Range

Pwr Mtr Range

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

(from

lets you specify a range of operation

to -60 for an external power meter, when a power

meter is used to level power externally. The factory preset value is

The value specified for Mtr Range directly affects the

power level range for power meter leveling points. When this feature

is active, its current value is displayed in the active entry area.

SCPI: POWer:RANGe <num>[power

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Leveling Point

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

This

retrieves a front panel setting that was previously

Description

stored in a SAVE register (1 through 8).

SCP I : *RCL <num>

The above is an IEEE 488.2 common command.

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer:

where n= a numeric value from 0 to 9.

(SAVE), SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY

“Saving and Recalling an Instrument State,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Ref Menu

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

reveals the

in the frequency standard menu.

Automatically selects the frequency

standard to be used by the

synthesizer.

MHz Freq

Auto,

Standard

Sets the synthesizer to accept an

external frequency standard as its

reference.

Freq Standard

Sets the synthesizer to use its

internal frequency standard as its

reference.

Operating and Programming Reference R-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ref

MHz Freq Standard None

Sets the synthesizer to free-run

operation, where no frequency

standard is used.

SCPI: ROSCillator:SOURce

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above.

(RF ON/OFF)

POWER

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

turns the RF power output on or off. Press

is off, power is off, and RF OFF

If the yellow LED above the

appears in the message line of the display. Press the key again to

turn on RF power and restore the power value last entered.

SCPI: POWer[:STATe]

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer:

power on,

power off.

(MOD),

ROTARY KNOB

Function Group

Menu Map

ENTRY

NONE

The rotary knob is active whenever the entry area is on. It controls

a rotary pulse generator that allows analog-type adjustment of the

active entry area. Although the rotary knob has the feel of analog

control, it is actually a digital control that generates 120 pulses per

revolution.

Description

NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

ARROW KEYS, ENTRY KEYS

“Entry Area,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

This

allows up to eight different front panel settings to

Description

be stored in memory registers 1 through 8. Synthesizer settings

can then be recalled with the key. A memory register

can be alternated with the current front panel setting using the

Regs

The information stored in memory registers is retained in memory

indefinitely when ac line power is constantly available, or for

approximately three years without line power. Pressing

not erase the memory registers (1 through 8).

does

settings automatically) and can not be accessed through the

key. Likewise, register 9 is reserved for user preset storage and can

not be accessed with the [SAVE) key. Pressing

0, but not register 9.

erases register

SCP I :

The above is an IEEE 488.2 common command.

Analyzer: where a numeric value from 1 to 8.

<num>

Programming Codes

See Also

Clear Memory,

Save Lock

Regs,

“Saving and Recalling an Instrument State,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference S-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save Lock

SYSTEM

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

lets you disable the save function. It prohibits the

saving of the present instrument state into a save/recall memory

asterisk next to the key label indicates that this function is active.

Programming Codes

SYSTem:KEY:ENABle

Analyzer: SHSV locks the registers, SHRC unlocks the registers.

Security Menu

See Also

“Saving and Recalling an Instrument State,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Save User Preset

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you store the present state of operation to be used

as the PRESET state. Set the synthesizer to the desired operating

conditions. Select Save User Preset . The display shows:

- -

User Defined Preset Saved

To activate this stored information, you must set the preset mode to

User.

SCPI:

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer: NONE

Preset Mode User

“Changing the Preset Parameters,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

The HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers conform to the 1990.0

version of SCPI.

SCPI Conformance

Information

The following are the SCPI confirmed commands implemented by the

HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers:

:AM

:FM

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

:AOFF

:ALC

:BANDwidth(:BWIDth?

n :PULM

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

:ROSCillator

:NTRansition

:NTRansition?

:PTRansition

:PTRansition?

:NTRansition

:NTRansition?

:PTRansition

:PTRansition?

:LLIMit

:LLIMit?

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

:GPIB

The following are the SCPI approved commands implemented by the

HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers:

Instrument-specific diagnostic commands:

:ABUS

:ABUS?

:ADD

:PMETer

:IORW

:IORW?

:LED

:IOCHeck

:IOCHeck?

:FNCW

:FNDN

:FNUP

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

:IF

:SAMP

:YODacs?

:YTMDacs

:SRECeiver

:ASTate

:ASTate?

:RSWeep

:DESC?

:LOG

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

The following are the commands implemented by the HP 8360 series

synthesized sweepers which are not part of the SCPI definition:

:AM

:AlO:MGAin

:AM

:PMETer

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

:ALL

:ARRay[i]

:ARRay[i]?

:SOURce[i]?

n :FM

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

:AM?

:FM?

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

:MSIB

:NTRansition

:NTRansition?

:PTRansition

:PTRansition?

:SREceiver

:NTRansition

:NTRansition?

:PTRansition

:PTRansition?

:XFER

:PRIN ter

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conformance Information

:KEY

:MMHead

:ODELay

:ODELay?

n :TSWeep

:AM

:AM?

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SCPI COMMAND

SUMMARY

This entry is organized as follows:

Introduction

1. IEEE 488.2 common commands in alphabetical order.

2. Command table of SCPI programming commands.

3. Alphabetical listing of commands with descriptions.

IEEE 488.2 Common

Commands

Clear the Status Byte, the Data Questionable Event Register, the

Standard Event Status Register, the Standard Operation Status

registers that are summarized in the Status Byte.

Sets and queries the value of the Standard Event Status Enable

Queries the value of the Standard Event Status Register. This is a

destructive read.

This returns an identifying string to the HP-IB. The response is in

the following format: HEWLETT-PACKARD,model,serial number ,DD

MMM YY, where the actual model number, serial number, and firmware

revision of the synthesizer queried is passed.

This returns a long string of device specific characters that, when

sent back to the synthesizer, restores that instrument state.

Operation complete command. The synthesizer generates the OPC

message in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending

operations have finished (such as, “sweep” or “selftest”).

*OPC?

Operation complete query. The synthesizer returns an ASCII “1”

when all pending operations have finished.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

*OPT?

This returns a string identifying any device options.

The instrument state is recalled from the specified memory register.

The value range is from 0 to 8.

The synthesizer is set to a predefined condition as follows:

AM:DEPTH value is 50%

valueis1

AM:MODE

AM:SOURce

AM:STATe OFF

AM:TYPE

CALibration:PEAKing:AUTO OFF

CALibration:POWer:ATTenationO DBM

CALibration:POWer:RANGel

CALibration:SPAN:AUTO OFF

CORRection:FLATness? returns

clear

CORRection:FLATness:POINts? returns

CORRection:STATe OFF

DIAGnostics:ABUS:AVERage 1

DIAGnostics:TEST:ENABle ALL

DIAGnostics:TEST:LOG:SOURceFAIL

OFF

DIAGnostics:TEST:LOOP OFF

1 MHz

FM:COUPlingAC

FM:FILTer:HPASs

1 MHz

FM:SENSitivity

FM:SOURce

FM:STATe OFF

valueis

OFF

calculatedfromspan

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

OFF

100

returnsal

returnsa1

LIST:MANual 1

LIST:MODEAUTO

returnsal

LIST:TRIGger:SOURce

OFF

:AMPLitude:VALue 2 DBM

valuesameas

value

OFF

POWer:ALC:BANDwidth:AUTO ON

POWer:ALC:CFACtor -16 DBM

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE:AUTO ON

POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

POWer:CENTerO DBM

0 DBM

POWer:MODEFIXed

POWer:SLOPeO

POWer:SLOPe:STATe OFF

POWer:SPAN 0 DB

POWer:STARt 0 DBM

POWer:STATe OFF

POWer:STEP:AUTO ON

10 DB

POWer:STOP 0 DBM

KHZ

PULSe:WIDth

PULM:EXTernal:POLarityNORMal

PULM:INTernal:DELay value is 0

valueis500

PULM:INTernal:GATE OFF

PULM:INTernal:TRIGger:SOURce

PULM:SLEW

PULM:SLEW:AUTO ON

PULM:SOURce

PULM:STATe OFF

ROSCillator:SOURce:AUTO ON

100

OFF

SWEep:POINts 11

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SWEep:STEPvalueis

SWEep:TIMEMINimum

SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON

SWEep:TIME:LLIMit

SWEep:

SWEep : MODE AUTO

SWEep:

ion

0.50

SWEep:MARKer:STATe OFF

SYSTem:ALTernate:STATe OFF

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess 19

SYSTem:KEY:ENABle SAVE

SYSTem:MMHead:SELect:AUTO ON

SYSTem:SECurity:COUNt 1

UNIT:AMPCT *UNIT:POWerDBM

The present instrument state is stored in the specified memory

error occurs if you try to save state 0.

Sets and queries the value of the Service Request Enable Register.

Queries the Status Byte. This is a non-destructive read.

This command performs the same function as the Group Execute

Trigger command defined by IEEE 488.1.

*TST?

A full

is performed, without data logging or looping, and

returns one of the following error codes:

Definition

Error Code

Test passed.

Test failed.

Test not run yet. (This is an unlikely event.)

Test aborted.

Can not execute the test.

Can not execute the test, test skipped.

Unrecognized result, software defect.

-1

This causes the synthesizer to wait for the pending commands to

be completed before executing any other commands. For example,

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

sending the command:

allows for synchronous sweep operation. It causes the synthesizer to

start a sweep and wait until the sweep is completed before executing

the next command.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

Table S-l. HP 8360

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter

Allow ed Va lu es

A M

AM d ep th

3 t o 40

AM fr equ en cy

w a vefor m

exten d ed n u m er ic

d iscr et e

su ffix]

AM d e p t h

AM sou r ce

st a t e

d iscr et e

Boolea n

d iscr et e

AM t yp e

:AM

a u t o ca lib r a t e

Boolea n

a u t o R F p ea k

:P ME Te r

typ e of

d et ca l

d iscr et e

p ow er cor r ection

va lu e

su ffix]

ext en d ed n u m er ic

fla tn ess a r r a y

to ca l

d iscr et e

<n u m > [lvl su ffix]

m ea su r ed p ow er

ext en d ed n u m er ic

a u t o ca lib r a t e

st a t e

Boolea n

P a r a m et er t yp es a r e exp la in ed in t h e “Get t in g St a r t ed

ch a p ter .

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

COMMAND SUMMARY (continued)

Table S-l. HP 8360

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter

Allow ed Va lu es

exten d ed n u m er ic

0 t o 288

:LOG

llo g w h e n

s t a t e

d iscr et e

Boolea n

st a t e

Boole a n

exten d ed n u m er ic

0 t o 288

n u m b er

n u m b er of

selft est s

con d it ion

of selft est s

st a t e

Boole a n

F M

cou p lin g typ e

d iscr et e

p ea k F M d evia tion

exten d ed n u m er ic

<n u m > [fr eq su ffix]

F M AC Ba n d w id th

exten d ed n u m er ic

<n u m > [fr eq su ffix]

F M fr eq u en cy

F M w a vefor m

exten d ed n u m er ic

d iscr et e

su ffix]

exten d ed n u m er ic

F M sou r ce

st a t e

d iscr et e

Boole a n

sp ecified fr eq range

ext en d ed n u m er ic

exten d ed n u m er ic

Boole a n

cen t er fr eq

CW fr e q

sp ecified fr eq r a n ge

cou p led to

cen t er fr eq

exten d ed n u m er ic

sta r t/stop lim its

m a n u a l fr eq

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table S-l. HP 8360

COMMAND SUMMARY (continued)

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter

Allow ed Va lu es

fr ee m od e

fr eq m u lt

d iscr et e

exten d ed n u m er ic

t o -3 6

st a t e

Boolea n

fr eq offset

exten d ed n u m er ic

t o -99.999

Boole a n

st a t e

fr eq sp a n

exten d ed n u m er ic

t o MAX-MIN

sp ecified fr eq r a n ge

sta r t fr eq

exten d ed n u m er ic

a u t o fr eq st ep

fr eq step

Boolea n

exten d ed n u m er ic

r a n ge or

ext en d ed n u m er ic

sp ecified fr eq r a n ge or

stop fr eq

Boolea n

sw eep

im m ed ia t ely

LIST

(0.1 t o 3200

ext en d ed n u m er ic

exten d ed n u m er ic

d w ell tim e

{sp ecified fr eq

list fr eq

ext en d ed n u m er ic

n u m e r ic

[MAXim u m lMINim u m ]

t o m a xim u m d efin ed

n u m of fr eq p oin t s

n u m of p oin t s

to lock on

d iscr et e

list sw eep m od e

t o -40

ext en d ed n u m er ic

n u m e r ic

cor r ect ion level

n u m of

levels

list t r ig sou r ce

d iscr et e

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table S-l. HP 8360

COMMAND SUMMARY (continued)

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter

Allow ed Va lu es

[n ] is 1 t o 5, 1 is t h e d efa u lt

st a t e

Boolea n

exten d ed n u m er ic

a m p m a r k er

d ep th

:AO F F

n u m e r ic

d iffer en ce b et w een

tw o m a r k er s

t o

ext en d ed n u m er ic

sp ecified fr eq r a n ge

m a r k er fr equ en cy

d iscr et e

n u m e r ic

Boolea n

m a r k er m od e

d elta m a r k er r ef

st a t e

1 t o 5

ou tp u t m od sou r ce

ou tp u t m od sta te

state

d iscr et e

Boolea n

:ALC

exten d ed n u m er ic

su ffix]

ALC b w id t h

b w id t h select ion

cou p lin g fa ctor

Boolea n

ext en d ed n u m er ic

0 t o

:CF ACt or

d iscr et e

Boolea n

levelin g p oin t

st a t e

Boolea n

0 t o 90 [DB] or

ext en d ed n u m er ic

set t in g

Boolea n

cou p led

sp ecified p ow er r a n ge or

ext en d ed n u m er ic

p ow er sw eep

cen ter

ext en d ed n u m er ic

ou tp u t level

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

Table S-l. HP 8360

COMMAND SUMMARY (continued)

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter

Allow ed Va lu es

d iscr et e

p ow er m od e

ext en d ed n u m er ic

p ow er eq u a t ion

offset

su ffix] or

Boolea n

st a t e

ext en d ed n u m er ic

-30 t o

p ow er m et er

r a n ge

sea r ch m od e

p ow er slop e

Boolea n

ext en d ed n u m er ic

2.5 t o

Boolea n

st a t e

ext en d ed n u m er ic

p ow er sw eep

sp ecified p ow er r a n ge or

ext en d ed n u m er ic

Boolea n

p ow er sw eep

st a r t va lu e

R F

st ep size

Boolea n

d e t e r m in e d

20 t o

ext en d ed n u m er ic

st ep size

sp ecified p ow er r a n ge or

p ow er sw eep

st op va lu e

ext en d ed n u m er ic

<n u m >[fr eq su ffix]

p u lse fr eq

<n u m >[t im e su ffix]

p u lse p er iod

p u lse w id th

su ffix]

P ULM

d iscr et e

extn l p u lse p ola r ity

ext n l p u lse d ela y

su ffix]

ext en d ed n u m er ic

[fr eq su ffix]

in t n l p u lse fr eq u en cy ext en d ed n u m er ic

Boolea n

in t n l p u lse ga t in g

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table S-l. HP 8360

COMMAND SUMMARY (continued)

Com m a n d

P U L M

P a r a m eter

P a r a m eter s

Allow ed Va lu es

exten d ed n u m er ic

in tn l p u lse p er iod

su ffix]

d iscr et e

p u lse tr igger sou r ce

in tn l p u lse w id th

ext en d ed n u m er ic

p u lse m od u la t ion

exten d ed n u m er ic

Boolea n

su ffix]

p u lse m od

r ise t im e

d iscr et e

Boolea n

p u lse m od sou r ce

st a t e

d iscr et e

Boole a n

r ef osc sou r ce

st a t e

STATUS

0 t o 2047

n u m e r ic

0 t o 2047

n eg t r a n sit ion

filt er

n u m e r ic

p os t r a n sit ion

filt er

0 t o 2047

n u m e r ic

SR Q en a b le r egist er

0 t o 2047

n eg t r a n sit ion

filt er

n u m e r ic

p os t r a n sit ion

filt er

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table S-l. HP 8360

COMMAND SUMMARY (continued)

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter

Allow ed Va lu es

d u a l sou r ce

m od e

Boolea n

typ e of

d iscr et e

sw eep con tr ol

set t lin g t im e

ext en d ed n u m er ic

Boolea n

0.1

3200

p lu s d w ell tim e

d w ell ca lcu la tion

st a t e

t yp e of sw eep

d iscr et e

1 t o t h e n u m b er of st ep p oin t s

step p oin t

n u m b er

n u m e r ic

ext en d ed n u m er ic

p er cen t of sw eep

t o 100%

st a t e

Boolea n

:XF E R

m a n u a l sw eep

m od e sw it ch

d iscr et e

n u m e r ic

p oin t s in st ep

sw eep

ext en d ed n u m er ic

Boolea n

fu n ction of cu r r en t sp a n

st ep size

S T E P

t o 133

sw eep t im e

a u t o sw eep

t im e sw it ch

ext en d ed n u m er ic

su ffix]

fa st est sw eep

t im e

:LLIMit

d iscr et e

step p ed tr ig

sou r ce

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table S-l. HP 8360

COMMAND SUMMARY (continued)

Com m a n d

P a r a m eter s

P a r a m eter

Allow ed Va lu es

sa ve/r eca ll

r egister

n u m e r ic

Boole a n

1 t o

st a t e

:GP IB

syn t h esizer

a d d r ess

n u m e r ic

1 t o 30

:K E Y

k ey cod e a ssign

clea r s u ser m en u

sa ve lock

0 t o 511, 1 t o 14 exclu d in g 5 a n d 10

n u m e r ic

d iscr et e

1 t o

SAVE

sa ve lock

la n gu a ge selection

d iscr et e

Boolea n

AU T O

[:E XE C]

p r eset m od e

d iscr et e

m em or y clea r

st a t e

0 t o

n u m e r ic

Boolea n

ext en d ed n u m er ic

d iscr et e

0 t o

ou tp u t d ela y

t r ig sou r ce

eq u iva len t of

U N I T

:AM

AM d ep th u n its

d iscr et e

st r in g

d efa u lt p ow er u n its

D B M

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Causes the sweep in progress to abort and reset. If

CONT is

ON it immediately restarts the sweep. The pending operation flag

(driving

and *OPC?)

undergoes a transition once the

sweep is reset.

AM[:DEPThl?

Sets and queries the percentage of AM when the

If <num> is received with units of

converted to percent by the equation:

= 100 (1

the value is

Valid ranges of

are 0 to 40

After

the value is 50%.

AM:INTernal:FREQuency?

Sets and queries the frequency (in Hz) of the internal AM source.

After the value is 1

lAM:INTernal:FUNCtion

AM:INTernal:FUNCtion?

Sets and queries the waveform of the internal AM source. After

the value is

lAM:SOURce

AM:SOURce?

Sets and queries the source of the AM modulating signal. After

the value is

AM:MODE

AM:MODE?

Controls the AM depth limits of the synthesizer. The

position is selected at

l AM:STATe

AM:STATe?

Sets and queries the status of the AM modulation. After

the

setting is OFF.

AM:TYPE

AM:TYPE?

Sets and queries the type of AM modulation. After

the

settingis

CALibration:AM:AUTO

CALibration:AM:AUTO?

Sets and queries the automatic modulator calibration switch.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

If this is ON, each time a frequency or power is changed,

is attempted.

When AM is on and the synthesizer is in the CW or manual mode,

the synthesizer performs a modulator calibration as long as power

sweep is not active.

CALibration:PEAKing:AUTO

CALibration:PEAKing:AUTO?

Sets and queries the automatic peaking function. If AUTO is ON, then

a peak is done at regular intervals automatically. After

setting is OFF.

the

Peaks the SYTM.

CALibration:PMETer:DETector:INITiate?

Initiates the specified calibration. These calibrations require the use

of an external power measurement. Once initiated, the synthesizer

sets up for the first point to be measured, and responds to the query

with the frequency at which the power is to be measured.

The parameters mean:

Initiates a calibration of the internal detector logger

breakpoints and offsets.

Initiates a calibration of an external detector’s logger

breakpoints and offsets.

CALibration:PMETer:DETector:NEXT?

The parameter is the measured power that is currently produced by

the synthesizer. You must supply this parameter after measuring the

power using an external power meter. The query response is issued

after the synthesizer processes the supplied parameter and settles on

the next point to be measured. The query response is:

The frequency [in Hz] that is currently produced.

The calibration is complete.

An error has occurred and the calibration is aborted.

CALibration:PMETer:FLATness:INITiate?

Initiates the specified calibration. These calibrations require the use

of an external power measurement. Once initiated, the synthesizer

sets up for the first point to be measured, and responds to the query

with the frequency at which the power is to be measured.

The parameters mean :

Initiates a calibration at all of the user flatness points.

USER

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Initiates a calibration of the external flatness. Depends on

value of CALibrat ion: PMETer : RANGe.

PMETer

Initiates a calibration of the power meter flatness.

Depends on value of CALibrat ion : PMETer : RANGe.

Initiates a calibration of the source module flatness.

Depends on value of CALibrat ion : PMETer : RANGe.

CALibration:PMETer:FLATness:NEXT?

The parameter is the measured power that is currently produced by

the synthesizer. You must supply this parameter after measuring the

power using an external power meter. The query response is issued

after the synthesizer processes the supplied parameter and settles on

the next point to be measured. The query response is:

The frequency [in Hz] that is currently produced.

The calibration is complete.

An error has occurred and the calibration is aborted.

CALibration:SPAN:AUTO

CALibration:SPAN:AUTU?

Sets and queries the automatic sweep span calibration.

A calibration is done whenever the sweep span is changed.

A calibration is done only when

OFF

CALibrat ion : SPAN :

is sent.

After

the setting is OFF.

CALibrat ion : SPAN :

Causes a sweep span calibration.

CALibrat ion :

Causes an automatic tracking calibration procedure.

ion :

Sets and queries the entire

array of correction values

that can be added to the internal flatness correction array. The

are added to the internal flatness array synchronized

These TTL-level pulses are 1601

pulses.

on the trigger output

evenly spaced points across an analog sweep, or at each point in step

or list mode. Entering this array causes the

command to set to

There is one array for the foreground

state and one for the background state (i=l). If the [i] is not

specified, the default value is

cleared.

After

these arrays are

ion :

req suffix] ,

CORRection:FLATness?

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sets and queries an array of up to 801 frequency-correction

pairs. This correction information is used to create a correction

array that can be added to the internal calibration array. The

correction entered is at the associated frequency. Frequencies in

between frequency-correction pair values are determined by linear

interpolation. If a value of START or STOP frequency is specified

that is outside the limits of the specified frequencies, the correction

applied at those points is 0

After

returns a

DB ,

0 DB response.

Sets and queries the source of correction.

CORRection:FLATness:POINts?

Returns the number of frequency-correction pairs entered using the

command. After the value is 2.

ion :

Sets and queries the switch on the users ALC correction system.

The *RST value is OFF.

Reads the analog bus node number and returns the number of

millivolts:

DIAGnostics:ABUS:AVERage

l DIAGnostics:ABUS:AVERage?

Sets and queries the number of ADC averages to use during the read

ADC query. After

the value is 1.

DIAGnostics:ABUS:STATus?

Queries the status of the prior ADC reading. The response is a single

byte that is bit-encoded to mean:

Set to 1, if ADC timed out (hardware fault)

Set to 1, if reading was unsettled.

Set to 1, if out of range occurred.

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

DIAGnostics:INSTrument:PMETer:ADDRess

DIAGnostics:INSTrument:PMETer:ADDRess?

Sets and queries the HP-IB address to use for the power meter during

synthesizer calibration routines. Allowable values are 0 through 31.

or power on does not effect this value. Default is 13. It is

defaulted only when memory is initialized.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIAGnostics:INSTrument:PRINter:ADDRess

DIAGnostics:INSTrument:PRINter:ADDRess?

Sets the HP-IB address of the printer to use during some of the

calibration procedures when the synthesizer assumes HP-IB control.

*RST and power on do not effect this command. The default is 1.

The default value is set at memory initialization only.

DIAGnostics:IORW

Performs a write to the I/O Device number specified in the first

<num> and sets it to the value in the second <num>.

DIAGnostics:IORW?

Reads from the specified I/O device number and returns the response

data.

DIAGnostics:OUTPut:FAULt?

Returns a string of 16,

display.

and

that are equivalent to the fault

Bit 0 = PEAK

Bit 1

TRACK

Bit 2 = RAMP

Bit 3 = SPAN

Bit 4 =

Bit 5 = ADC

Bit 6 = EEROM

Bit 7

PWRON

Bit 8 = CALCO

Bit 9

Bit 10

PLLZERO

PLLWAIT

Bit 11 = FNXFER

Bit 12 = CAL YO

Bit 13

Bit 14 = TMR CNFLCT

Bit 15 SEARCH

CAL MAN

DIAGnostics:RESult?

Returns the following information:

where,

is one of the following:

Diagnosis successful.

Cannot diagnose; full

must be executed first.

- 1

No failures found-all selftests passed.

Cannot diagnose; diagnosis routine failed to isolate failure.

(software fault)

<test failure> is the test number of the most relevant failure

(-999 if parameter is not used, as in <result> of 1).

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

<manual entry point> a string response that identifies the

paragraph number in the HP 8360 Assembly-Level Repair Manual to

begin the troubleshooting procedure.

DIAGnostics:TEST:CONTinue

Causes the execution to continue when paused for raw data

examination. Does nothing in other conditions.

DIAGnostics:TEST:DATA:DESC?

Returns the description string of the raw data examined during a

in other conditions.

selftest. It returns

DIAGnostics:TEST:DATA:MAXimum?

Returns the upper test limit for the raw data point examined.

Returns “0” in other conditions.

DIAGnostics:TEST:DATA:MINimum?

Returns the lower test limit for the raw data point examined.

Returns “0” in other conditions.

DIAGnostics:TEST:DATA:VALue?

Returns the raw data value for the raw data point examined.

Returns a “0” in other conditions.

DIAGnostics:TEST:DISable

Prevents the listed selftests from being selected. If ALL is sent then

all of the selftests are disabled. *RST causes

execute.

ALL to

DIAGnostics:TEST:ENABle

Enables the listed selftests to execute. If ALL is sent then all of the

selftests are enabled. causes DIAG:TEST:ENAB ALL to execute.

DIAGnostics:TEST[:EXECute]

The specified

is executed. Normal instrument operation is

suspended and the instrument state is restored upon exiting the

mode.

DIAGnostics:TEST:LOG:SOURce

DIAGnostics:TEST:LOG:SOURce?

Sets and queries the source for the raw data logging. ALL specifies

that all raw data points are displayed. FAIL selects only those data

points out of the test limits. Both commands are executable in

mode. After

the setting is FAIL.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIAGnostics:TEST:LOG[:STATe] ON|OFF|l|O

Selects and queries the raw data logging ON/OFF switch. Both

commands are executable in

mode.

After

the setting is 0.

DIAGnostics:TEST:LOOP ON|OFF|l|O

DIAGnostics:TEST:LOOP?

Selects and queries the test looping ON/OFF switch. Both

commands are executable in

After the setting is 0.

mode.

DIAGnostics:TEST:NAME?

Queries the name of a

specified then an array of all the

by number. If the number is not

names is returned.

DIAGnostics:TEST:POINts?

Returns the number of points of

that is output using

DIAGnostics:TEST:NAME? or DIAGnostics:TEST:RESult?.

DIAGnostics:TEST:RESult?

Queries the result of a selftest, by number. The response is a string

containing either Passed, Failed, or If <num> is missing,

an array of results are returned.

DIAGnostics:TINT?

A test feature that returns the value passed to it. This is used to test

the HP-IB interface.

ON|OFF|l|O

Sets and queries the display ON/OFF switch.

After the value is 1.

FM:COUPling

FM:COUPling?

Sets and queries the FM input coupling mode.

The *RST value is AC.

Sets and queries the peak FM deviation (in Hz) when the internal

FM generator is used. After

the value is 1 MHz.

lFM:FILTer:HPASs

lFM:FILTer:HPASs?

Sets and queries the FM AC bandwidth. There are only two

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

positions to the bandwidth, < 20 Hz and > 100

numeric is accepted. The value is compared to 1

position is determined (> 1

but any

and the correct

sets the position to 100

and

sets the position to 20 Hz). After

the value is 100

suffix]

FM:INTernal:FREQuency?

Sets and queries the frequency (in Hz) of the internal FM source.

After the value is 1 MHz.

lFM:INTernal:FUNCtion

FM:INTernal:FUNCtion?

Sets and queries the waveform of the internal FM source.

After

the value is

FM:SOURce?

Sets and queries the source of the FM modulating signal.

After the value is

FM:SENSitivity

FM:SENSitivity?

suffix/V]

Sets and queries the FM Input sensitivity.

The *RST value is MAX (10 MHz/V) .

FM:STATe

FM:STATe?

Sets and queries the FM modulation state.

After the value is OFF.

Any two frequency setting headers

STOP,

Frequency Subsystem

SPAN) may be sent in a single message and the resulting sweep

is what was requested. The order of the headers in the message

does not make any difference in the final result. When a message is

completed, coupling equations are used to fix the unset parameters to

the correct values. These equations specify that:

center frequency = (start + stop)

frequency span = (stop

start)

If more than two are sent then the last two in the message are used

to determine the sweep and no errors are given.

If only one header is sent in a message, then the assumed pairs are

center/span and start/stop. In other words, if only center is sent,

then span is kept constant (if possible) while adjusting center to the

requested value. The start/stop frequencies are updated to reflect the

changes based on the coupling equations.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

“bumping” to move unspecified frequency

The synthesizer uses

parameters, but if the final value of any of the frequency headers is

the result of bumping, then an error is generated since the user is

not getting what was specified. This means, to guarantee sequence

independence requires sending the frequency pairs in a single

message.

Example 1: (present state start = 5

stop = 6

an error results since the

20 GHZ

stop frequency is bumped.

the final sweep does not

generate an error

22 GHZ

(20 to 22).

Example 2: (present state start

stop

no error is generated,

start frequency is unchanged.

still no error.

22 GHZ

20 GHZ

Example 3: (present state start 5

stop 6

both are fine, no errors.

20 GHZ;STOP 22 GHZ

20 GHZ

FREQuency:CENTer

FREQuency:CENTer? [MAXimum|MINimum]

Sets and queries the center frequency.

The *RST value is (MAX +

FREQuency[:CWl:FIXed]

? [MAXimum|MINimum]

FREQuency[:FIXed]? [MAXimum|MINimum]

Sets and queries the CW frequency. This does not change the

*RST value is (MAX +

swept/CW mode switch.

FREQ:CENTER for more information.

Sets and queries the

frequency coupling switch. This

switch keeps the two functions coupled together when ON. Changing

setting is OFF. See FREQ:CENTER

one of them, changes both.

for more information.

FREQuency:MANual

req

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sets and queries the manual frequency. This controls the output

frequency in swept manual mode. The limits are START and STOP.

*RST value is the same as FREQ : CENTER. See FREQ : CENTER for more

information.

FREQuency:MODE

Sets and queries the switch that selects either swept, CW or list

operation. *RST value is CW.

FREQuency:MULTiplier

FREQuency:MULTiplier?

Sets and queries the frequency multiplier. The numeric value is

rounded to the nearest integer. This function changes mapping of

frequency parameters on input to and output from the synthesizer.

Changing this does not affect the output frequency of the synthesizer.

Only the displayed parameters and query responses are changed.

The equation implied by this is :

Entered/displayed frequency = (Hardware Freq * Multiplier )

Offset

After

the value is 1.

FREQuency:MULTiplier:STATe

FREQuency:MULTiplier:STATe?

Queries and turns the frequency multiplier off and on.

After the setting is OFF.

FREQuency:OFFSet

FREQuency:OFFSet?

Sets and queries the frequency offset. This function changes the

mapping of the frequency parameters on input to and output from

the synthesizer. Changing this does not affect the output frequency

of the synthesizer. Only the displayed parameters and query

responses are changed. The equation implied by this is :

Entered/displayed frequency = (Hardware Freq

Offset

Multiplier

After

the value is 0.

FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe

FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe?

Queries and turns the frequency offset off and on.

After

the setting is OFF.

: SPAN

req

FREQuency:SPAN?

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

before changing to the next frequency. After

(MIN).

the value is 100

Returns the number of dwells entered using the

command. After *RST returns a 1.

lLIST:FREQuency

LIST:FREQuency?

suffix]

Sets and queries a list of frequencies that the synthesizer phase locks

to in the sequence entered when the list mode is selected.

*RST value is the (MAX +

LIST:FREQuency:POINts?

Returns the number of frequencies that have been entered into the

list frequency array. After *RST returns a 1.

LIST : MANual?

Sets and queries the list point number to go to and lock. The value is

value that is limited between 1 and the maximum number

of points in either of the three arrays. This command has no effect

unless the list mode is set to manual. This value may be bumped if

the number of list frequencies is changed. *RST value is 1.

Selects and queries whether the list is played back automatically or

manually as described in LIST : MANual.

LIST:TRIGger :SOURce How th e list is p la yed ba ck .

AU T O

E a ch n ew fr eq u en cy p oin t is

step p ed to a u tom a tica lly,

a ft er w a it in g t h e sp ecified

t im e.

BUS

Wa it for

<GE T> or *TR G

over t h e H P -IB b efor e

a d va n cin g t o t h e n ext

fr eq u en cy in t h e list .

Wa it for a sign a l t o b e

r eceived on t h e ext er n a l

in p u t b efor e a d va n cin g t o

t h e n ext fr eq u en cy in t h e

list.

On ly th e list p oin t

sp ecified by LIST:MANu a l

is p la yed ba ck .

M AN u a l

Don ’t ca r e

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

*RST state is AUTO.

Sets and queries the list of correction levels that correspond to each

of the frequencies entered using the LIST:FREQ command. The

attenuator is not allowed to change during the list execution. The

number of parameters can be from 1 to 801.

After

the value is 0.

[MAXimum|MINimum]

Returns the number of correction points that have been entered into

the list array. After

returns a 1.

lLIST:TRIGger:SOURce

LIST:TRIGger:SOURce?

Sets and queries the list point-to-point trigger source when in the

automatic list mode. See

and

for more details.

*RST state is

Sets and queries the amplitude marker on/off switch. While [n] may

be used, there is really only a single switch for all the markers.

*RST value is OFF.

MARKer[n]:AMPLitude:VALue? [MAXimum|MINimum]

Sets and queries the value of the amplitude marker. While [n] may

be used, there is really only a single value for all the markers.

value is 2

Sets all the markers to OFF at once. While [n] may be used, there is

really only a single switch for all the markers.

This query returns the difference in frequency between the two

specified marker numbers.

l MARKer[n]:FREQuency

MARKer[n]:FREQuency? [MAXimum|MINimum]

Sets and queries the specified marker frequency (marker number

one is the default if [n] is not specified). The value is interpreted

differently based on the value of the marker mode.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

M AR K e r [n ]:M O D E

F R E Qu e n c y

How th e fr equ en cy of th e m a r k er is d eter m in ed .

Ab solu t e fr eq u en cy is u sed . Th e lim it s a r e

to th e p r esen t START a n d STOP

fr eq u en cy lim it s.

Th e va lu e is sp ecified w it h r esp ect t o t h e

r efer en ce m a r k er .

The *RST values are the same as the FREQ :

*RST

value.

MARKer

: MODE

: MODE?

FREQuency I

Sets and queries the mode of the specified marker. Setting one

marker to delta turns all other marker modes to frequency. If [n] is

not specified, the default is one. *RST value is FREQuency.

MARKer

lMARKer

Sets and queries which marker is the reference marker for use in

the delta mode. While [n] may be used, there is really only a

single reference for all the markers.

5; and

5; both set marker 5 as the reference.

MARKer

ON | OFF | 1 | O

The state of the specified marker is set and queried (marker number

one if

is not specified). The *RST value for all markers is OFF.

:AM?

A query-only command that causes the modulating AM signal to be

measured and the absolute value of the peak percent deviation to be

returned.

:FM

A query-only command that causes the modulating FM signal level

to be measured and the corresponding peak frequency deviation

returned.

Sets and queries the source of the rear panel output modulation

BNC.

MODulation:OUTPut:STATe?

Sets and queries the state of the rear panel output modulation BNC.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ion:

Queries the status of any modulation. If any of the modulation states

are on, then it returns a 1, otherwise it returns a 0.

Any place where

is accepted as a suffix, any level suffix is

Power Subsystem

accepted also. In the absence of a suffix, the units are assumed to be

as set by the UNIT :POW command.

POWer:ALC:BANDwidthl:BWIDth

POWer:ALC:BANDwidth?|:BWIDth?

Sets and queries the ALC bandwidth. This is actually not

continuously variable, so the input is rounded to the nearest possible

*RST setting is automatically determined since

switch position.

is ON.

POWer:ALC:BANDwidth|:BWIDth:AUTO?

Sets and queries the automatic ALC bandwidth selection switch. The

value is ON.

POWer:ALC:CFACtor

POWer:ALC:CFACtor?

Sets and queries the coupling factor used when the command

POWer : ALC

is set to

POWer:ALC:SOURce?

Sets and queries the ALC leveling source selection switch.

The *RST value is

POWer : ALC :

Sets and queries the state switch of the ALC. The positions are :

ON-normal ALC operation

OFF-open loop ALC mode

When on, the power can be programmed in fundamental units as

selected by the UNIT:POWer command.

When off, the power is no longer calibrated in absolute units and is

set in units of

of arbitrary modulator setting.

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE

POWer :

ier : STATE?

Sets and queries the state of the amplifier contained in

the doubler (for those models with a doubler installed).

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming a specific value for POWer :

ier : STATE sets

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE:AUTOto OFF.

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE:AUTO

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE:AUTO?

Sets and queries the automatic selection of the doubler amplifier

state. Programming a specific value for POWer :

ier : STATE sets

POWer:AMPLifier:STATE:AUTO to OFF.

is ON.

POWer:ATTenuation

POWer :

ion?

Sets and queries the output attenuation level. Note that when

setting the attenuator level to 10 the output power is

decreased by 10 Programming a specified attenuation sets

POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF.

POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO

POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Sets and queries the state of the RF attenuator coupling switch.

Programming a specified attenuation sets

POWer :

ion : AUTO OFF.

ON insures that the amplitude level of the ALC is kept within

optimal limits.

OFF

there. The

the attenuator setting is set to the value of POW :ATT and left

value is ON.

POWer:CENTer

POWer:CENTer?

suffix]

Sets and queries the center power for power sweep. Default units

(and units for query response) are determined by the UNIT:POWer

command.

The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to

those for frequency sweep. Power sweep is allowed to be negative,

unlike frequency sweeps. See FREQ : CENT for a description. *RST

value is 0

suffix]

POWer :

Sets and queries the output level. Default units and units

for the query response are determined by the UNIT:POWer

command. Maximum and minimum levels refer to the

leveling mode at the time the command is sent. For example,

MIN;ALC:

hasdifferenteffects

from *RST;POWer:ALC:SOURceMMHead; POWer:LEVel MIN

After

the value is 0

POWer:MODE

POWer:MODE?

Sets and queries the setting of the power sweep mode switch. If in

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

the sweep mode then the output level is controlled by the start,

stop, center and span functions. If in the fixed power mode then the

output is controlled by the POW

command. The *RST value

POWer:OFFSet

POWer:OFFSet?

Sets and queries the power offset. This function changes mapping

of absolute power parameters on input to and output from the

synthesizer. Changing this does not affect the output power of the

synthesizer. Only the displayed parameters and query responses are

changed. The equation implied by this is:

The entered or displayed power = Hardware Power

the value is 0.

Offset After

POWer:OFFSet:STATe

POWer:OFFSet:STATe?

Queries and turns the power offset off and on. After

the

setting is OFF.

lPOWer:RANGe

POWer:RANGe?

suffix]

Sets and queries the setting of the power meter range. This is used

when the command POWer:ALC:SOURce is

POWer:SEARch

POWer:SEARch?

Sets and queries the power search switch. This has an interaction

with POWer:ALC:STATe as described below.

P ow er Sw itch Action

P O We r :S E AR c h

ALC is m om en t a r ily closed t o

level a t t h e r eq u est ed p ow er ,

a n d t h en t h e m od u la t or is set t o

t h e sa m e volt a ge in op en loop

m od e. Th is r ep ea t s a u t om a t ica lly

a n y t im e t h a t t h e p ow er level or

fr eq u en cy is ch a n ged .

O N

Nor m a l m od e.

O F F

O N

Im m ed ia t ely p er for m s a p ow er

sea r ch . Th is lea ves

O N C E

in t h e ON p osit ion .

Mod u la t or set t in g is

exp licit ly set b y u ser .

n ot a p p lica ble

O F F

POWer:SLOPe

suffix]

POWer:SLOPe?

Sets and queries the RF slope setting

per Hz).

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

FR EQ :M O DE Affect on Slope

CW or LIST

Rotates around 0 Hz.

Rotates around the start frequency.

STEP

The *RST value is 0.

POWer:SLOPe:STATe ON|OFF|l|O

POWer:SLOPe:STATe?

Sets and queries the power slope state. *RST value is 0.

POWer:SPAN

POWer : SPAN?

The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to

those for frequency sweep. Power sweep is allowed to be negative,

unlike frequency sweeps. *RST value is 0.

POWer:STARt?

Default units and units for query response are determined by the

command UNIT : POWer. The coupling equations for power sweep

are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep. Power sweep is

allowed to be negative, unlike frequency sweeps.

value is 0

POWer:STATe ON|OFF|l|O

POWer:STATe?

Sets and queries the output power on/off state. *RST value is OFF.

ON|OFF|l|O

POWer:STEP:AUTO?

Sets and queries the function switch that controls how the power

step size

state, then the step size is 1

STEP:

is determined. if in the automatic

The *RST setting is ON.

POWer : STEP :

l POWer : STEP :

Sets and queries the power step size to be used for any node in the

power subsystem that allows UP and DOWN as parameters. Setting this

value explicitly causes POWer : STEP : AUTO OFF.

The

setting is 10

POWer:STOP

POWer : STOP?

Sets and queries the ending power for a power sweep. Default units

and units for query response are determined by the command

UNIT:POWer. The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

analogous to those for frequency sweep. Power sweep is allowed to be

negative, unlike frequency sweeps. value is 0

PULM:EXTernal:DELay

suffix]

lPULM:EXTernal:DELay?

Sets and queries the value of pulse delay from the time the external

pulse signal arrives to when the video pulse is generated. The

minimum value is 225 ns. After *RST the value is

PULM:EXTernal:POLarity?

Selects the polarity of the external pulse signal.

causes

the positive-going edge of the

trigger the internal pulse

generator and to turn on the RF. After *RST the value is

PULM:INTernal:FREQuency

lPULM:INTernal:FREQuency?

and queries the frequency of the internal pulse generator.

The *RST value is 500

PULM:INTernal:GATE

PULM:INTernal:GATE?

Sets and queries the state of the internal pulse generator’s gating

control. When ON, and the pulse trigger source is internal, the

external pulse input is used to gate the pulse generator. When pulse

trigger source is external, this switch is ignored and no gating is

possible. After

the setting is 0.

PULM:INTernal:PERiod

suffix]

lPULM:INTernal:PERiod?

Sets and queries the period of the internal pulse generator.

The *RST value is 2

PULM:INTernal:TRIGger:SOURce

PULM:INTernal:TRIGger:SOURce?

Sets and queries the setting of the internal pulse generator’s trigger

source. When pulse period and frequency determine the

repetition rate of the pulse train. When in

rate is set by the EXT PULSE in jack. After

the repetition

the value is

lPULM:INTernal:WIDTH

lPULM:INTernal:WIDTH?

Sets and queries the width of the internal pulse generator. The *RST

value is 1

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

Since frequency and period are inversely related, if both are sent

in the same message, only the last one is applied. If the

Pulse Subsystem

command and either the

command are sent

in the same message, they must be accepted without error if the

resulting pulse is possible.

PULSe:FREQuency

Sets and queries the frequency of the internal pulse generator. The

resolution of the frequency is such that the resulting period is set to a

resolution of 1

The *RST value is 500

lPULSe:PERiod

suffix]

PULSe:PERiod?

Sets and queries the period of the internal pulse generator. The

resolution of this is 1 The *RST value is 2

PULSe:WIDTh

PULSe:WIDTh?

Sets and queries the width of the internal pulse generator. The *RST

value is 1

PULM:SLEW

PULM:SLEW?

Sets and queries the rise time for the pulse modulation. The typical

usage is MAX I MIN since calibrating the rise time of the pulses is not

common. Slow pulse is set by the command PULS:SLEW MAX. Any

value above 1.8

is set to maximum. The *RST setting is MI N.

PULM:SLEW:AUTO?

Sets and queries the automatic setting of rise time for the pulse

modulation system. The *RST setting is ON.

PULM:SOURce

PULM:SOURce?

Sets and queries the source for the pulse modulation control signal.

*RSTvalueis

l PULM:STATe

PULM:STATe?

Sets and queries the state of pulse modulation. The *RST value is 0.

ROSCillator:SOURce?

ROSCillator:SOURce

Sets and queries the reference oscillator selection switch. The

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

command to set the switch will cause ROSC:SOUR:AUTO OFF to

be done also. The *RST value is automatically determined.

ROSCillator:SOURce:AUTO

ROSCillator:SOURce:AUTO?

Sets and queries the automatic reference selection switch.

The *RST value is 1.

STATus:OPERation:CONDition?

Queries the Standard Operation Condition register.

STATus:OPERation:ENABle

STATus:OPERation:ENABle?

Sets and queries the Standard Operation Enable register.

The

valueis0.

Queries the Standard Operation Event Register. This is a destructive

read.

STATus:OPERation:NTRansition

STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?

Sets and queries the Standard Operation Negative Transition Filter.

The valueis0.

STATus:OPERation:PTRansition

STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?

Sets and queries the Standard Operation Positive Transition Filter.

After

all used bits are set, to

STATUS:PRESet

This command presets the following enable and transition registers:

MSIB, and

Is set to all

All bits used are set to

Unused bits remain

STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?

Queries the Data Questionable Condition Register.

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?

Sets and queries the Data Questionable SRQ Enable register.

The

value is 0.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Queries the Data Questionable Event Register. This is a destructive

read.

STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition

Sets and queries the Negative

Filter for the Data

Questionable Status Register. The STATUS

value is 0.

STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition

STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?

Sets and queries the Positive

Questionable Status Register. After STATUS

set to

Filter for the Data

all used bits are

Interactions between dwell, sweep time, points, step size, and

frequency span are as follows:

Sweep Subsystem

SWEep:TIME = (5 ms +

x (SWEep:POINts 1)

FREQ:SPAN = SWEep:STEP x (SWEep:POINts

SWE e p :xx:AUTO sw it ch e s

Sw itch Action

T I M E

O F F

No cou p lin g betw een SWEep :DWELl,

SWE e p :TIME a n d SWE e p :P OINt s.

O F F

O N

No cou p lin g betw een SWEep :DWELl,

SWE e p :TIME a n d SWE e p :P OINt s.

O N

Wh e n SWE E P :TIME or SWE E P :P OINt s

a r e ch a n ged , SWEep :DWELl

O F F

(SWE e p :TIME

(SWE e p :P OINt s

1))

SWEep :DWELl is lim ited to 100

m in im u m .

= 100

O N

SWE e p :TIME

5.1

(SWE e p :P OINt s

SWEep:CONTrol:STATe

SWEep:CONTrol:STATe?

Sets and queries the state of the sweep control.

Normal source mode.

OFF

Use master slave source mode.

*RST value is OFF.

lSWEep:CONTrol:TYPE

SWEep:CONTrol:TYPE?

Sets and queries the synthesizer, whether it is in master or slave

mode. This applies in a dual source mode. *RST value is

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

suffix]

Sets and queries the amount of time in seconds that the synthesizer

stays (dwell) at each step after reporting a source settled and

pulsing the Trigger Out line low. This one value is used at each step

when in the SWE:TRIG:SOUR IMM modeofa stepped sweep. Setting

SWEep:DWELL

OFF. *RST

100

Sets and queries the state of the automatic dwell calculation switch.

Setting SWEep:DWELL sets

OFF. *RST state is OFF.

Combining the Sweep Mode With the Sweep Generation Command

to Obtain the Desired Sweep Condition

S W E

:G E N

Descr ip tion of

Sw eep Con d ition

:P O W

S W E

F R E Q

ign or e d

AN AL

F I X

CW Non -sw ep t

c w

AU T O

M A N

AU T O

M AN

An a log fr eq sw eep

Ma n u a l a n a log

S W E

F I X

ign or e d

AN AL

S T E P

STE P

sw eep

S W E

Step p ed fr eq sw eep

Ma n u a l st ep fr eq sw eep

ign or e d

AN AL

S T E P

AU T O

CW w it h a n a log p ow er

sw e e p

S W E

M AN

CW w it h m a n u a l a n a log

p ow er sw eep

AU T O

M AN

CW w ith step p ed p ow er

sw eep

CW w ith m a n u a l step p ed

p ow er sw eep

ign or e d

AN AL

AU T O

An a log fr eq u en cy a n d

p ow er sw eep

S W E

AN AL

S T E P

M AN

AU T O

M AN

Ma n u a l a n a log fr eq u en cy

a n d p ow er sw eep

Step p ed fr equ en cy a n d

p ow er sw eep

Ma n u a l step p ed fr equ en cy

a n d p ow er sw eep

AU T O

M AN

ign or e d

LIST

List sw eep

Ma n u a l list sw eep

SWEep:GENeration

SWEep:GENeration?

Sets and queries the type of sweep to be generated: an analog sweep

or a digitally stepped sweep. In either case, all of the other sweep

subsystem functions apply. *RST is

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

l SWEep:MANual:POINt

SWEep:MANual:POINt?

Sets and queries the step point number to go to and lock. The value

is a value that is limited between 1 and the number of points

requested. This command has no effect on the instrument unless:

the sweep mode is set to manual and the sweep generation is set to

stepped mode. *RST value is 1.

SWEep : MANual :

ive] ?

Sets and queries a percent of sweep to go to and lock. This command

has no effect unless: the sweep mode is set to manual and the sweep

generation is set to analog. *RST value is 0.50.

SWEep:MARKer:STATe

SWEep:MARKer:STATe?

Sets and queries the state of marker sweep. When ON, the frequency

sweep limits are taken to be the positions of marker 1 and marker 2.

valueis0.

SWEep :

: XFER

This transfers the values of marker 1 and marker 2 frequencies into

start and stop frequency.

SWEep:MODE

SWEep : MODE?

Selects and queries the manual sweep mode switch.

The sweep is under the control of the

SWEEP subsystems.

and

AUTO

FREQ:MANual, SWEep:MANual[:RELative], and

SWEep:MANual:POINt control the output.

MANual

*RST value is AUTO.

SWEep:POINts

SWEep:

Sets and queries the number of points in a step sweep. When points

is changed, SWEep : STEP is modified by the equation

STEP SPAN/POINTS.

Span is normally an independent variable but is changed to STEP

x POINTS if both of these parameters are changed in the same

*RST value is 11.

message.

SWEep : STEP

reqsuffix]

SWEep:STEP.

Sets and queries the size of each frequency step. : STEP is governed

by the equation

STEP SPAN/POINTS.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you change step size then the number of points will be changed

to span/step and a Parameter Bumped execution error is reported.

If span or points are changed then STEP= SPAN/POINTS. The

step sweep command creates a coupling with sweeptime also. If

points is changed through this coupling and

is ON and

TIME:AUTO is ON then dwell is changed to SWEEPTIME/POINTS.

Span is normally an independent variable but is changed to STEP

x POINTS if both of these parameters are changed in the same

message.

value is

lSWEep:TIME

suffix]

SWEep:TIME?

Sets and queries the current sweep time. The dwell time can be

coupled to sweep time if SWE : DWEL : AUTO is ON. The dwell time is

then governed by the equation

= SWEEPTIME/POINTS.

Changing either sweep time or the number of points causes

to be recalculated but does not cause an error. If you attempt to

change the dwelltimethen :AUTOis set to

OFF

then sweep time is independent of the dwell time and the number of

points. *RST value is MIN.

SWEep:TIME:AUTO

SWEep:TIME:AUTO?

Sets and queries the automatic sweep time switch.

The value of the sweep time is automatically to

minimum.

Attempting to set a sweep time faster than allowed

in the AUTO mode causes this switch to change to

AUTO ON evenifit was previously in the AUTO OFF

mode.

OFF

*RST state is ON.

SWEep:TIME:LLIMit

SWEep:TIME:LLIMit.

Sets and queries the lower sweep time limit. This value specifies the

fastest sweep time that you wants the synthesizer to allow either on

input or when calculated internally when in AUTO ON mode. This

value must be greater than 10 ms. *RST value is 10 ms.

SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce

SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce?

Sets and queries the stepped sweep point-to-point trigger source.

This only applies when SWEep:GEN is set to

SYSTem:ALTernate

SYSTem:ALTernate?

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

Sets and queries the save/recall register number to alternate the

foreground state of the instrument. The *RST value is 1.

SYSTem:ALTernate:STATe

l SYSTem:ALTernate:STATe?

Sets and queries the state of the Alternate State function.

setting is OFF.

Changes the

(General Purpose Interface Bus) address.

The *RST value is 19.

SYSTem:DUMP:PRINter?

Causes a dump of the display contents to be made to the HP-IB.

Returns the next message in the error queue. The format of the

response is : <error string>

where the error number is as shown in the “Error Messages” section

and error string is :

“<Generic HP-SL

specific information>”

An example response to

-23, “NUMERIC OVERFLOW

PUT IN A NUMBER TOO BIG”

l SYSTem:KEY:ASSign

This assigns the first numeric value (key code) to the second numeric

value (user menu key number). Every menu item is given a

unique key code (as if it were a dedicated front panel key). Refer to

the entry SCPI KEY NUMBERS for a listing of key codes.

SYSTem:KEY:CLEar

Clears the user menu. If

number is cleared, If ALL is sent, all menu keys are cleared.

is sent, only that particular key

SYSTem:KEY

SAVE

The save key grouping is disabled. In our box this disables the save

state feature. (Save Lock)

SYSTem:KEY:ENABle SAVE

Unlocks the save registers. The

to be enabled.

value is for the save registers

SYSTem:LANGuage

Causes the synthesizer to perform a language switch to another

language system.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMAND SUMMARY

is not affected by *RST. When you change the value from ON to

OFF, everything except calibration data is initialized or destroyed.

In particular, data in instrument state and all save/recall registers

are destroyed.

SYSTem:VERSion?

This query returns a formatted numeric value corresponding to

the SCPI version number to which the synthesizer complies. The

response has the form YYYY.V where the Ys represent the year

version (i.e. 1990) and the V represents an approved revision number

for that year. This is a query only and therefore does not have an

associated *RST state.

Causes the trigger event to occur regardless of other settings in the

subsystem. This event does not affect any other settings in this

subsystem.

This command has no effect unless the synthesizer is in the wait for

state. If the synthesizer is in the wait

its trigger action. This is an event and has no

state, it performs

condition.

lTRIGger:ODELay

TRIGger:ODELay.

suffix]

Sets and queries the trigger output delay, the time between when

the source is settled, (when Bit 1 of the Standard Operation Status

sent.

TRIGger:SOURce

TRIGger:SOURce?

Sets and queries the source of the trigger event.

This is a convenience command that does the equivalent of

UNIT:AM

UNIT:AM?

Sets and queries the default units for AM depth.

The *RST value is PCT.

UNIT:POWer [lvl suffix]

UNIT:POWer?

Sets and queries the default power subsystem units.

value is DBM.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SCPI STATUS

STRUCTURE

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE

STANDARD OPERATION STATUS GROUP

DATA QUESTIONABLE STATUS GROUP

NOTE:

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security Menu

SYSTEM

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

accesses the security function softkeys.

Turns off the synthesizer’s data display, active

entry, and message line areas.

Display

Writes alternating ones and zeros over all

Clear Memory

synthesizer state functions and save/recall registers

a selectable number of times, then returns the

synthesizer to the factory-preset state of operation.

Disables the save function.

Save Lock

Displays zeros for all accessible frequency

information.

Zero Freq

The features listed above together with the

Freq Offset

and Freq Mult provide the synthesizer with security controls

for a variety of situations. The local lockout (LLO) programming

command adds security when the synthesizer is used in an ATE

environment. A security calibration constant that can be accessed

through the service adjustment menu (requires a password for access)

is available also. Refer to the Service Guide for information on

calibration constants.

listed above.

“Using the Security Features,” in Chapter 1.

See Also

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set

(Full)

SERVICE

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates the self-test function of the synthesizer.

SCPI:

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Fault Menu, SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY

“OPERATOR’S CHECK and ROUTINE MAINTENANCE,”

Chapter 4.

Set

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

lets you set the attenuator separately from the rest

Description

of the ALC system. When an entry is made using this key, the

attenuator is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system, so

that the ^[POWER LEVEL) key controls the ALC system apart from the

attenuator.

SCPI: POWer:ATTenuation <num>[DB] or

Analyzer: SHLS

Programming Codes

See Also

(P O W E R L E V E L ),

“Working with Mixers/Reverse Power Effects,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SINGLE

Function Group

SWEEP

Menu Map

Description

This

selects single sweep mode, aborts any sweep in progress

and initiates a single sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time

function.

If you press (SINGLE) in the middle of a continuous sweep, the sweep is

aborted and the synthesizer retraces to the starting point but does

not start a sweep. Press

The amber LED above the

a second time to start the sweep.

is lit when the function is on.

Programming Codes

INITiate[:IMMediate]

Analyzer:

See Also

“Continuous, Single and Manual Sweep Operation,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Software Rev

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

This

displays the synthesizer’s programming language, HP-IB

Description

address, and firmware date code.

SCPI: *IDN?

Analyzer: 01

Programming Codes

See Also

HP-IB Menu, SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(SPAN)

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set a value for the frequency span in the center

frequency/frequency span mode of swept frequency operation.

Press

and use the entry area to enter the desired value.

The synthesizer sweeps from the span below to above the center

frequency.

Certain center frequency and frequency span combinations cause the

synthesizer to limit the value entered. In general, any combination

that causes the synthesizer to exceed its minimum or maximum

specified frequency is limited.

Programming Codes

FREQuency:SPAN

suffix] or

FREQuency:MODE

Analyzer: DF <num>

(STOP)

“Center Frequency/Span Operation,” in Chapter 1.

See Also

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates swept frequency mode and makes the start

frequency parameter the active function. Press

and use the

entry area to enter the desired value. The start/stop frequency must

be separated by at least 2 Hz in order to remain in the frequency

sweep mode. If start=stop frequency then the zero span mode is

entered.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Start

Trigger Bus

Start Sweep

Trigger Auto

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

When this

is selected, the synthesizer automatically triggers a

sweep. This is the fastest way to accomplish the sweep-retrace cycle.

An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: TRIGger:SOURce

Analyzer:

Programming Codes

See Also

Sweep Menu

Start Sweep

Trigger Bus

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

When this

is selected, the synthesizer waits for an HP-IB

trigger to trigger a sweep. An asterisk next to the key label indicates

that this feature is active.

TRIGger:SOURce BUS

Analyzer: TS

Programming Codes

See Also

(SINGLE), Sweep Menu

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Start Sweep

Trigger Ext

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

When this

is selected, the synthesizer waits for an external

hardware trigger to trigger a sweep. Connect the trigger pulse to

TRIGGER INPUT. It is activated on a TTL rising edge. An asterisk

next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: TRIGger:SOURce EXT

Analyzer:

Programming Codes

See Also

Sweep Menu

Step Control

Master

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you designate the synthesizer as the master control

in a dual synthesizer measurement system. A dual synthesizer

system (two-tone measurement system) facilitates accurate device

characterizations by providing one

reference for both

sources. This technique reduces instabilities from temperature or line

voltage fluctuations, or drift.

The synthesizers can be operated in either ramp sweep or step

sweep modes for both fixed offset and swept offset measurements.

Figure S-l shows the connections required for a two-tone system.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step Control Master

SCRLAR

SLRVE

SYNTHESIZER

Figure S-l. Connections Required for a Two-Tone Scalar Network Analyzer Measurement System

1. Designate one synthesizer as the master, the other as the slave.

2. Make the connections.

3. To avoid synchronization problems, always set up the slave

(frequency and power) before setting up the master.

4. Set up the master (frequency, power, and sweep time).

5. Set the sweep time on the slave.

6. Configure the synthesizers for step sweep, or ramp sweep.

7. Select the appropriate triggering scheme.

8. Activate the slave mode on the slave synthesizer.

9. Activate the master mode on the master synthesizer.

By connecting the master’s 10 MHz reference standard to the slave’s

10 MHz reference input, the master synthesizer’s

the frequency reference for both synthesizers.

supplies

In step sweep measurements, if the master synthesizer is not

connected to an external controller, it must automatically trigger

the steps. Set Step

a the scalar network analyzer is the step sweep controller, set

Step Trig Bus on the master synthesizer so that the

Pt Trig Auto on the master. When

analyzer can trigger the steps.

Programming Codes

SWEep:CONTrol:STATe

SWEep:CONTrol:TYPE

Analyzer: NONE

Step Control Slave, Step Swp Menu

See Also

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step Control Slave

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you designate the synthesizer as the slave in

a dual synthesizer measurement system. A dual synthesizer

system (two-tone measurement system) facilitates accurate device

characterizations by providing one

sources.

reference for both

Figure S-l shows the connections required for a two-tone system. On

the message line, the status message EXT REF appears indicating the

synthesizer has an external

reference. The start and stop

frequencies of the slave can be offset above or below those set on the

master for fixed offset two-tone measurements.

To synchronize properly for swept offset measurements, the 0 to 10

volt sweep ramp must be actively sweeping on the slave. If a CW

frequency is selected as the fixed LO frequency, the sweep ramp is

deactivated and the proper synchronization does not occur. Select a

center frequency with zero span to keep the slave’s voltage sweep

ramp active and ensure proper synchronization.

For synthesized step sweep measurements, set the number of sweep

points on the slave the same as on the master synthesizer. If the

master synthesizer is connected to a network analyzer, the analyzer

automatically sets the master synthesizer’s step size to match

the number of points displayed on the analyzer. Since the slave

synthesizer is not connected to the analyzer, set the slave to match

the master synthesizer. Allow the master to trigger the slave’s steps,

set Step Swp Pt Tsig Ext on the slave synthesizer.

For ramp sweep measurements, on the slave set the sweep time

equivalent to the master synthesizer. If the master is connected to a

network analyzer, the slave’s sweep time is slightly longer than the

master’s because the analyzer does not stop the sweep precisely on

the last point. Use the following formula to determine the slave’s

sweep time for a system controlled by an analyzer.

x 1.03 =

For fixed-offset ramp sweep measurements the same sweep time must

be set on both the master and the slave. Since the master’s sweep

time is typically determined by the measurement configuration, set

the slave to match the master.

For more accurate ramp sweeps, select Span Cal Always on

both the master and slave synthesizers. When this feature is active it

calibrates the frequency at the end of every frequency band.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step Points

Programming Codes

SWEep:CONTrol:STATe

SWEep:CONTrol:TYPE

Analyzer: NONE

Step Control Master, Step

See Also

Step Dwell

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

frequency mode of sweep operation. The dwell time for points in step

frequency sweep may range from 100 to The actual time

lets you set dwell times for points in the stepped

between points is the sum of dwell and phase lock times.

Select Step Dwell , then use the entry area to enter the desired

value.

uency]:DWELl <num>[time suffix] or

SCPI: SWEep[:FREQ

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Sweep Mode Step

Step Menu,

Step

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Points

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you define the number of step points in a stepped

frequency sweep. The number of points in a stepped sweep can

range from 2 to 801. Step Size and Step Points are dependent

variables. If you know how many steps are desired in a given sweep,

use the

Step Points to set the desired value The step size

will be calculated automatically.

SCPI: SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Step Size, Step Swp Menu, Sweep Mode Step

“Using Step Sweep,” in Chapter 1.

Step Size

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

sweep.

lets you specify the step size in a stepped frequency

The range of increment size is dependent on frequency

span and the number of step points desired, as given by the

formula: STEP SIZE = SPAN STEP POINTS. Step Size and

Step Points are dependent variables, as shown by the formula. If

a particular step size is desired, use the Step Size to set

the desired increment. The number of step points is then calculated

automatically.

uency]:STEP

SCPI: SWEep[:FREQ

Analyzer: NONE

<num>[freq suffix] or

Programming Codes

See Also

Step Points, Step Swp Menu, Sweep Mode Step

“Using Step Sweep,” in Chapter 1.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step Swp

Step Swp Menu

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

frequency sweep entry menu.

reveals the stepped

This

Couples the dwell time for stepped

sweep points to ramp sweep, sweep

time.

Dwell Coupled

Causes the synthesizer to act as the

master control in a dual synthesizer

measurement setup.

Step Control Master

Step Control Slave

Causes the synthesizer to act as

the slave in a dual synthesizer

measurement setup.

Sets the dwell time for points in

stepped sweep.

Step Dwell

Sets the number of points in a

stepped sweep.

Step Points

Sets the increment value for the

points in a stepped sweep.

Step Size

Automatically steps the synthesizer

to the next point in a stepped

sweep.

Step Swp Pt Trig Auto

Steps the synthesizer to the next

point in a stepped sweep when an

HP-IB trigger is received.

Step Swp Pt Trig Bus

Step Swp Pt Trig Ext

Steps the synthesizer to the next

point in a stepped sweep when

an external hardware trigger is

received.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Sweep Mode

“Using Step Sweep,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S t e p S w p P t

Trig Auto

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

When this

is selected, the synthesizer automatically steps to

the next point in the stepped frequency sweep until all points are

swept. The time between points is equal to the sum of the dwell and

phase lock times. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this

feature is active.

SCPI: SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Step Swp Menu, Sweep Mode Step

“Using Step Sweep,” in Chapter 1.

S w p

Trig

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

When this

is selected, the synthesizer steps to the next point

in a stepped frequency sweep when an HP-IB trigger

(*TRG, <GET>) is received (leading edge TTL). When the last

frequency point is reached and continuous sweep is selected, the

next trigger causes the step sweep to return to the start frequency.

Connect the trigger signal to the TRIGGER INPUT BNC. An

asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active.

SCPI: SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce BUS

Analyzer: TS

Programming Codes

See Also

Sweep Mode Step

Step Swp

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step Swp Pt

Trig Ext

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

When this

is selected, the synthesizer steps to the next point

in the stepped frequency sweep when an external hardware trigger is

received. When the last frequency point is reached and continuous

sweep is selected, the next trigger causes the step sweep to return to

the start frequency. Connect the trigger signal to the TRIGGER

INPUT BNC. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this

feature is active.

SCPI: SWEep:TRIGger:SOURce EXT

Analyzer: TS

Programming Codes

See Also

Sweep Mode Step

Step Swp Menu,

“Using Step Sweep,” in Chapter 1.

FREQUENCY

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates swept frequency mode and makes the stop

frequency parameter the active function. The start/stop frequency

must be separated by at least 2 Hz in order to remain in the

frequency sweep mode. If start=stop frequency then the zero span

mode is entered.

Programming Codes

FREQuency:STOP <num>[freq suffix] or

FREQuency:MODE:SWEep

Analyzer: FB <num>

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(CENTER),

FREQUENCY (MENU),

See Also

“CW Operation Start/Stop Frequency Sweep,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

accesses the sweep menu softkeys.

Activates manual sweep mode.

Manual Sweep

Depending on what parameter is

sweeping, frequency and/or power

can be changed manually with the

rotary knob or the arrow keys.

Automatically triggers a sweep

Start Sweep Trigger Auto

Start Sweep Trigger Bus

when (SINGLE) or

is pressed.

Waits for an HP-IB trigger to

trigger a sweep when

is pressed.

Waits for an external hardware

trigger to trigger a sweep when

Start Sweep Trigger Ext

is pressed.

Activates the list frequency sweep

mode.

Sweep Mode List

Sweep Mode Ramp

Activates the analog frequency

sweep mode.

Activates the stepped frequency

sweep mode.

Sweep Mode Step

Auto

Sets the sweep time to a minimum

value for a given span.

Sets the time delay after phase-lock

and before a trigger pulse is sent

from the ANALYZER INTERFACE

BNC. A source settled SRQ is

generated.

Delay

HP 8360

Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Ramp

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Sweep Mode List

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

This

activates the step frequency list mode. To use this type

Description

of sweep, a frequency list must have been entered, otherwise an error

message appears. In this mode, the synthesizer steps only those

frequencies defined by the frequency list. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: FREQuency:MODE LIST

Analyzer: SN

Programming Codes

See Also

CONNECTORS, List Menu

“Creating and Using a Frequency List,” in Chapter 1.

Sweep Mode Ramp

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates the analog frequency sweep mode. Ramp

sweep mode is the factory preset state. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sweep Mode

Programming Codes

FREQuency:MODE

uency]:GENeration

SWEep[:FREQ

Analyzer: NONE

CONNECTORS,

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Manual Sweep,(SINGLE),

See Also

Sweep Mode Step

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

This

activates the stepped frequency step mode. In this

Description

mode, the synthesizer steps from the start frequency to the stop

frequency, by the designated frequency step size. Manual, continuous,

and single sweeps can be performed in this mode. An asterisk next to

the key label indicates that this feature is active.

Programming Codes

FREQuency:MODE

uency]:GENeration

SWEep[:FREQ

Analyzer: NONE

Manual Sweep,(SINGLE), Step Swp Menu

“Using Step Sweep,” in Chapter 1.

See Also

HP 8360

Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Swp Span Cal

Always

USER CAL

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

causes a sweep span calibration each time the frequency

span is changed. An asterisk next to the key label indicates this

feature is active.

SCPI: CALibration:SPAN:AUTO

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Freq Cal Menu

“Using Frequency Calibration,” in Chapter 1.

Swp Span Cal

Once

USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates sweep span calibration immediately and

performs it only once. An asterisk next to the key label indicates this

feature is active.

SCPI: CALibration:SPAN[:EXECute]

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Freq Cal Menu

“Using Frequency Calibration,” in Chapter 1.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SWEEP

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

lets you set a sweep time for frequency sweeps or power

but the fastest sweep

sweeps. The sweep time range is 10 ms to

time is constrained by the frequency span. The fastest possible sweep

can be determined automatically:

1. Press SWEEP (MENU), this reveals the sweep menu keys.

Select more

, to scroll to the next page of the sweep menu.

Select

Auto, to set the sweep time to automatic. The

synthesizer calculates the fastest possible calibrated sweep time for

any sweep span.

Whenever you press

the active entry area displays

the current sweep time and whether the sweep time is coupled to

the frequency span (far right hand side displays: AUTO). If the word

AUTO is not displayed then the sweep time auto function is off.

<num>[time suffix] or

SCPI: SWEep[:FREQ

Analyzer: ST <num>

Programming Codes

See Also

Power Sweep

“Power Level and Sweep Time Operation,” in Chapter 1.

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Auto

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This

value for a chosen span and meet all specifications. The sweep time

is limited by a 300 sweep rate. An asterisk next to the key

lets you set the synthesizer’s sweep time to a minimum

Description

label indicates this feature is active.

SCPI: SWEep:TIME:AUTO

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

“Power Level and Sweep Time Operation” in Chapter 1.

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

reveals the system menu.

Causes the synthesizer to alternate

on successive sweeps between the

present instrument state and a second

instrument state stored in an internal

Alternate Regs

Dims the synthesizer’s display.

Dim Display

Displays the present status of the

synthesizer.

Disp Status

Reveals the HP-IB control menu.

Sets the preset state, as defined by the

manufacturer, to be recalled by the

key.

Preset Mode Factory

Sets the preset state, as defined by the

user, to be recalled by (PRESET].

Preset Mode User

Reveals the frequency standard options

menu.

Ref Osc Menu

Stores the present instrument state in a

special preset storage register.

Save User Preset

Reveals the menu that controls the

security features of the synthesizer.

Security Menu

Software Rev

Causes the synthesizer to display the

date code of its internal software.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SYSTEM [MENU)

Clear

Activates the USER-DEFINED

and lets you delete a single key within

that menu.

Clear

Activates the USER-DEFINED

and clears

keys in that menu.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

listed above, CONNECTORS, USER-DEFINED

See Also

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Freq Std

Auto

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

This

sets the synthesizer to choose its frequency standard

Description

automatically. If an external standard is connected to the 10 MHz

REF INPUT BNC, then it is chosen as the reference. If no external

standard is connected, the internal standard is chosen as the

reference. If the internal standard has been disconnected also, the

synthesizer operates in a free run state. An asterisk next to the key

label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: ROSCillator[:SOURce]:AUTO

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Ref Osc Menu

Freq Std

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

This

tells the synthesizer to accept an external 10 MHz signal

The external signal must be applied to

Description

as the frequency reference.

the 10 MHz REF INPUT BNC connector located on the rear panel.

If no external signal is applied, UNLOCK and EXT REF appears on

the message line of the display. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference T-l

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Freq Std

SCPI:

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

Ref Osc Menu

See Also

Freq Std

Intrnl

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

sets the synthesizer to select the internal 10 MHz signal

as the frequency reference. If the internal signal is disconnected or

not working properly, UNLOCK appears on the message line of the

display. An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature

is active.

SCPI:

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Ref Osc Menu

Freq Std

None

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

This

sets the reference oscillator to a free-run state, where

Description

no frequency reference is used. An asterisk next to the key label

indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI:

Analyzer: NONE

NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Ref

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delay

Tracking Menu

POWER, USER CAL

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this

occurs in the POWER

(MENU). Both

One

the other occurs in the USER CAL

operate the same way. These access

the tracking menu.

Realigns the synthesizer’s output filter and

oscillator to maximize output power for the

swept frequency mode.

Auto Track

Periodically realigns the synthesizer’s output

filter and oscillator to maximize output power

for the CW frequency mode.

Peak RF Always

Peak RF Once

Realigns the synthesizer’s output filter and

oscillator to maximize output power for the

CW frequency mode.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer:

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above.

“Using the Tracking Feature,” in Chapter 1.

Delay

SWEEP

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you specify the amount of time after phase-lock

before a trigger pulse is sent out of the TRIGGER OUTPUT BNC.

The delay can be set from 0 to 3.2 seconds. An asterisk next to the

key label indicates this feature is active.

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delay

SCPI: TRIGger:ODELay <num>[time suffix]

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

Start Sweep Trigger Auto, Start Sweep Trigger Bus,

Start Sweep Trigger Ext

See Also

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POWER

Function Group

Menu Map

This

uncouples the attenuator (if there is one) from the ALC

Description

system. It allows independent control of attenuator settings. An

asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

To set the attenuator after it is uncoupled, select Set

view the current ALC and attenuator settings, press

POWER LEVEL

SCPI: POWer:ATTentuation:AUTO

Analyzer: SHPS <num>

Programming Codes

See Also

to set the ALC, SHSL <num>

o attenuator. PL causes the attenuator couple to the ALC.

( P O W E R L E V E L ) , S e t

“Working with Mixers/Reverse Power Effects,” in Chapter 1.

Unlock Info

SERVICE

Function Group

Menu Map

This

causes the synthesizer to display lock/unlocked status of

Description

all the phase-lock-loops. An asterisk next to the key label indicates

this feature is active.

SCPI: DIAGnostics:OUTput:UNLocks?

Programming Codes

See Also

Analyzer:

diagnostics test results.

STATUS MESSAGES

“OPERATOR’S CHECK and ROUTINE MAINTENANCE,”

Chapter 4.

Operating and Programming Reference U-l

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power

POWER

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

activates the power step size function. It can be set

In this mode, power is stepped by the up/down

from 0.01 to 20

arrow keys. An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is

active.

Programming Codes

rement]

POWer:STEP:AUTO

Analyzer: SP or SHPL and UP or DOWN

Size CW,

Size Swept

See Also

“Programming Typical Measurements,” in Chapter 1.

Size

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you set the frequency step size for the CW

frequency mode. The step size may be set from 1 Hz to 10

The factory preset size is 100 MHz. CW frequency is

incremented/decremented by pressing the up/down arrow keys.

If an underline cursor appears under a digit in the entry display, then

the value will be modified by the up/down arrow keys or the rotary

knob. The increment/decrement size in this case is the underlined

digit by the power of 10.

If the up/down function is on (asterisk next to key label) and the

cursor is not under one of the active entry area digits, then frequency

value is changed by the up/down size using either the up/down arrow

keys or the rotary knob.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SCPI: FREQuency:STEP[:INCR] <num>[freq suffix] or

Analyzer: SF or SHCF <num>

Programming Codes

See Also

Manual Sweep,

Sweep Mode Step,

Size Swept

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

sets the frequency step size in the swept frequency step

The factory

mode. The step size may be set from 1 Hz to 10

preset step size is 100 MHz. Step size values are entered using the

entry area.

If an underline cursor appears under a digit in the entry display, then

the value will be modified by the up/down arrow keys or the rotary

knob. The increment/decrement size in this case is the underlined

digit by the power of 10.

If the up/down function is on (asterisk next to key label) and the

cursor is not under one of the active entry area digits, then frequency

value is changed by the up/down size using either the up/down arrow

keys or the rotary knob.

SCPI: FREQuency:STEP[:INCR]

Analyzer: SF or SHCF <num>

suffix] or

Programming Codes

See Also

Size

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER CAL

This

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

accesses the user calibration softkeys.

Performs a complete alignment as

determined by the instrument settings.

Cal

Accesses the

menu.

of the tracking

Tracking Menu

AM Cal Menu

Accesses the AM calibration menu.

Accesses the Frequency span calibration

menu.

Freq Cal Menu

Ext Det Cal

NONE

Uses an external power meter to

calibrate an external detector’s output

voltage relative to power.

Programming Codes

See Also

listed above.

“Optimizing Synthesizer Performance,” in Chapter 1.

USER DEFINED

NONE

Function Group

Menu Map

This

reveals the customized menu created by selecting

and assigning them to this menu. The user defined menu is

Description

empty until you assign keys to it. Three sections (12 key assignment

locations) of menu are available for key assignment.

Any

can be assigned to any of the 12 positions. A

assigned to the user defined menu performs as if it is in its home

menu. Pressing the (PRESET) key does not erase the contents of this

menu.

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clear

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

Also

(PRIOR),

Clear

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

single

lets you recall the user defined menu and remove a

that appears in that menu.

1. Select

The user defined menu appears in the

label area. The active entry area displays:

USER Soft Key to Clear

2. Select the

you wish to remove from the menu. The active

entry area turns off and the

is removed from the user

defined menu. The user defined menu remains in the

area.

label

SCPI: SYSTem:KEY:CLEar <n>

where, n = a number from 1 to 12.

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

USER DEFINED

UsrMenu

UsrMenu Clear

Function Group

Menu Map

SYSTEM

HP 8360

Operating and Programming Reference

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clear

This

recalls the user defined menu and removes

Description

assigned to that menu. The empty user defined menu remains in the

label area.

SCPI: SYSTem:KEY:CLEar ALL

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

(ASSIGN), USER DEFINED

Clear

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zero Freq

SYSTEM

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

lets you enable a security feature that displays zeroes for

all accessible frequency information. Once this security feature is

activated, it can be turned off by a front panel (PRESET). An asterisk

next to the key label indicates that this feature is active.

SCPI: SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] ON

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

Security Menu

Waveform Menu

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

The waveform menu (Option 002 only) allows you to choose sine,

square, triangle, ramp, and noise waveforms for internal AM and

FM. The default is sine wave. There are two waveform menus. The

waveform menu in the AM menu sets the waveform for amplitude

modulation only. The waveform menu in the FM menu sets the

waveform for frequency modulation only.

SCPI: NONE, see the individual

Analyzer: NONE

listed.

Programming Codes

See Also

also see “AM”, “FM”, and “Modulation”.

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Operating and Programming Reference

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zoom

FREQUENCY

Function Group

Menu Map

Description

This

activates the CF/Span sweep mode (zoom). In this

mode, span is controlled by the up/down arrow keys. Center

frequency is controlled by the rotary knob or the numeric entry keys.

The left and right arrows control the resolution with which the center

frequency can be changed. This is a front-panel-only feature and is

inaccessible over HP-IB.

SCPI: NONE

Analyzer: NONE

Programming Codes

See Also

(SPAN)

Operating and Programming Reference

HP 8360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ERROR MESSAGES

This section lists the error messages that may be displayed by the

front panel or transmitted by the synthesizer over the interface

bus. Each error message is accompanied by an explanation,

and suggestions are provided to help solve the problem. Where

applicable, references are given to related chapters of the operating

and service manuals.

Introduction

A list of the messages displayed on the message line of the

synthesizer are included in separate list because they are considered

status messages rather than error messages.

No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified

personnel. To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.

WARNING

ABILITY TO SAVE A RECALL REGISTER IS LOCKED OUT:

This message occurs when the save/recall registers have been

disabled by the save lock feature or by a calibration constant.

Front Panel Error

Messages in

Order

ADDR ERROR EXCEPTION: This can only be caused by an

internal processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK”

chapter for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

Auto Track Failed! Cal Not Updated: occurs when auto track

has been initiated and for some reason has failed. Refer to the

“OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter and follow the local operator’s

check procedures.

BUS ERROR EXCEPTION: This can only be caused by an internal

Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

processor error.

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

DEFAULTING LANGUAGE: This error message is displayed in

conjunction with one of the following messages.

Invalid Language set on rear panel switch. The HP-IB/Language

switch located on the rear panel has been set to an invalid

programming language selection. The programming language is

defaulted to the previous setting. Check the rear panel switch.

See “INSTALLATION” for information on language selection.

Error Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTION NOT INSTALLED. The language selected and the

corresponding firmware/hardware necessary to run that language

is not present in the synthesizer. See “INSTALLATION” for

information on language selection.

DISPLAY IS NOT RESPONDING: Can appear on the front panel

emulator if the internal processor can not communicate with the

display properly. This error indicates a display failure or a display

connector problem.

DIVIDE BY ZERO EXCEPTION: This can only be caused by an

internal processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK”

chapter for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

EEROM FAILED, LOST CAL: This error indicates that the

synthesizer has lost its calibration constants and may not meet

specifications. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter and

follow the local operator’s check procedures. If you are a qualified

service technician and this failure occurs, read the Calibration

Constants section in the Service Guide.

EEROM Failed !!: This error will only occur if the service

adjustment menu is accessed. Specifically, an attempt has been made

to write to a test patch and EEROM failed to store the data.

ERROR: CALIBRATION FAILED !!: This error will only occur if

the service adjustment menu is accessed. Specifically, an

sweep

ramp calibration has been attempted and failed. Run the sweep

ramp selftest, refer to “MENUS and SELFTESTS” in the Assembly

Level Repair Manual.

ERROR Must first enter correction freq: This error occurs when a

correction point does not have its corresponding frequency entered

first. Refer to “Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction

Array,” in chapter 1 of this handbook.

ERROR: Must first enter a List Frequency !!: This error occurs

when a dwell or offset value does not have its corresponding

frequency entered first. Refer to “Creating and Using a Frequency

List,” in chapter 1 of this handbook.

!!: This error occurs when the ALC is

ERROR: Power Search Failed

in the ALC search mode and is unable to level to the desired power

level. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter and follow the

local operator’s check procedures.

This error occurs in association

ERROR: Start must be < Stop !!:

with the frequency list, auto fill, feature. If the start frequency

entered is greater than the stop frequency, you will see this error.

Correct by entering a start frequency less than the stop frequency.

!!: This error occurs in association

ERROR: Stop must be > Start

with the frequency list, auto fill, feature. If the stop frequency

entered is less than the stop frequency you will see this error. Correct

by entering a stop frequency greater than the start frequency.

Error Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error in Test Patch entry

!!: This error will only occur if the service

adjustment menu is accessed. Specifically, one of three entries has

been attempted.

An invalid test patch number.

An invalid test patch data point.

An invalid parameter of the test patch specification.

Correct by entering a valid parameter.

!!: This error occurs in association with

step must be

the user power flatness menu, auto fill increment, feature. If the

increment value entered is less than zero you will see this error.

Correct by entering an increment value greater than zero.

FUNCTION LOCKED OUT: This error will only occur if the

service adjustment menu is accessed. Specifically, the calibration

constant that inhibits access to certain functions has been set. If you

need access to the function, contact a qualified service technician.

HP-IB SYNTAX ERROR: This indicates that an analyzer language

syntax error has been encountered. Review the program to find the

syntax error.

ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION EXCEPTION: This can only be

caused by an internal processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S

CHECK” chapter for instructions on contacting a qualified service

technician.

INPUT BUFFER EMPTY: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

INPUT BUFFER FULL: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

INVALID LANGUAGE ON REAR PANEL SWITCH: The

an ua e switch located on the rear panel has been set to an

H P - I B / L g g

invalid programming language selection. Check the rear panel switch.

See “INSTALLATION” for information on language selection.

There are two cases when this error

Invalid Save/Recall Register..

message is possible.

If a save function is attempted to either register 0 or 9.

If a recall function is attempted on register 9.

Correct by selecting a valid save/recall register.

INTERRUPT: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

Error Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTERRUPT: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

INTERRUPT: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

Number of pts must be

!!: This error occurs in association

with the user power flatness, auto fill number of points, feature. If

the number of points requested is less than two, you will see this

error message. Correct by entering number of points greater than or

equal to two.

OPTION NOT INSTALLED: This error occurs when the HP-IB

language switch is set to a configuration requiring a certain

firmware/hardware combination to be present in the synthesizer. See

“INSTALLATION” for information on language selection and see

“Specifications” for information on option available.

PRIV VIOLATION EXCEPTION: This can only be caused by an

internal processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK”

chapter for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

RECALL REGISTERS LOST: This message can appear in

association with the security menu feature, memory clear. Also, a

weak, dead, or disconnected internal battery can cause this message.

Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for instructions on

contacting a qualified service technician.

REQUIRES system interface OFF: This error message

indicates that the synthesizer is connected to a network analyzer and

can not run selftest. Correct by disconnecting the system interface

cable from the synthesizer.

SPURIOUS INTERRUPT: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

SYSTEM CONTROLLER ON BUS: This error message is

generated when an external controller is active on the HP-IB and the

synthesizer has attempted to act as the controller. Disconnect the

HP-IB interface or return the synthesizer to LOCAL operation and

repeat the request.

TOO MANY CORRECTION PTS REQUESTED: This error occurs

in association with the user power flatness menu. The maximum

number of correction points has been reached or the addition of the

points requested will exceed the maximum. The maximum number of

points available is 801.

TOO MANY LIST POINTS REQUESTED: This error occurs in

association with the frequency list menu. The maximum number of

list points has been reached or the addition of the points requested

will exceed the maximum. The maximum number of points available

is 801.

Error Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRACE EXCEPTION: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

EXCEPTION: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

EXCEPTION: This can only be caused by an internal

processor error. Refer to the “OPERATOR’S CHECK” chapter for

instructions on contacting a qualified service technician.

Too many test patches !!: This error will only occur if the service

adjustment menu is accessed. Specifically, the maximum number of

test patches has been reached and can accept no more.

WAIT-SAVING CALIBRATION: This error will only occur if the

service adjustment menu is accessed. Specifically, a save calibration

has been initiated and not yet completed when another request is

made.

WRONG PASSWORD: This error occurs when the service

adjustment menu password is entered incorrectly or the wrong

password has been used. Qualified service technicians refer to

in the Service Guide for more information.

“ADJUSTMENTS,”

Error

Messages in

Numerical Order

0, No Error: This message indicates that the device has no errors

and is currently ready to perform the operations for which it is

designed.

Synthesizer Specific

Error Messages

1, FUNCTION DISABLED: The particular function invoked has

been disabled by a calibration constant. If you need access to the

function, contact a qualified service technician.

This error occurs when the service adjustment

2, Wrong password:

menu password is entered incorrectly or the wrong password has been

used. Qualified service technicians refer to “ADJUSTMENTS,” in

the Service Guide for more information.

4, Unable to store data in EEROM

5, Not allowed to change address

6, Switch on Processor Board is Set: This error occurs when a

service adjustment menu password can not be set because the

override switch on the processor is set. Qualified service technicians

refer to “ADJUSTMENTS,” in the Service Guide for more

information.

Error Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Universal

Error

Messages

Error Messages From -499 To -400

These error messages indicate that the Output Queue Control of

the synthesizer has detected a problem with the message exchange

protocol. This type of error sets the Query Error Bit (bit 2) in the

Event Status Register. One of the following has occurred:

An attempt has been made to read data from the Output Queue

when no output is present or is pending.

Data in the Output Queue has been lost.

Events that generate Query Errors do not generate Command Errors,

Execution Errors, or Device-specific Errors.

-440, Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite res

-430, Query DEADLOCKED

-430, Query DEADLOCKED;Output Buffer Full

-420, Query UNTERMINATED

-420, Query UNTERMINATED;Nothing To Say

-410, Query INTERRUPTED

Error Messages From -399 To -300

These error messages indicate that some device operations did not

properly complete, possibly due to an abnormal hardware or firmware

condition. This type of error sets the Device-specific Error (bit 3)

in the Event Status Register. Events that generate Device-specific

Errors do not generate Command Errors, Execution Errors, or Query

Errors.

-350, Too many errors and also -32768

-330, Self-test failed

-330, Self-test failed;Power-On Tests

-313, Calibration memory

Error Messages From -299 To -200

These error messages indicate that an error has been detected by the

synthesizer’s Execution Control Block. An error of this type sets the

in the Event Status Register. One of the

Execution Error Bit (bit 4)

following events has occurred:

A data element following a header was evaluated by the synthesizer

as outside of its legal input range or is inconsistent with the

synthesizer’s capability.

A valid program message can not be properly executed due to

some instrument condition.

Execution Errors are reported by the synthesizer after rounding

and expression evaluation operations have taken place. Errors

that generate Execution Errors do not generate Command Errors,

Device-specific Errors, or Query Errors.

Error Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-240, Hardware error; Rear panel HP-IB switch

-224, Illegal parameter value

-222, Data out of range;Expected O-l

-222, Data out of range

-221, Settings conflict

-221, Settings conflict;List Arrays Invalid

-221, Settings conflict;Power And Level Mode

-221, Settings conflict;Power and attenuator

-221, Settings conflict;mm Module Mismatch

-220, Parameter

not allowed

-213,

ignored

-200, Execution

more room in EEROM

Not Installed

Error Messages From 199 to

100

These error messages indicate that a SCPI syntax error has been

detected by the synthesizer’s parser. An error of this type sets the

in the Event Status Register. One of the

Command Error Bit (bit 5)

following events has occurred:

A syntax error has been detected. Possible errors are: a data

element that violates the device listening formats or whose type is

unacceptable to the instrument.

A semantic error has been detected indicating that an unrecognized

header was received.

was entered into the input buffer

A Group Execute Trigger (GET)

inside a SCPI program message.

Events that generate Command Errors do not generate Execution

Errors, Device-specific Errors, or Query Errors.

-178, Expression data not allowed

-170, Expression

terminator

-161, Invalid block data;Bad terminator

-160, Block data error

-160, Block data

-151, Invalid string data;Bad terminator

-144, Character data too chars

block type

-141, Invalid character data;Bad char in token

-138, Suffix not allowed

-131, Invalid suffix;This one not allowed

-123, Exponent too

number

-123, Exponent too

overflow

-122, RESERVED

-121, Invalid character in number

-120, Numeric data

113, Undefined

format

terminator

not allowed

mnemonic

-113, Undefined

-109, Missing parameter

-108, Parameter not allowed;Too many

Error Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-105, GET not allowed

-104, Data type error

-104, Data type

not allowed

-104, Data type

-103, Invalid separator

Error Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Maps

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

This section lists the specifications for the HP 8360 Synthesized

Sweepers. In a effort to improve these synthesized sweepers,

Hewlett-Packard has made changes to this product which are

identified with changes in the serial number prefix.

To check if your synthesized sweeper specifications are the same as

those listed in this section:

1. Locate your instrument model number and serial prefix number in

the “Instrument History Changes” table in Chapter 5.

2. Check the right column of this table to determine whether any

changes apply to your instrument’s model number/serial prefix

number combination.

3. If a change is listed, check this change to determine if

specifications other than those listed in this section apply. The

changes are included in Chapter 5.

Sp ecifica t ion s d escr ib e w a r r a n t ed in st r u m en t p er for m a n ce over t h e 0 t o

t em p er a t u r e r a n ge excep t a s n ot ed ot h er w ise. Sp ecifica t ion s a p p ly a ft er fu ll u ser

ca lib r a t ion a n d in cou p led a t t en u a t or m od e of op er a t ion (ALC level gr ea t er t h a n

-10

Su p p lem en ta l ch a r a cter istics, d en oted typ ica l or n om in a l, a r e in ten d ed to

p r ovid e in for m a t ion u sefu l in a p p lyin g t h e in st r u m en t , b u t a r e n on -w a r r a n t ed

p a r a m e t e r s.

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Frequency

10 MHz to 20

2 to 20

Range

10 MHz to 20

2 to 20

High Power

10 MHz to 26.5

10 MHz to 40

10 MHz to 50

Standard: 1

Option 008: 1 Hz

Resolution

Frequency Bands

(for CW signals)

Frequency Range

10 MHz to < 2

Band

to < 7

to < 13.5

to < 20

to < 26.5

to < 33.4

to <

13.5

26.5

33.4

to 50

Frequency Modes:

Accuracy: Same as time base

CW and Manual Sweep

Switching Time

For Steps Within a Frequency Band: 15 ms + 5

Maximum, or Across Band Switch Points: 50 ms

Step or List Modes within a frequency band: 5 ms

size

step size

step

Th is b a n d is 33.4

t o 40

on th e HP

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accuracy: Same as time base

Minimum Step Size: Same as frequency resolution

Number of Points: 2 to 801

Synthesized Step

Sweep

Switching Time: Same as CW

Dwell Time: 100

to 3.2

Accuracy: Same as time base

Minimum Step Size: Same as frequency resolution

Number of Points: 1 to 801

Synthesized List Mode

Ramp Sweep Mode

Switching Time: Same as CW

Dwell Time: 100

to 3.2

(sweep time

100 ms and

5 s):

Sweep Widths

accuracy.

n x 10 MHz: 0.1% of sweep width

time base

Sweep Widths > n x 10 MHz: Lesser of 1% of sweep width or n x

1 MHz 0.1% of sweep width.

Sweep Time: 10 ms to 100 seconds, 300

maximum rate

Accuracy: Calibration

Voltage Effects

Stability

Aging Rate

Temperature Effects

Line

Internal 10 MHz

Time Base

Aging Rate: 5 x

1 x

With Temperature: 1 x

With Line Voltage: 5 x 10

typical

for line voltage change of

typical

Sw eep t im e

150

a n d

5 s for Op t ion 006 in st r u m en t s.

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RF Output

Output Power

M a x i m u m

S t a n d a r d

O p t i o n 006

H P

Ou t p u t F r eq u en cies < 20

Ou t p u t F r eq u en cies 20

H P

Ou t p u t F r eq u en cies < 26.5

Ou t p u t F r eq u en cies > 26.5

H P

Ou t p u t F r eq u en cies < 26.5

Ou t p u t F r eq u en cies

26.5

a n d < 40

With a tten u a tor (Op tion 001): Min im u m

ou t p u t p ow er is -110

Ma xim u m leveled ou t p u t p ow er is r ed u ced b y 1.5

t o 20

2.0

a b ove

a n d 2.5

a b ove 40

Minimum

Standard: -20

Resolution: 0.02

Option 001: -110

Switching Time: (without attenuator change): 10 ms, typical

Temperature Stability: 0.01 typical

Typical Maximum Available Power

26.5

Frequency

Sp ecifica t ion a p p lies over t h e 0 t o

fr eq u en cies > 20 Ma xim u m leveled ou t p u t p ow er over t h e 35 t o

t em p er a t u r e r a n ge t yp ica lly d egr a d es b y less t h a n 2

t em p er a t u r e r a n ge (0 t o

for ou tp u t

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accuracy

Specifications apply in CW, step, list, manual sweep, and ramp sweep

modes of operation.

Frequency

Power

2.0

2.0 and

> -10

-60

< -60

Flatness

Specifications apply in CW, step, list, manual sweep, and ramp sweep

modes of operation.

Frequency

> 40

> 2.0 and 40

2.0 and 20

< 2.0

Power

$10

-10

fl.O

-60

Sp ecifica t ion a p p lies over t h e 15 t o

50 MH z.

t em p er a t u r e r a n ge for ou t p u t fr eq u en cies

t em p er a t u r e r a n ge a n d a r e d egr a d ed 0.3

Sp ecifica t ion a p p lies over t h e

ou t sid e of t h a t r a n ge.

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Typical HP

Power Flatness

4.1

-0.2

0.01

26.5

Frequency

Range: -20

step attenuator.

to maximum available power, can be offset using

Analog Power Sweep

External Leveling

R a n g e

At External HP

Detector: -36 to

At External Leveling Input: -200

to -0.5 volts

Bandwidth

External Detector Mode: 10 or 100

modulation mode dependent), nominal

Power Meter Mode: 0.7 Hz, nominal

(sweep speed and

(internally leveled),

Source Match

< 20

< 40

< 50

SWR

Typ ica lly

SWR a t fr eq u en cies b elow 50 MH z.

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Typical ALC Linearity

- 1 0

A L C

Specifications apply in CW, step, list, and manual sweep modes of

operation.

Spectral Purity

Harmonics

Spurious Signals

O u t p u t

H P

F r e q u e n c i e s H P

2.2

Sta n d a r d

Op t ion 006

- 3 0

-307

2.2 a n d

26.5

Sta n d a r d

- 5 0

- 2 5

- 6 0

- 5 0

- 6 0

- 5 0

006 - 6 0

26.5

Sta n d a r d

006

- 4 0

Subharmonics

H P

o u t p u t

F r e q u e n c i e s H P

N o n e

- 5 0

N o n e

- 5 0

Non e

- 5 0

a n d

- 5 0

> 20 a n d

Sp e cifica t ion

is - 2 0

b e l o w50M H z .

typ ica l b e l o w

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Typical HP

Harmonics Subharmonics

-20

-30

-40

-50

-70

-80

-90

-100

Carrier Frequency

Typical HP

Harmonics

-20

-30

-40

-50

-70

-80

-90

-100

13.5

Carrier Frequency

Non-Harmonically Related

O u t p u t F r e q u e n c i e s :

2.0

- 6 0

- 5 8

- 5 4

- 5 2

2.0 a n d < 20

a n d

26.5

Sp ecifica tion a p p lies a t ou tp u t levels 0

a n d b elow .

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power-Line Related (< 300 Hz offset

carrier)

10 MH z t o < 7

- 5 5

- 4 9

- 4 5

- 4 3

- 3 9

- 3 7

t o < 13.5

t o 20

13.5

t o

t o < 38

t o 50

26.5

Single-Sideband

Phase Noise

Offset from Carrier

Band(s)

100 Hz

100

-107

-101

-97

-95

-91

-89

10 MHz to < 7

-70

-64

-60

-58

-54

-52

-78

-72

-68

-66

-62

-60

-86

-80

-76

-74

-70

-68

to < 13.5

13.5

> 20

26.5

to 20

to < 26.5

to < 38

to 50

T y p i c a l P h a s e N o i s e

C a r r i e r )

- 6 0

O f f s e t F r o m C a r r i e r

CW Mode or Sweep Widths

n x 10 MHz: n x 60 Hz, typical

Residual FM

(RMS, 50 Hz to 15

bandwidth)

Sweep Widths

n x 10 MHz: n x 15 typical

F r eq u en cy r a n ge is 26.5

t o 40

on th e HP

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Modulation

Pulse modulation specifications apply for output frequencies

400 MHz and above.

Pulse

Standard

Option 006

On/Off

Rise/Fall Times

Minimum Width

Internally Leveled

Search Mode

25 ns

10 ns

Output Frequencies < 2.0

50 ns

15 ns

Output Frequencies

ALC Off Mode

2.0

50 ns

15 ns

Output Frequencies < 2.0

Output Frequencies 2.0

Minimum Repetition Frequency

Internally leveled

Search Mode

10 Hz

ALC Off Mode

Level Accuracy

relative to CW level)

Widths

(Search Mode)

typical

Video Feedthrough

Output Frequencies < 2.0

Power Levels

Power Levels > 10

Output Frequencies

2.0

0.2%

typical

Overshoot, Ringing

typical

80 ns, typical

60 ns, typical

80 ns, typical

Output Frequencies < 2.0

Output Frequencies

2.0

Compression

ns, typical

Output Frequencies < 2.0

Output Frequencies

2.0

In th e HP

sp ecifica t ion a p p lies a t ALC levels

t em p er a t u r e r a n ge. Sp ecifica t ion d egr a d es 5

b elow ALC level 0 in t h ose m od els.

a n d a b ove, a n d

b elow a n d

over t h e 20 t o

p er

Op t ion 002 a d d s 30

d ela y a n d

p u lse com p r ession for ext er n a l p u lse in p u t s.

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Pulse Generator

Width Range: 1

Period Range: 2

Resolution: 1

to 65 ms

Bandwidth (3

maximum rated power):

30% depth, modulation peaks 3

below

AM and Scan

DC to 100

(typically DC to 300

Modulation Depth

(ALC levels noted, can be offset using step attenuator)

Normal Mode: -20

to 1

below maximum available power

Deep Mode

Unleveled

Sensitivity

Linear: lOO%/volt

Accuracy (1

rate, 30% depth, normal mode): 5%

Exponential: 10 dB/volt

Accuracy (Normal Mode): 0.25

of depth in

Incidental Phase Modulation (30% depth): 0.2 radians peak, typical

Incidental FM: Incidental phase modulation x modulation rate

Typical AM Distortion

(ALC level

Carriers

Rate

R a t e

AM Depth

100

Deep m od e offer s r ed u ced d ist or t ion for ver y d eep AM. Wa vefor m is DC-cou p led a n d

feed b a ck -leveled a t ALC levels a b ove -13 At ALC levels b elow -13 ou tp u t

is DC-con t r olla ble, bu t su bject t o t yp ica l sa m p le-a n d -h old d r ift of 0.25

Th e H P 8360 h a s t w o u n leveled m od es, ALC off a n d sea r ch . In ALC off m od e, t h e

m od u la tor d r ive ca n be con tr olled fr om th e fr on t p a n el to va r y qu iescen t RF ou tp u t

level. In sea r ch m od e, t h e in st r u m en t m icr op r ocessor m om en t a r ily closes t h e ALC loop

t o fin d t h e m od u la t or d r ive set t in g n ecessa r y t o m a k e t h e q u iescen t R F ou t p u t level

eq u a l t o a n en t er ed va lu e, t h en op en s t h e ALC loop w h ile m a in t a in in g t h a t m od u la t or

d r ive set t in g. Neit h er of t h ese m od es is feed b a ck leveled .

Mod u la tion d ep th is 40

on HP a n d HP

b elow m a xim u m a va ila b le p ow er for fr eq u en cies > 20

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vmarker 1

V m o r k e r

Locked Mode

Maximum Deviation:

MHz

Rates (3

bandwidth, 500

deviation): 100

to 8 MHz

Maximum Modulation Index (deviation/rate): n x 5

Unlocked Mode

Maximum Deviation

At rates

At rates > 100 Hz:

100 Hz:

MHz

Rates (3

bandwidth, 500

deviation): DC to 8 MHz

Sensitivity

100

1 MHz, or 10 MHz/volt, switchable

Accuracy (1 MHz rate, 1 MHz deviation): 10%

Full AM bandwidth and depth is typically available at any pulse

rate or width. FM is completely independent of AM and pulse

modulation.

Simultaneous

Modulations

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Modulation

Generator

Option 002

Internal Waveforms: sine, square, triangle, ramp, noise

Rate

AM, FM

Range

Sine: 1 Hz to 1 MHz

Square, triangle, ramp: 1 Hz to 100

Resolution: 1 Hz

Depth, deviation

Range: same as base instrument

Resolution: 0.1%

Accuracy: same as base instrument

Modes: free-run, gated, triggered, delayed

Period range: 300 ns to 400 ms

Width Range: 25 ns to 400 ms

Resolution: 25 ns

Pulse

Accuracy: 5 ns

Video delay

Internal sync pulse: 0 to 400 ms

Externally-supplied sync pulse: 225 to 400 ms

Accuracy (rates

100

5% of range

Modulation Meter

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General

Operating Temperature Range: 0 to

Environmental

Warm-Up Time

EMC: Within limits of VDE

Level B, FTZ

and

Part 7

Operation: Requires 30 minute warm-up from cold start at 0 to

Internal temperature equilibrium reached over 2 hour warm-up

at stable ambient temperature.

Frequency Reference: Reference time base is kept at operating

temperature with the instrument connected to AC power.

Instruments disconnected from AC power for more than 24 hours

require 30 days to achieve time base aging specification. Instruments

disconnected from AC power for less than 24 hours require 24 hours

to achieve time base aging specification.

48 to 66 Hz; 115 volts

VA maximum (30 VA in standby)

or 230 volts

400

Power Requirements

Weight Dimensions

Net Weight: 27 kg (60 lb)

Shipping Weight: 36 kg (80 lb)

Dimensions: 178 H x 425 W x 648 mm D (7.0 x 16.75 x 25.5 inches)

Adapters Supplied

Part number 1250-1745

Part number 5061-5311

Type-N (female)

3.5 mm (female)

Part number 1250-2187

Part number 1250-2188

2.4 mm (female)

2.92 (female)

2.4 mm (female)

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Inputs & Outputs

Auxiliary Output

Provides an unmodulated reference signal from 2 to 26.5

at a typical minimum power level of -10

Nominal output

impedance 50 ohms. (SMA female, rear panel.)

RF Output

Nominal output impedance 50 ohms. (Precision 3.5 mm male on 20

and 26.5

panel.)

models, 2.4 mm male on 40 and 50

models, front

External ALC input

Used for negative external detector or power meter leveling. Nominal

input impedance 120 damage level volts. See RF output

specifications. (BNC female, front panel.)

Pulse input/Output

TTL-low-level signal turns RF off. When using the standard internal

pulse generator, a TTL-level pulse sync signal preceding the RF

pulse by nominally 80 ns is output at this connector. Nominal input

impedance 50 ohms, damage level

-0.5 volts. See modulation

specifications. (BNC female, front panel:)

AM Input

Nominal input impedance 50 ohms (internally switchable to 2

damage level

front panel.)

volts. See modulation specifications. (BNC female,

FM Input

Nominal input impedance 50 ohms (internally switchable to

600 ohms), damage level

(BNC female, front panel.)

volts. See modulation specifications.

Trigger Input

Activated on a TTL rising edge. Used to externally initiate an analog

sweep or to advance to the next point in step or list mode. Damage

level

-0.5 volts. (BNC female, rear panel.)

Trigger Output

Outputs a one-microsecond-wide TTL-level pulse at 1601 points

evenly spaced across an analog sweep, or at each point in step or list

mode. (BNC female, rear panel.)

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10 MHz Reference Input

Accepts 10 MHz Hz, 0 to

reference signal for

operation from external time base. Nominal input impedance 50

ohms. Damage level

-5 volts. (BNC female, rear panel.)

10 MHz Reference Output

Nominal signal level 0

nominal output impedance 50 ohms.

(BNC female, rear panel.)

Sweep Output

Supplies a voltage proportional to the sweep ranging from 0 volts

at start of sweep to volts at end of sweep, regardless of sweep

width. In CW mode, voltage is proportional to percentage of full

instrument frequency range. Minimum load impedance 3 kilohms.

Accuracy

typical. (BNC female, rear panel.)

Stop Sweep Input/Output

Sweep will stop when grounded externally. TTL-high while

sweeping, TTL-low when HP 8360 stops sweeping. Damage level

-0.5 volts. (BNC female, rear panel.)

Z-Axis Blanking/Markers Output

Supplies positive rectangular pulse (Approximately

volts into

during the retrace and bandswitch points of the RF output.

Also supplies a negative pulse (-5 volts) when the RF is at a marker

frequency (intensity markers only). (BNC female, rear panel.)

Output

Supplies voltage proportional to output frequency at 0.5 volts/GHz

(internally switchable to 0.25 or 1 volt/GHz). Maximum output 18

volts. Minimum load impedance 2

typical. (BNC female, rear panel.)

Accuracy

Source Module Interface

Provides bias, flatness correction, and leveling connections to

millimeter-wave source modules (Special, front and

rear panels.)

Auxiliary Interface

Provides control signal connections to HP

S-parameter Test

Set.

D-subminiature receptacle, rear panel.)

Pulse Video Output (Option 002 only)

Outputs the pulse modulation waveform that is supplied to the

modulator. This can be either the internally or externally generated

pulse modulation signal. (BNC female, rear panel.)

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse Sync Out (Option 002 only)

Outputs a 50 ns wide TTL pulse synchronized to the leading edge of

the internally-generated pulse. (BNC female, rear panel.)

AM/FM Output (Option 002 only)

Outputs the internally-generated AM or FM waveform. This output

can drive 50 ohms or greater. The AM output is scaled the same as

it is generated, either

or 10

The FM scaling depends

on the FM deviation selected. (BNC female, rear panel.)

10 MHz to 20

2 to 20

Models

Options

10 MHz to 20

2 to 20

High Power

10 MHz to 26.5

10 MHz to 40

10 MHz to 50

Option 001 Add Step Attenuator

With this option, minimum

output power is -110

to 20

Maximum leveled output power is lowered by 1.5

above 20 and 2.5 above 40

and

Option 002 Add Internal Modulation Generator

Adds a digitally-synthesized internal modulation waveform

source-on-a-card to the HP 8360. It provides signals that would

otherwise be supplied to the external modulation inputs.

Option 003 Delete Keyboard/Display

For security, tamper-resistance and cost savings in automated

system applications, this option deletes the keyboard and display.

Option 003 does not move the front panel connectors to the rear

panel, however, so in most cases, Option 004 should be ordered in

conjunction with Option 003.

Option 004 Rear Panel RF Output

Moves the RF Output, External ALC Input, Pulse Input/Output,

AM Input, and FM Input connectors to the rear panel.

Option 006 Fast Pulse Modulation

Improves pulse rise/fall time to 10 ns. Also effects maximum leveled

output power and harmonic performance.

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Option 008 1 Hz Frequency Resolution

Provides frequency resolution of 1 Hz.

Option 700 MATE System Compatibility

Provides CIIL programming commands for MATE system

compatibility.

Option 806 Rack Slide Kit

Used to rack mount HP 8360 while permitting access to internal

spaces.

Option 908 Rack Flange Kit

Used to rack mount HP 8360 without front handles.

Option 910 Extra Operating

Service Manuals

Provides a second copy of operating and service manuals.

Option 013 Rack Flange Kit

Used to rack mount HP 8360 with front handles. Front handles are

standard on the HP 8360.

Option

Two Years Additional Return-To-HP Service

Does not include biennial calibration.

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION

This chapter provides installation instructions for the HP 8360

series synthesized sweeper and its accessories. It also provides

information about initial inspection, damage claims, preparation for

use, packaging, storage, and shipment.

This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and

Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664, respectively.

CAUTION

Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the shipping container

or cushioning material is damaged, it should be kept until the

contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and

the synthesizer has been checked mechanically and electrically. The

contents of the shipment should agree with the items noted on the

packing slip. Procedures for checking the basic operation of the

synthesizer are in the “Operator’s Check and Routine Maintenance”

chapter. You will find procedures for checking electrical performance

in the “Performance Tests” chapter of your manual set.

Initial Inspection

If there is any electrical or mechanical defect, or if the shipment is

incomplete, notify the nearest Hewlett-Packard office. If the shipping

container is damaged, or if the cushioning material shows signs of

stress, notify the carrier as well as the Hewlett-Packard office. Keep

the shipping material for the carrier’s inspection. The HP office

will arrange for repair or replacement without waiting for a claim

settlement .

INSTALLATION 3-1

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

All HP 8360 series synthesizers are sent from the factory with the

following basic accessories:

Equipment Supplied

Rack handles (mounted)

Power cord

Software package

A set of manuals

The following adapters are also shipped with the synthesizers:

Typ e-N t o 3.5

(F )

1250-1745

5061-5311

3.5 (F ) to 3.5 m m (F )

There are several options available on the HP 8360 series

synthesizers. For descriptive information on all of the options

available, refer to the “Specifications” section of the “Operating

and Programming” chapter. For installation information on the

rack mounting kits, refer to later paragraphs in this chapter. For

information on retrofitting options, refer to “Option Retrofits” in this

manual set.

Options Available

Specifications

3-2 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preparation for Use

The HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers require a power source of

o or 48 to 66 Hz, single-phase.

Power Requirements

Power consumption is 400 VA maximum (30 VA in standby).

The synthesizer is provided with a voltage selector (located on the

rear panel) to match the synthesizer to the ac line voltage available

at the site of installation. Both the line selector and fuse were

selected at the factory to match the ac line voltage expected to be

found at the shipping destination. Verify that the voltage selector

Line Voltage and Fuse

Selection

has

set to the correct line voltage before connecting power to

the synthesizer.

For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with

same type and rating. The use of other fuses or material is prohibited.

Refer to the “Routine Maintenance” chapter for information on

changing fuses.

Before switching on this product, make sure that the line voltage

selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the

correct fuse is installed. Assure the supply voltage is in the specified

range.

CAUTION

INSTALLATION 3-3

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In accordance with international safety standards, this instrument

is equipped with a three-wire power cable. When connected to an

appropriate power line outlet, this cable grounds the instrument

Power Cable

cabinet. Figure

shows the styles of plugs available on power

cables supplied with Hewlett-Packard instruments. The HP part

numbers indicated are part numbers for the complete power

cable/plug set. The specific type of power cable/plug shipped with

the instrument depends upon the country of shipment destination.

This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing

ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be

inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact.

Any interruption of the protective conductor, inside or outside the

instrument, is likely to make the instrument dangerous. Intentional

interruption is prohibited.

WARNING

CAUTION

Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this

instrument. Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using

this cord may cause instrument damage.

The offset prong of the three-prong connector is the grounding pin.

The protective grounding feature is preserved when operating the

synthesizer from a two contact outlet by using a three-prong to a

two-prong adapter and connecting the green wire of the adapter to

ground. An adapter is available (for US connectors only) as HP part

number

Install the instrument so that the detachable power cord is readily

identifiable and is easily reached by the operator. The detachable

power cord is the instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects

the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the

instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is

not a LINE switch. Alternately, an externally installed switch or

circuit breaker (which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by

the operator) may be used as a disconnecting device.

Specifications

3-4 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CABLE

LENGTH

(inches)

CABLE

COLOR

HP PART

PLUG DESCRIPTION

FOR USE IN COUNTRY

PLUG TYPE

Straight

9 0 ”

Mint Gray

United Kingdom,

Cyprus, Nigeria,

8120-1351

8120-1703

Zimbabwe, Singapore

Straight

90”

1 12

Gray

Australia,

8120-1369

8120-0696

New Zealand

Mint Gray

Straight

East and West Europe,

Saudi Arabia, Egypt,

Republic of So. Africa,

India (unpolarized in

many nations)

8120-1689

6 9 2 9 0 ”

United States,

Straight

9 0 ”

Black

8 1 2 0 - 1 3 4 8

8 1 2 0 - 1 3 9 8

8 1 2 0 - 1 7 5 4

8120-1378

8120-1521

8120-1676

Canada, Japan,

Black

Straight

90”

Mexico, Philippines,

Taiwan

Jade Gray

Straight

Switzerland

Straight

1959

Gray

8 1 2 0 - 2 1 0 4

24507, Type 12

United States, Canada

Straight

8 1 2 0 - 0 6 9 8

Denmark

Gray

Straight DHCK 107

8 1 2 0 - 1 9 5 7

8 1 2 0 - 2 9 5 6

Straight

8120-1860

(System Cabinet Use)

Earth Ground;

Line;

Neutral.

Part number for plug is industry identifier for plug only. Number shown for cable is HP Part Number for complete

cable including plug.

3-1. AC Power Cables Available

INSTALLATION 3-5

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can operate the synthesizer using one of three external interface

languages: SCPI, Analyzer language, or CIIL (Option 700).

Language Selection

Note

How to View or Change a Language Selection from the Front Panel

To set a programming language from the front panel, the instrument

language on the rear panel HP-IB switch

be set to 7 (all

and

Figure 3-2)

The HP-IB menu provides access to the synthesizer’s programming

language:

1. Press SYSTEM

2. Select HP-IB Menu.

3. The synthesizer displays the three language

softkeys: Programming Language SCPI ,

Programming Language

Language

the selected language.

4. Select the desired

. An asterisk indicates

If the synthesizer displays Rear panel HP-IB language must be 7

(111) in order to change current language the address

on the rear panel HP-IB switch (Figure 3-2) is set to something other

than 7 (all

Remember

Note

If the synthesizer does not have Option 700, and you select

Power Up Language CIIL , the instrument displays

*****OPTION NOT INSTALLED*****.

5. The asterisk indicates the selected

and the synthesizer

displays LANG: XXXX, ADRS=XX, REV da mo yr.

How to Select a Language on a Synthesizer without a Front Panel

If your synthesizer does not have a front panel, set the rear panel

ure 3-2) for the language you want. (See Table

HP-IB switch (F g

for language addresses.)

Table 3-1. Language HP-IB Addresses

Language HP-IB Address

(Decimal)

Analyzer

Specifications

3-6 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP-IB

LANG ADDRESS

Figure 3-2. Rear Panel HP-IB Switch

In certain applications, the synthesizer acts as a controller for a

HP-IB Address

Selection

Because of this, the address menu

power meter and a printer.

provides access not only to the synthesizer’s HP-IB address, but also

to the address at which the synthesizer expects to see a power meter,

and the address at which the synthesizer expects to see a printer.

(See Table 3-2 for factory-set addresses.)

Table 3-2. Factory-Set HP-IB Addresses

Instrument HP-IB Address

(Decimal)

Synthesizer

Power Meter

Printer

INSTALLATION 3-7

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to View or Change an HP-IB address from the Front Panel

To set an HP-IB address from the front panel, the instrument

address on the rear panel HP-IB switch (Figure 3-2) must be set to

31 (all

Note

1. Press SYSTEM

Select HP-IB Menu Adrs

The synthesizer displays the three address softkeys: 8360

Meter Adrs , and Printer Adrs .

4. Select the desired

5. The synthesizer displays the address selected for that instrument.

6. If you want to change the address, use the keypad to enter the

desired address (0 to

then press

If the synthesizer displays Rear panel HP-IB address must be 31

(11111) in order to change current address the address

Remember

on the rear panel HP-IB switch (Figure 3-2) is set to something other

than 31 (all

How to Prevent a Front Panel Change to an HP-IB Address

To disable the address softkeys, set the instrument address on the

rear panel HP-IB switch (Figure 3-2) to any address other than 31

(all

How to Set the HP-IB Address on a Synthesizer without a Front Panel

If your synthesizer does not have a front panel, set the address on

the rear panel HP-IB switch (Figure 3-2) to the address you want

(factory default is 19).

All of the externally mounted connectors on the instrument are

discussed in the “Operating and Programming Reference” chapter,

Mating Connectors

If you are interested in the HP part number for

under “Connectors.”

a connector, see “Replaceable Parts” in this manual set.

To keep the internal

frequency reference oven at operating

10 MHz Frequency

Reference Selection

and Warmup Time

temperature, the synthesizer must be connected to ac line power.

The synthesizer requires approximately 30 minutes to warm up

from a cold start before the OVEN display message goes off. With

a stable outside temperature, internal temperature equilibrium is

reached after approximately two hours. For additional information on

warmup times, see “Specifications,” in this volume.

Specifications

3-8 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Temperature. The synthesizer may be operated in environments with

temperatures from 0 to

Operating Environment

Humidity. The synthesizer may be operated in environments

with humidity from 5 to 80% relative at

However,

protect the synthesizer from temperature extremes, which can cause

condensation within the instrument.

Altitude. The synthesizer may be operated at pressure altitudes up

to 4572 meters (approximately 15,000 feet).

Cooling. The synthesizer obtains all cooling airflow by forced

ventilation from the fan mounted on the rear panel. Information

on cleaning the fan filter is located in the “Routine Maintenance”

chapter.

Ensure that all airflow passages at the rear and sides of the

synthesizer are clear before installing the instrument in its operating

environment. This is especially important in a rack mount

configuration.

Caution

INSTALLATION 3-9

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Option 806 synthesizers are supplied with rack mount slides and the

necessary hardware to install them on the synthesizer. The following

table itemizes the parts in this kit.

Rack Mount Slide Kit

(Option 806)

Table 3-3. Rack Mount Slide Kit Contents

Description

Quantity

Rack Mount Kit (Includes the following parts)

Rack Mount Flanges

Screws

Slide Kit

the following parts)

Slide Assemblies

Screws (Inner Slide Assembly)

Screws (Outer Slide Assembly)

Nuts (Outer Slide Assembly)

Slide Adapter Kit (NON-HP, includes the following parts)

Adapter Brackets

Adapter Bar

Screws (Bracket to Bar)

Nuts (Bracket to Slide Assembly)

Ventilation Requirements: When installing the instrument in a

cabinet, the convection into and out of the instrument must not be

restricted. The ambient temperature (outside the cabinet) must be

less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument

CAUTION

by 4

for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet. If the total

power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then forced

convection must be used.

Installation Procedure

1. Refer to Figure 3-3. Remove handle trim strips.

2. Remove four screws per side.

3. Using the screws provided, attach the rack mount flanges to the

outside of the handles.

4. Remove the side straps and end caps.

5. Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands.

Specifications

3-10 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Side

Figure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Refer to Figure 3-4. Remove the inner slide assemblies from the

outer slide assemblies.

7. To secure the side covers in place, mount the inner slide assemblies

to the instrument with the screws provided.

8. With the appropriate hardware, install the outer slide assemblies

to the system enclosure.

9. Lift the synthesizer into position. Align the inner and outer slide

assemblies and slide the instrument into the rack. Realign the

hardware as needed for smooth operation.

MOUNTING HARDWARE

FOR HP

SYSTEMS ENCLOSURES

MOUNTING HARDWARE

FOR NON-HP

SYSTEMS ENCLOSURES

Figure 3-4. Chassis Slide Kit

Specifications

3-12 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Option 908 synthesizers are supplied with rack flanges and the

necessary hardware to install them on the synthesizer after removing

the instrument handles. The following table itemizes the parts in this

Rack Flange Kit for

Synthesizers with

Handles Removed

(Option 908)

Table 3-4.

Rack Flange Kit for Synthesizers with Handles Removed

Contents

Quantity

D e s cr i p t i o n

Rack Mount Flanges

Screws

Ventilation Requirements: When installing the instrument in a

cabinet, the convection into and out of the instrument must not be

restricted. The ambient temperature (outside the cabinet) must be

less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument

CAUTION

by 4

for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet. If the total

power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then forced

convection must be used.

INSTALLATION 3-13

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installation Procedure

1. Refer to Figure 3-5. Remove handle trim strips.

2. Remove the four screws on each side that attach the handles to

the instrument; remove the handles.

3. Using the screws provided, attach the rack mount flanges to the

synthesizer.

4. Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands before rack

mounting the instrument.

Figure 3-5. Rack Mount Flanges for Synthesizers with Handles Removed

Specifications

3-14 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Option 913 synthesizers are supplied with rack flanges and the

necessary hardware to install them on the synthesizer without

removing the instrument handles. The following table itemizes the

parts in this kit.

Rack Flange Kit for

Synthesizers with

Handles Attached

(Option 913)

Table 3-5.

Rack Flange Kit for Synthesizers with Handles Attached

Contents

Ventilation Requirements: When installing the instrument in a

cabinet, the convection into and out of the instrument must not be

restricted. The ambient temperature (outside the cabinet) must be

less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument

CAUTION

by 4

for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet. If the total

power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then forced

convection must be used.

INSTALLATION 3-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installation Procedure

1. Refer to Figure 3-6. Remove handle trim strips.

2. Remove the four screws on each side that attach the handles to

the instrument.

3. Using the longer screws provided, attach the rack mount flanges to

the outside of the handles.

4. Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands before rack

mounting the instrument.

Figure 3-6. Rack Mount Flanges for Synthesizers with Handles Attached

Specifications

3-16 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The synthesizer may be stored or shipped within the following limits:

Environment

Temperature

Humidity

Altitude

-40” to

5% to 95% relative at 0” to

Up to 15240 meters. Pressure approximately 50,000

feet.

The synthesizer should be protected from sudden temperature

fluctuations that can cause condensation.

INSTALLATION 3-17

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Use the following steps to package the synthesizer for shipment to

Hewlett-Packard for service:

Package the

Synthesizer for

Shipment

1. Fill in a service tag (available at the end of Chapter 4) and attach

it to the instrument. Please be as specific as possible about the

nature of the problem. Send a copy of any or all of the following

information:

Any error messages that appeared on the synthesizer display

A completed Performance Test record from the service guide for

your instrument

Any other specific data on the performance of the synthesizer

Synthesizer damage can result from using packaging materials other

than those specified. Never use styrene pellets in any shape as

packaging materials. They do not adequately cushion the instrument

or prevent it from shifting in the carton. Styrene pellets cause

equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in

the synthesizer fan.

CAUTION

2. Use the original packaging materials or a strong shipping container

that is made of double-walled, corrugated cardboard with 159 kg

(350 lb) bursting strength. The carton must be both large enough

and strong enough to accommodate the synthesizer and allow

at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the synthesizer for packing

material.

3. Surround the instrument with at least 3 to 4 inches of packing

material, or enough to prevent the instrument from moving in

the carton. If packing foam is not available, the best alternative

from Sealed Air Corporation (Hayward,

Air Cap

CA 94545). Air Cap 1ooks1ike a plastic sheet covered with

inch air-filled bubbles. Use the pink Air Cap to reduce static

electricity. Wrap the instrument several times in the material to

both protect the instrument and prevent it from moving in the

carton.

4. Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive

tape.

5. Mark the shipping container “FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH

CARE” to ensure careful handling.

6. Retain copies of all shipping papers.

In any correspondence, refer to the synthesizer by model number

and full serial number.

Specifications

3-18 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following paragraphs are intended to assist you in converting

existing HP based systems to HP 8360 series synthesized

sweeper based systems. Both manual and remote operational

differences are addressed. Manual operation topics are:

functional compatibility

front panel operation

conditions upon instrument preset

connections to other instruments

Remote operation topics are:

language compatibility

status structure

programming languages

INSTALLATION 3-19

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual Operation

Compatibility

The HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers are designed to be, in all

but very few cases, a complete feature

of the HP

synthesized sweepers. The most notable omissions are that the

HP 8360 series does not accept:

line triggers (ie 50 or 60 Hz line frequency)

an external leveling input from positive diode detectors

Front Panel Operation

The HP 8360 series uses a

menu driven approach toward

accessing instrument functions versus a front panel key or shift key

sequence as with the HP

Instrument Preset Conditions. The factory defined preset conditions

for the HP 8360 series are identical to those for the HP

The HP 8360 series also allows you to define a different set of preset

conditions. Refer to “Changing the Preset Parameters,” in Chapter 1

for examples and more information. Table 3-6 illustrates the factory

instrument preset conditions for the HP 8360 series and the HP

An instrument preset turns off all the functions and then

sets the following:

Table 3-6.

Instrument Preset Conditions for the HP

Function

Condition

Sweep Mode

Full Span

Continuous/Auto

Sweep

Trigger

Free Run

Markers

Modulation

All Off

Off

Size

10% of span

Status Bytes

Leveling

Cleared

Internal

RF Output

Power Level

Power Step Size

Power Sweep/Slope

Storage Registers

HP-IB Address

Retain current values

Retains current value

Unchanged

Status Byte Mask

Extended Status Byte Mask Unchanged

Unchanged

Language Mode

Specifications

INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Connections

The HP 8510 Network Analyzer

The HP 8360 series synthesizer is compatible with any HP 8510

network analyzer with firmware revision 4.0 or higher. To upgrade

firmware for an existing HP 8510, an HP

Revision 4.0

Upgrade Kit or an HP Revision 5.0 Upgrade Kit is required.

HP 8510 revisions prior to 6.0 (not inclusive) require that you use

the following connections:

SWEEP OUTPUT

STOP SWEEP IN/OUT

HP-IB INTERFACE

AUXILIARY INTERFACE

HP 8510 revisions 6.0 and greater use the connections as designated

on the rear panel of the synthesizer. They are:

TRIGGER OUTPUT

STOP SWEEP IN/OUT

HP-IB INTERFACE

AUXILIARY INTERFACE

The dedicated HP 8510 versions of the HP 8360 (HP

configured to power-up to one of two possible

may b

system languages, network analyzer language, or SCPI (Standard

Commands for Programmable Instruments). This configuration is

controlled via a switch located on the rear panel of the instrument.

The factory default setting for this switch is network analyzer

language at an HP-IB address of 19. To interface with a network

analyzer the language selected must be Analyzer language. Refer to

earlier paragraphs in this chapter for the rear panel switch settings.

Models other than the dedicated HP 8510 versions are set at the

factory for SCPI. To interface with a network analyzer the language

selected must be Analyzer language.

Note

INSTALLATION 3-2 1

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The HP

Scalar Network Analyzer

The connections between the analyzer and the HP 8360 series are

similar to the connections between the analyzer and the

The HP 8360 series differs from the HP

one connection only. It unnecessary to connect the modulator drive

signal from the analyzer to the source. The HP 8360 series internally

produces the 27.8

modulated signal necessary for AC mode

measurements on the analyzer. The connections from the HP 8360

series to the analyzer are:

n Z-AXIS

SWEEP OUTPUT

STOP SWEEP IN/OUT

HP-IB Interface

Configure the general-purpose HP 8360 series to HP-IB address 19

and network analyzer language for operation with the analyzer. For

information on selecting the instrument address and language refer to

earlier paragraphs in this chapter.

The dedicated HP 8510 versions (HP

of the

HP 8360 series cannot be used with the HP

The HP 83550 Series Millimeter-wave Source Modules

Refer to “Leveling with MM-wave Source Modules,” in Chapter 1 for

information and examples.

The HP 89708 Noise Figure Meter

Connections from the HP 8360 series to the HP

meter are identical to those used with the HP

noise figure

Configure

the HP 8360 series to an address corresponding to the source address

of the HP 8970, typically HP-IB address 19, and network analyzer

language.

Specifications

3-22 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote Operation

Language Compatibility

The HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers support three HP-IB

programming languages; network analyzer language, SCPI (Standard

Commands for Programmable Instruments), and M.A.T.E. CIIL

language (Option 700).

Network Analyzer Language

HP 8360 series network analyzer language is syntactically and

semantically identical to the HP

HP-IB mnemonics.

However, fundamental hardware differences such as:

command execution time,

instrument diagnostics,

and other hardware specific functions

exist and prevent executing an unmodified HP

successfully. For example, the HP 8360 series does not recognize or

accept the HP learn string.

program

Test and Measurement System Language

SCPI is an HP-IB programming language developed by

Hewlett-Packard specifically for controlling electronic test and

measurement instruments. It is designed to conform to the IEEE

488.2 standard which provides codes, formats, protocols, and

common commands for use with IEEE 488.1-1987 that were

unavailable in the previous standard. SCPI provides commands that

are common from one Hewlett-Packard product to another for like

functions, thereby eliminating device specific commands.

Refer to “Getting Started Programming,” in Chapter 1 for

information on SCPI.

Control Interface Intermediate Language

CIIL is the instrument control programming language used in Option

700 HP 8360 series. Like the HP

the Option 700 HP

8360 series is M.A.T.E.-compatible. Refer to the HP 8360 Option 700

Manual Supplement for information on this option.

Table 3-8 illustrates the programming command in network analyzer

language and its equivalent SCPI programming command. In the

table, numbers enclosed by greater/less than symbols (<>) are

Converting from

Network Analyzer

Language to

are used to enclose one or more options

parameters. Braces

that may be used zero or more times. A vertical bar can be read

as “or”, and it is used to separate alternative parameter options.

Optional numeric suffixes for SCPI commands are enclosed in square

brackets

INSTALLATION 3-23

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Features not available in one of the language modes is marked by a

horizontal line in the corresponding column. In the interest of brevity

all SCPI commands have been listed in their most concise form.

For a complete and comprehensive listing of the synthesizer SCPI

commands refer to “SCPI Command Summary,” in Chapter 2. For

explanations of SCPI refer to “Getting Started Programming,” in

Chapter 1.

Numeric Suffixes

Numeric suffixes consist of 2 or

scale an associated value. The numeric suffixes for network analyzer

language on the HP 8360 series and the HP are identical.

codes that terminate and

Table 3-7 lists the HP 8360 series suffixes. The default unit for each

type of suffix is shown in bold type.

Table 3-7. Numeric Suffixes

Network Analyzer

Language

Frequency

Power Level

Power Ratio

Time

Status Bytes

There are two separate and distinct status structures within the

HP 8360, series depending on the HP-IB language selected. When

network analyzer language is selected, the status structure utilized

is structurally and syntactically the same as on the HP

This greatly enhances programming compatibility between existing

programs and network analyzer programs converted or

written for the HP 8360 series.

In the SCPI language mode, the status structure is defined by the

SCPI status system. All SCPI instruments implement status registers

in the same fashion.

For more information on the status registers consult “Analyzer

Status Register” and “SCPI Status Register,” in Chapter 2.

Specifications

3-24 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-8. Programming Language Comparison

Descr ip tion

Netw or k An a lyzer

La n gu a ge

SCP I La n gu a ge

AL C

Levelin g m od e, ext er n a l

P O W:AL C :S O U R D I O D ;

:P O W:AT T :AU T O O F F

Levelin g m od e, in t er n a l

A l

P O W:AL C I N T

Levelin g m od e, m m m od u le

P O W:AL C :S O U R M M H ;

:P O W:AT T :AU T O O F F

Levelin g m od e, p ow er m et er

P O W:AL C :S O U R P M E T ;

:P O W:AT T :AU T O O F F

E n a b le n or m a l ALC

op e r a t ion

P O W:AL C :S T AT O N

P O W:AL C :S T AT O F F

P O W:S E AR O N

Disa b le ALC a n d con t r ol

m od u la tor d r ive d ir ectly

Set ou tp u t p ow er , th en

d isa b le ALC

Un cou p le a tten u a tor ,

SHP S

P O W:AT T :AU T O O F F ;

:P O W

con tr ol ALC in d ep en d en tly

F r e q u e n cy

Set CW fr equ en cy

C W <n u m >fr e q -su ffix

F A <n u m >fr e q -s u ffix

F B <n u m >fr e q -s u ffix

C F <n u m >fr e q -s u ffix

D F

F R E Q:CW <n u m >[fr e q -su ffix]

C W

Set sta r t fr equ en cy

Set stop fr equ en cy

Set cen ter fr equ en cy

Set fr eq u en cy sp a n

F R E Q :S T AR

S W E

F R E Q :S T O P

S W E

F R E Q :C E N T

S W E

F R E Q :S P AN

S W E

Set sw ep t m od e st ep size

Set CW m od e st ep size

SH CF

F R E Q:STE P <n u m >[fr e q -su ffix]

SH CW <n u m >fr e q -su ffix

SH F B

En a ble fr equ en cy

fu n ction

F R E Q:OF F S <n u m >[fr e q -su ffix]

;OF F S:STAT ON

En a ble fr equ en cy

n u ltip lier fu n ction

SHF A

S H AL

SHIP

F R E Q :M U L T

O N

Keep m u ltip lica tion fa ctor on

n st r u m en t on /off or p r eset

(R efer t o u ser

p r eset)

Mu ltip lica tion

n st r u m en t on /off or p r eset

Zoom fu n ction

SH ST

Specifications

INSTALLATION 3-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-8. Programming Language Comparison (continued)

Descr ip tion

Netw or k An a lyzer

La n gu a ge

SCP I La n gu a ge

H P -IB on ly fu n ct ion s

Ou tp u t sta tu s byte

O S

*S T B ?

(See SCP I com m on com m a n d s)

St a t u s b yt e m a sk

R E

*SR E

(See SCP I com m on com m a n d s)

E xt en d ed st a t u s b yt e m a sk

Clea r st a t u s b yt e

(See SCP I com m on com m a n d s)

Ou tp u t lea r n str in g

Mod e st r in g

Ad va n ce t o n ext b a n d cr oss

Disp la y u p d a tin g

D U

F P

DISP

Activa te fa st

m od e

En a ble fr on t p a n el k n ob

E K

SYST:KE Y 132 (en a ble u p )

SYST:KE Y 133 (en a b le d ow n )

In cr em en t fr equ en cy

(See SCP I com m on com m a n d s)

SYST:ILR N

In p u t lea r n st r in g

Keyboa r d r elea se

I L

Select n etw or k

a n a lyzer m od e

Ou tp u t a ctive va lu e

(See SCP I Com m a n d Su m m a r y)

D I AG :O U T P :B AN D ?

Ou tp u t n ext ba n d cr oss

fr equ en cy

F R E Q :S T AR ?;C E N T ?;:S WE :T I M E ?

D I AG :O U T P

Ou tp u t cou p led p a r a m eter s

Ou tp u t d ia gn ostics

D I AG :O U T P :F AU L ?

Ou tp u t fa u lt in for m a tion

Ou tp u t id en tity

(See SCP I com m on com m a n d s)

D I AG :O U T P :F R E Q ?

Ou tp u t la st lock fr equ en cy

Ou tp u t in ter r oga ted va lu e

Ou tp u t p ow er level

(See SCP I Com m a n d Su m m a r y)

P O W:L E V?

Specifications

3-28 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-8. Programming Language Comparison (continued)

Descr ip tion

Netw or k An a lyzer

La n gu a ge

SCP I La n gu a ge

Set r em ote k n ob

R B

R E

R eq u est st a t u s b yt e m a sk

*S R E ?

*E SE

R eset sw eep

AB O R

Nu m b er of st ep s in

a st ep p ed sw eep

S WE :P O I N

Sw a p n et w or k a n a lyzer

ch a n n els

S W

T I

Test H P -IB in t er fa ce

Set s sw eep t im e low er lim it

Ta k e sw eep

D I AG :T I N T ?

T L <n u m >t im e -s u ffix

T S

S WE :T I M E :L L I M

T S W;*WAI

In st r u m en t St a t e

In st r u m en t p r eset

I P

S YS T :P R E S

L O C AL

Loca l in str u m en t con tr ol

L O C AL

H P -IB a d d r ess)

Ma r k er s [n ] is 1 to 5, 1 is d efa u lt

Tu r n on a n d set m a r k er

Mn <n u m >fr e q -su ffix

MAR K[n ]:F R E Q

<n u m >[fr eq -su ffix]

O N

Tu r n off fr equ en cy m a r k er

MAR K[n ] OF F

E n a b le

Disa b le

sw eep

S WE :M AR K :S T AT O N

S WE :M AR K :S T AT O F F

S WE :M AR K :XF E R

MAR K[n ]:DE LT?

MP O

Move st a r t ->Ml

SH MP

En a ble d elta m a r k er

Disa b le d elt a m a r k er

M AR K O F F

Move m a r k er t o

cen ter fr equ en cy

M C

:F R E Q :C E N T

M AR K :AO F F

Tu r n off a ll m a r k er s

S H M O

Tu r n on a m p lit u d e m a r k er s

O N

;AM P L :VAL

Tu r n off a m p litu d e m a r k er s

M AR K :AM P L O F F

INSTALLATION 3-27

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-8. Programming Language Comparison (continued)

Descr ip tion

Netw or k An a lyzer

La n gu a ge

SCP I La n gu a ge

Mod u la tion

Sca la r p u lse m od u la tion

SH P M

P ULS:SOUR SCAL;STAT ON

P ULS:SOUR E XT;STAT ON

E n a b le ext er n a l

p u lse m od u la t ion

Disa ble exter n a l

p u lse m od u la t ion

P ULS:SOUR E XT;STAT OF F

E n a b le lin ea r ly sca led AM

Disa b le lin ea r ly sca led AM

En a ble AC cou p led F M

AM:TYP E LIN;STAT ON

AM :T YP E L I N ;S T AT O F F

F M :S E N S

AC;STAT ON

Disa ble AC cou p led F M

F M :S T AT O F F

P ow er

Set p ow er level

Activa te p ow er sw eep

Dea ctiva te p ow er sw eep

RF ou tp u t On

P L

P O W

P O W:M O D E S WE

P O W:M O D E F I X

P O W:S T AT O N

P O W:S T AT O F F

P O W:AT T :AU T O O F F

RF ou tp u t Off

Un cou p le in ter n a l

SHP S

P L

a t t en u a t or a n d ALC

Cou p le in t er n a l a t t en u a t or

a n d ALC

P O W:AT T :AU T O O N

P O W :A T T

Set a tten u a tor va lu e a n d

u n cou p le a tten u a tor

Set p ow er st ep size

Act iva t e p ow er slop e fu n ct ion

Do a u to tr a ck

P O W:S T E P

P OW:SLOP

SH R P

S H AK

C AL :T R AC

p ea k R F

C AL :P E AK :AU T O O N

C AL :P E AK

P ea k R F on ce

Specifications

3-28 INSTALLATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-8. Programming Language Comparison (continued)

Descr ip tion

Netw or k An a lyzer

La n gu a ge

SCP I La n gu a ge

Sw eep

Set sw eep t im e

Sw eep on ce

Sin gle sw eep

ST <n u m >t im e -su ffix

<n u m >[t im e -su ffix]

[NIT

Sw eep con tin u ou sly

Sw eep m a n u a lly

O N

M AN

Act iva t e st ep sw eep m od e

S T E P ;M O D E M AN

F R E Q :M O D E S WE

Act iva t e r a m p sw eep m od e

Tr igger , exter n a l

AN AL ;:F R E Q :M O D E S WE

E XT

I M M

Tr igger , fr ee r u n

T R S B

Tr igger , step

S y s t e m

R eca ll a n in st r u m en t st a t e

Sa ve a n in st r u m en t st a t e

R C

s v

Activa te a lter n a te

st a t e sw eep

O N

Dea ct iva t e a lt er n a t e

st a t e sw eep

O F F

(cycle p ow er )

(h a r d w a r e )

Disp la y softw a r e r evision

*I D N ?

(See SCP I com m on com m a n d s)

Select a n in ter n a l

fr equ en cy r efer en ce

R OSC INT

E X T

a n ext er n a l

r efer en ce

p a n el/h a r d w a r e)

H P -IB a d d r ess

or h a r d w a r e sw it ch )

SCP I (or h a r d w a r e sw it ch )’

SCP I

n et w or k a n a lyzer la n gu a ge

CIIL (or h a r d w a r e sw it ch )

(Or h a r d w a r e)

CIIL

S AVE

O F F

sa ve/r eca ll r egist er s

‘u r ge a ll in st r u m en t m em or y

in st r u m en t d isp la y

SHKZOHZ

OF F

D U O

Wa it on e secon d a ft er execu t in g t h is com m a n d b efor e sen d in g a n y a d d it ion a l com m a n d s or t h ey m a y b e lost or ign or ed .

INSTALLATION

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATOR’S CHECK and ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified

personnel. To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.

WARNING

The local operator’s check (front panel use) allows the operator to

make a quick check of the main synthesizer functions prior to use.

For delete front panel options of the HP 8360 series, use the “Front

Panel Emulator Software” to perform an operator’s check.

If the synthesizer requires service and the routine maintenance

procedures do not clear the problem, contact a qualified service

technician. A list of HP Sales and Support Offices appears at the end

of this chapter. To help the service technician identify the problem

quickly, fill out and attach a service repair tag. Service repair tags

are provided at the end of this chapter. If a self test error occurs,

note the name of the failure and the referenced paragraph number

in the failure symptoms/special control settings section of the tag.

Provide any information that you feel is important to recreate the

failure.

Service Information

Operator’s Check/Routine Maintenance

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The preliminary check provides assurance that most of the internal

functions of the synthesizer are working. The main check provides a

general check of the overall functions of the synthesizer. No external

equipment is needed.

Description

Each time the synthesizer is turned on the synthesizer performs a

series of self tests on the internal CPU, power supplies, and front

panel. When the self test is complete, the synthesizer returns to the

same functional configuration that it was in prior to power off. When

Preliminary Check

the

key is engaged, the synthesizer returns to the factory or

user preset functional configuration.

1. Turn the synthesizer on. Note the functional configuration.

2. Turn the synthesizer off. Verify that the amber STANDBY LED is

on.

3. Turn the synthesizer on. Verify that the amber STANDBY LED is

off, and that the green POWER ON LED is on.

a. Check the display, a cursor will appear in the upper left corner

followed by the HP-IB language, HP-IB address, and the date

code of the firmware installed in the synthesizer.

b. The display will now indicate the functional configuration

noted in step 1.

c. Check the fan, it should be turning.

Specifications

4-2 Operator’s Check/Routine Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press [SERVICE).

Select

Main Check

. Check that all tests performed pass.

If the display indicates a user preset was

3. Press

performed, select Factory Preset . Verify that the green

SWEEP LED is blinking, the amber RF ON/OFF LED is on, and

the red INSTR CHECK LED is off.

4. Press (USER CAL).

Select Tracking

a. If the synthesizer has Option 001, step attenuator, select

Auto Track. Wait for the synthesizer to finish peaking before

continuing.

b. If the synthesizer has no step attenuator installed, provide a

good source match on the output connector (a power sensor or

attenuator will do). Select Auto Track. Wait for the

synthesizer to finish peaking before continuing.

Press

Select Freq Cal Menu.

Verify that status problems do not

Span Cal Once.

Select

exist (UNLOCK, UNLVLED, or FAULT). An OVEN status message

will appear on the message line if the synthesizer has been

disconnected from ac power. This message will turn off within

10 minutes, if it does not, there may be a problem. If a FAULT

message is displayed, refer to menu map 6, Service to access fault

information.

Terminate the RF output with a good source match (either a

load or power sensor). Press (POWER LEVEL). Increase the power

level until the unleveled message is displayed on the message line.

Decrease the power level until the unleveled message turns off.

Note the power level reading. Verify that the synthesizer can

produce maximum specified power without becoming unleveled.

This completes the operator’s check. If the synthesizer does not

perform as expected, have a qualified service technician isolate and

repair the fault. See “Service Information.”

Operator’s Check/Routine Maintenance 4-3

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Routine maintenance consists of replacing a defective line fuse,

cleaning the air filter, cleaning the cabinet, and cleaning the display.

These items are discussed in the following paragraphs.

Table 4-1. Fuse Part Numbers

For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with

same type and rating. The use of other fuses or material is prohibited.

WARNING

The value for the line fuse is printed on the rear panel of the

synthesizer next to the fuse holder. See Figure

How to Replace the

Line Fuse

1. Turn off the synthesizer.

2. Remove the ac line cord.

The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device.

It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other

parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby

switch and is not a LINE switch.

Note

Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, rotate the fuse cap

counter-clockwise, and remove the fuse holder.

Replace the original fuse.

Replace the fuse holder in the rear panel. Using the screwdriver,

rotate the fuse cap clockwise to secure the fuse holder in place.

Reconnect the synthesizer to line power.

FOR FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE

HOLOER

Figure 4-1. Replacing the Line Fuse

Specifications

4-4 Operator’s Check/Routine Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The cooling fan located on the rear panel has a thin foam filter. How

often the filter must be cleaned depends on the environment in which

the synthesizer operates. As the filter collects dust, the fan speed

increases to maintain airflow (as the fan speed increases, so does the

fan noise). If the filter continues to collect dust after the fan reaches

maximum speed, airflow is reduced and the synthesizer’s internal

How to Clean the Fan

Filter

temperature increases. If the internal temperature reaches

the

synthesizer will automatically turn off and the amber STANDBY

LED will turn on. Clean the fan filter as follows:

1. Turn off the synthesizer.

2. Remove the ac line cord.

The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device.

It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other

parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby

switch and is not a LINE switch.

Note

3. Remove the screws holding the fan cage. See Figure 4-2.

4. Remove the fan cage from the rear panel.

filter retainer in warm water,

5. Rinse the fan cage, filter, and the

then dry.

reassemble the synthesizer.

6. Reverse the removal procedure to

Figure 4-2. Removing the Fan Filter

Specifications

Operator’s Check/Routine Maintenance 4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clean the cabinet using a damp cloth only.

How to Clean the

Cabinet

The display of the synthesizer is protected by a plastic display filter.

To clean the display filter, use mild soap or detergent and water, or

a commercial window cleaner (ammonia does not hurt the plastic

surface). Use a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaners,

tissues or paper towels, which can scratch the plastic.

How to Clean the

Display Filter

Specifications

4-6 Operator’s Check/Routine Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument History

This manual documents the current production versions of the

“standalone” HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers which include

the HP

and

As future versions of these instrument models are developed, this

manual is modified to apply to those instruments. Information

provided in this chapter allows you to adapt this manual to the

earlier versions. You may have to modify your manual using the

information in this chapter. Check the serial number prefix attached

to your synthesizer’s rear panel and then locate it in the following

tables. The tables tell you which changes to make. Incorporate the

changes in reverse alphabetical order.

Instrument History

HP 6360

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

instruments without Option 006, with serial

and below, have a pulse modulation video

prefix numbers

feedthrough specification of 0.1% at frequencies

2.0

replacement page for page 9 in the “Specifications” section is

provided following this instruction page. Discard the existing page 9

in the “Specifications” section.

Changes to the Service and Troubleshooting manuals are also

required for your serial prefix number. Refer to the “Instrument

History” chapters in those manuals.

Change B 5-3

HP 8380

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-4 Change B

HP 8380

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pulse modulation specifications apply for output frequencies 400

MHz and above.

Pulse

Option 006

Standard

On/Off

Rise/Fall Times

Minimum Width

Internally Leveled

Search Mode

25 ns

10 ns

50 ns

15 ns

Output Frequencies < 2.0

50 ns

Output Frequencies

ALC Off Mode

2.0

50 ns

15 ns

50 ns

Output Frequencies < 2.0

Output Frequencies 2.0

Minimum Repetition Frequency

Internally leveled

Search Mode

10 Hz

ALC Off Mode

Level Accuracy

relative to CW level)

Widths

typical

Widths < 1

(Search Mode)

typical

Video Feedthrough

Output Frequencies < 2.0

Power Levels

Power Levels > 10

Output Frequencies

2.0

0.1%

typical

Overshoot, Ringing

80 ns, typical

60 ns, typical

80 ns, typical

Output Frequencies

Compression

2.0

ns, typical

Output Frequencies < 2.0

Output Frequencies

2.0

In th e HP

sp ecifica t ion a p p lies a t ALC levels 0

a n d a b ove,

b elow

a n d over t h e 20 t o

t em p er a t u r e r a n ge. Sp ecifica t ion d egr a d es 5

a n d 1

p er

b elow ALC level 0

in t h ose m od els.

Op t ion 002 a d d s 30 n s d ela y a n d

n s p u lse com p r ession for ext er n a l p u lse in p u t s.

Change B 5-5

HP 8380

User’s Handbook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Pulse Generator

Width Range: 1

Period Range: 2

Resolution: 1

to 65 ms

Bandwidth (3

maximum rated power):

30% depth, modulation peaks 3

below

AM and Scan

DC to 100

(typically DC to 300

M odulation Depth

(ALC levels noted, can be offset using step attenuator)

Normal Mode: -20

to 1

below maximum available power

Deep Mode

Unleveled

below maximum available power

Sensitivity

Linear:

Accuracy (1

rate, 30% depth, normal mode): 5%

Exponential: 10 dB/volt

Accuracy (Normal Mode): 0.25

of depth in

Incidental Phase Modulation (30% depth): 0.2 radians peak, typical

Incidental FM: Incidental phase modulation x modulation rate

Typical AM Dis tortion

(ALC l e v e l

Ca r r i e r s

- -

Deep

- -

Ra t e

Rate

100

AM De p t h